HP 5334B User Manual 7029591

~
1' ..:«'"'"
'"'"
"-
J:
j OPERATING NO PROGR MMING M I
~
,.,J
j
,~
I
J
I
"
HP 5334A
:~
HP 53348
I
UNIVERSAL
"'"
;)
COUNTERS
General Information
Installation
"..,.~
Operation and Programming
Performance Tests
.I I
Ii
HEWLETT
PACKARD
OPERATING AND PROGRAMMING MANUAL
HP 5334A AND HP 5334B

UNIVERSAL COUNTERS
I
"
SERIAL NUMBER PREFIX: 2510A (HP 5334A),

2704A (HP 5334B)
This manual applies directly to HP 5334As with Serial

Number Prefix 2510A and HP 5334Bs with Serial Prefix
2704A.
The manual for an HP 5334A/B with a seriai number prefix

higher than the ones listed above will include a "Manual
Changes" supplement which will describe what changes, if
I any, need to be made to the manual to make it match the
instrument it accompanies. For serial prefixes below the
ones indicated in the above paragraph, refer to Section VII
of the appropriate Service Manual for backdating.
,
;1
@Copyrighl HEWLETT-PACKARD COMPANY 1987

5301 STEVENS CREEK BOULEVARD, SANTA CLARA. CA 95051-7299
MANUAL PART NUMBER 05334-90028

Microtiche Part Number 05334-90029 Printed: MAY 1987
Fliill HEWLETT
~e.I PACKAI=ID
MANUAL UPDATING CHANGES CHANGE DATE: June 26, 1989
* * * " MANUAL IDENTIFICATION * * * *

* "
" * " * MANUAL UPDATING COVERAGE* * * * * Instrument: UNIVERSAL
HP 5334A/B
*
COUNTER
** This supplement adapts your manual ** * OPERATING & PROGRAMMING
*
* to Serial Numbers prefixed through * * MANUAL
*
* 2820A for 5334A "
* *
* * * "
2839A for 5334B * Manual
Manual
Part No:
Microfiche:
05334-90028
05334-90029
*
* ******* ***** * ****** * *
* Manual Print Date: MAY 1987
*-.I:*'",** . 'r *
* ********** *
ABOUT THIS SUPPLEMENT
The information in this supplement is provided to correct manual errors and to

adapt the manual to instruments containing changes after the manual print date.
Change and correction information in this supplement is itemized by page

numbers corresponding to the original manual pages. The pages in this supple-
ment are organized in numerical order by manual page number.
HOW TO USE THIS SUPPLEMENT
Insert this title page in front of the title page in your manual.
Perform all changes specified for "All Serials", and all changes through the
Series Prefix of your instrument or board.
Insert any complete replacement pages provided into your manual in the proper
location.
If your manual has been updated according to the last edition of this supple-
ment, you need only perform those changes pertaining to the new series prefix.
See List of Effective Pages on the reverse side of this page. New information
affecting "All Serials" will be indicated by a "fI" in front of the page number.
FliiJIHEWLETT
~r.JI PACKARD
MANUAL CHANGES MODEL 5334A (05334-90028)
SERIAL PREFIX OR
SERIAL NUMBER
PAGE 1-2. GENERAL INFORMATION:
11 All Serials Trigger Level; Accuracy (Read Levels:

>Change second line to read:
(XlO: ±300 mV ±l% of trigger level reading (NOMINAL).
PAGE 1-5, TABLE 1-1. HP MODEL 5334A/B SPECIFICATIONS (Continued):
11 All Serials OPTIONS, OPTION 010 High Stability Timebase (Oven):

>Replace the Aging Rate and Warmup specifiations with the
following:
Long Term (Aging Rate):
A <5 x 10- 10 per day after 24 hour warm-up when:
1. oscillator off-time was less than 24 hours.
2. oscillator aging rate was <5 x 10- 10 per day prior to turn off.
B. <5 x 10- 10 per day in less than 30 days of continuous operation for off-time greater than 24 hours.
c. < 1 x 10- 7 per year for continuous operation.
Warmup:
Within 5 x 10-' of final value (see below) 10 min. after turn-on when:
1. oscillator is operated in a 25 C environment with 20 Vdc Oven Supply voltage applied.

0
2. oscillator off-time was less than 24 hours.
3. oscillator aging rate was <5 x 10- 10 per day prior to turn-off.
Final value is defined as oscillator frequency 24 hours after turn-on.

MANUAL CHANGES MODEL 5334A (05334-90028)
SERIAL PREFIX OR
SERIAL NUMBER
PAGE 3-49, OPERATION AND PROGRAMMING:
All Serials Table 3-4. Failure Messages:

>Change Message Description for Error 9.4 to read:
IlInter-processor handshake failure"
/1 >Add NOTE following Table 3-4:

NOTE
For the remote control of the TOTALIZE function with
external arming, you must set the external arm after
FN9, the TOTALIZE START command.
Example: OUTPUT 703; "FN9, XAI, XAjJ"

t
I
Measurement Starts Here
PAGE 4-39. PERFORMANCE TESTS:
All Serials >Change "+10" to "+100" at the t1VERIFYU step.
PAGE 4-43. PERFO~NUll~CE TESTS:
All Serials >Change "Revision Gil to "Revision K" in the last line of
paragraph 4-47.
PAGE 4-57, TABLE 4-4. HP-IB VERIFICATION PROGRAM LISTING (Cont'd):
All Serials >Change line 6390 to read as follows:

6390 OUTPUT A ; "INVALID COMMAND"
HP 5334A1B
Safety Considerations
SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
GENERAL
This product and related documentation must be reviewed for familiarization with safety markings and
instructions before operation.
This product is a Safety Class I instrument (provided with a protective earth terminal).
BEFORE APPLYING POWER

Verify that the product is set to match the available line voltage and the correct fuse is installed. Refer
to Section II, Installation.
SAFETY EARTH GROUND

An uninterruptible safety earth ground must be provided from the mains power source to the product
input wiring terminals or supplied power cable.
SAFETY SYMBOLS
Instruction manual symbol; the
product will be marked with this
I WARNING
l The WARNING sign denotes a
hazard. It calls attention to a
symbol when it is necessary for the procedure, practice, or the like,
user to refer to the instruction which, if not correctly performed or adhered to,
manual. could result in personal injury. Do not proceed
beyond a WARNING sign until the indicated con-
Indicates hazardous voltages. ditions are fully understood and met.
Indicates terminal is connected [: 'I] The CAUTION sign denotes a

rh OR..L to chassis when such connection
is not apparent.
CAUTION hazard: It calls attention to an
operating procedure, practice, or
the like, which, if not correctly performed or
adhered to, could result in damage to or destruc-
Alternating current. tion of part or all of the product. Do not proceed
beyond a CAUTION sign until the indicated con-
ditions are fully understood and met.
Direct current.
SAFETY INFORMATION
I WARNING I
Any interruption of the protective grounding conductor (inside or outside the instrument) or discon-
necting the protective earth terminal will cause a potential shock hazard that could result in personal
injury. (Grounding one conductor of a two conductor outlet is not sufficient protection.)
Whenever it is likely that the protection has been impaired, the instrument must be made inoperative
and be secured against any unintended operation.
If this instrument is to be energized via an autotransformer (for voltage reduction) make sure the common
terminal is connected to the earthed pole terminal (neutral) of the power source.
Instructions for adjustments while covers are removed and for servicing are for use by service-trained
personnel only. To avoid dangerous electric shock, do not perform such adjustments or servicing unless
qualified to do so.
For continued protection against fire, replace the line fuse(s) only with 250V fuse(s) of the same current
rating and type (for example, normal blow, time delay). Do not use repaired fuses or short circuited
fuseholders.
When measuring power line signals, be extremely careful and always use a step-down isolation trans-
former whose output voltage is compatible with the input measurement capabilities of this product. This
product's front and rear panels are typically at earth ground, so NEVER TRY TO MEASURE AC POWER
liNE SIGNALS WITHOUT AN ISOLATION TRANSFORMER.
HP 5334A1B
Table of Contents
TABLE Of CONTENTS
Section Tille Page
GENERAL INFORMATION . 1-1

1-1. Introduction . 1-1
1.\ 1-3. Manual Summary . 1-1
ill 1-6. Specifications , " . 1-1
1-8. Safety Considerations . 1-1
1-10. General , , ,. 1-2
1-12. Instrument and Manual Identification . 1-7
1-14. Description of Instrument . 1-7
1-18. Accessories .. 1-8
1-20. Options . 1-8
1-24. Recommended Test Equipment . 1-9
II INSTALLATION.................................................... 2-1
'1 2-1. Introduction................................................. 2-1
1.\ 2-3. Unpacking and Inspection 2-1
ill 2-5. Preparation for Use 2-1
2-6. Operatmg Environment ,...... 2-1
2-10. Power Requirements 2-1
2-12. Line Voltage and Fuse Selection............................. 2-1
2-18. Power Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-20. Hewlett-Packard Interface Bus 2-3
2-21. HP-IB Interconnections..................................... 2-3
2-23. Cable Length Restrictions 2-3
2-25. Address Selection 2-4
2-27. HP-IB Descriptions 2-4
2-29. Storage and Shipment 2-4
2-30. Environment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2-33. Packaging. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. .. .. .. . . .. . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . .... 2-4
/II OPERATION AND PROGRAMMING 3-1

3-1. Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3-4. Operating Characteristics..................................... 3-1
3-8. Basic Circuits and Measurements 3-2
3-11. Input Characteristics and Signal Conditioning................ 3-2
3-13. Range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3-18. Sensitivity. . . .. . . . . .. .. .. . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . .. 3-4
3-24. AC-DC Coupling 3-6
3-26. Trigger Level 3-7
3-33. Slope Control 3-8
3-35. Input Impedance 3-9
3-37. Attenuators .. .. ............................. ......... 3-9
3-40. Damage Level 3-9
3-42. Separate/Common A Input 3-9
3-47. 100 kHz Filter 3-9
3-49. Arming Input 3-10
3-51. How to Make Measurements 3-10
3-54. Frequency Measurements 3-11
3-60. Period Measurements 3-11
3-63. Time Interval Measurements 3-11
3-69. Time Interval Delay Measurements 3-12
iii
HP 5334A1B
Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)
Section Title Page
III OPERATION AND PROGRAMMING (Continued)

3-71. Ratio Measurements 3-13
3-74. Totalize Measurements 3-13
3-77. Voltage Measurements (applies only to HP 5334A with
Option 020) 3-14
3-79. Puise Width Measurements 3-14
3-82. Rise/Fall Time Measurements 3-14
3-85. Peak Voltage Measurements ......................•......... 3-15
3-88. Initial Power-Up Checks and Self-Diagnostics 3-16
3-92. Front Panel Controls, Indicators, and Connectors 3-17
3-94. POWER (STANDBY/ON) Key '" 3-17
3-97. RESET/LOCAL Key 3-17
3-99. Front Panel Controls 3-18
3-103. Front Panel MEMORY (applies to HP 5334A only) 3-18
3-105. GATE Group 3-18
3-107. GATE TIME/DELAY Key .......•.......................... 3-18
3-111. SINGLE CYCLE key 3-19
3-113. 100-GATE AVERAGE Key 3-19
• 3-115. MATH/MEMORY Group .•................................. 3-19
3-117. SELECT/ENTER key ....................•.................. 3-20
3-124. DISABLE Key 3-21
3-126. STORE Key (HP 5334A only) 3-21
3-130. RECALL Key (HP 5334A only) 3-22
3-135. FUNCTION/DATA Group 3-23
3-137. FREQ A Key 3-24
3-139. PERIOD A Key " 3_24
3-141. RATIO AlB Key 3-24
3-143. PULSE WIDTH A Key 3-25
3-145. FREQ B Key 3-25
3-147. T.I. A-B Key 3-25
3-150. RISE/FALL TIME A Key 3-26
3-152. FREQ C Key 3-26
3-154. T.I. A-B/DEL'AY Key 3-26
3-156. TOT START A Key 3-26
3-158. TOT STOP A Key 3-26
3-160. DVM Key (Option 020, for HP 5334A only) 3-26
3-162. INPUT Group ...................................•.......... 3-27
3-164. TRIGGER Light ........•.... " " 3-27
3-166. TRIGGER LEVEL/SENS Control 3-27
3-168. SENS Key " " 3-28
3-178. READ LEVELS Key 3-30
3-180. SLOPE/START ARM/STOP ARM Keys , '" 3-30
3-182. AC Key 3-31
3-184. X10 ATTN Key 3-31
3-186. 50 Ohm Z Key 3-31
3-188. 100 kHz FILTER A Key 3-31
3-190. COM A Key 3-31
3-192. AUTO TRIG Key 3-31
3-195. EXT ARM SELECT Key 3-32
3-200. INPUT A,S 3-36
Iv
HP 5334A1B
Table of Contents
Section Title Page

III OPERATION AND PROGRAMMING (Continued)
3-202. ARM INPUT 3-36
3-204. INPUT C (Option 030) 3-36
3-206. Front Panel Display and Annunciators 3-37
3-208. Rear Panel Controls and Connectors 3-41
3-210. HP 5334A AC Power Input Module 3-41
3-212. HP 5334B AC Power Input Circuit 3-41
3-214. GATE OUT Connector (HP 5334A Only) 3-41
3-216. TIME BASE IN/OUT Connector 3-41
3-218. TIME BASE AD) Control 3-41
3-220. TIME BASE INT/EXT Switch 3-42
3-222. HP-IB Interface Connector 3-42
3-224. Arm Trigger Level Control (HP 5334A Only) 3-42
3-226. Rear Panel INPUT Connectors (Option 060) 3-42
3-229. Option 010 Oven Oscillator Control (HP 5334A Only) , 3-42
3-231. Address Switch (HP 5334B Only) 3-42
r
"
3-233. Operator's Maintenance 3-42
3-235. Replacing C-Channel Fuse (HP 5334A oniy) 3-43
3-237. Power-Up/Warm-up 3-43
3-240. Operator's Checks 3-44
3-242. Power-Up Self-Check 3-44
3-246. Diagnostic Sequence 3-45
3-250. Preset and Lockout Conditions 3-46
3-252. Error Indications 3-47
3-255. Error Examples 3-49
3-257. Detailed Operating Instructions 3-51
3-260. Remote Programming via HP-IB 3-67
3-263. HP-I B Description 3-67
3-266. Interface System Terms 3-67
3-268. Major Interface Functions 3-68
3-272. Interface Capabilities 3-68
.'I 3-277. Front Panel Interface Status LEDs
3-279. Address Selection ...........................................•
3-70
3-70
3-286. Interface Commands 3-72
3-289. Device Independent Commands 3-72
3-292. Meta Messages 3-75
3-298. Meta Message Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 3-75
3-299. SRQ and Status Byte 3-76
3-304. Service Request Mask 3-77
3-306. Device Dependent Commands 3-78
.j 3-308.
3-310.
Device Command Definitions
Numeric Entry
3-78
3-79
3-312. Programming Commands 3-79
,
!
3-315. Command Group Descriptions 3-80
3-320. Miscellaneous and Special Functions 3-80
3-333. Output Formats 3-84
3-344. High Speed Output Data 3-86
3-352. Error Handling " ., 3-87
3-357. Preset and Disallowed Conditions 3-88
3-359. Programming Examples 3-91
v
HP 5334A1B
Table of Contents
Section Title Page
IV PERFORMANCE TESTS 4-1

4-1. Introduction. 4-1
4-3. Equipment Required 4-1
4-5. Operational Verification/Performance Test Record 4-1
4-7. Calibration Cycle 4-1
4-10. Test Procedures.............................................. 4-1
4-12. Operational Verification Tests c...... 4-1
4-15. Preliminary Procedure. . . .. .. .. . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . .. 4-2
4-16. Power-Up Self-Test/Diagnostic Mode '" 4-2
4-17. Read Levels 4-4
4-18. Ratio AlB 4-5
4-19. Frequency................................................... 4-5
4-20. Input Signal Conditioning Check .. '" , .. . . . . . . . . .. 4-6
4-21. T.I. A-B 4-8
4-22. Auto Trigger. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4-23. CMOS RAM (HP 5334A Only) 4-10
4-24. DVM (Options 020 and 050 HP - 5334A Only) 4-10
4-25. Channel C (Options 030 and 050 - HP 5334A) 4-10
4-26. Channel C (Options 030 - HP 5334B) 4-11
4-27. Performance Tests 4-13 .~.
4-30. Preliminary Procedure 4-13

4-31. Channel A Frequency Response and Sensitivity Test,
10 Hz-20 MHz 4-14
4-32. Channel B Frequency Response and Sensitivity Test,
10 Hz-20 MHz 4-16
80 MHz-100 MHz (For Non-Option 060 Instruments) 4-18
80 MHz-100 MHz (For Non-Option 060 Instruments) 4-20
80 MHz-100 MHz (For Option 060 Instruments) 4-21
80 MHz-100 MHz (For Option 060 Instruments) 4-23
4-37. Period A Test 4-24
4-38. Pulse Width A Test 4-25
4-39. Time Interval A to B Test 4-26
4-40. Time Interval A to B Delay Test 4-27
4-41. Ratio A/B Test 4-28
4-42. Rise/Fall Time A Test 4-29
4-43. DVM Accuracy Test (Options 020 and 050 - HP 5334A only) 4-31
4-44. Channel C Frequency Response and
Sensitivity Test - HP 5334A 4-33
4-45. Channel C Frequency Response and
Sensitivity Test - HP 5334B 4-35
4-46. HP-IB Verification Test 4-43
vi
HP 5334A1B
List of Tables
UST OF TABLES
Table Title Page
1-1. HP Model 5334A1B Specifications 1-2

1-2. Differences Between the HP 5334A and HP 5334B 1-7
1-3. Accessory Equipment Supplied 1-8
1-4. Accessories Available. . . . .. . . . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. . . . . .. . . .. . . . . .. . . . .. 1-8
1-5. Recommended Test Equipment 1-9
2-1. AC Power Cables Available 2-5
3-1. HP 5334A Trigger/Sensitivity Level Settings 3-29

3-2. Preset and Lockout Conditions 3-46
3-3. Error Messages 3-48
3-4. Failure Messages 3-49
3-5. HP 5334A/B HP-IB Interface Functions , 3-69
3-6. HP 5334A/B Interface Capabilities 3-70
3-7. Address Selection 3-72
3-8. Device Independent Commands 3-73
3-9. Meta Messages 3-74
3-10. Meta Messages and Controller Commands 3-75
3-11. HP 5334A/B Status Byte 3-77
3-12. HP 5334A/B Programming Command Set 3-82
3-13. HP-IB Preset and Disallowed Conditions 3-89
4-1. HP 5334A/B Operational Verification Test Record Card 4-12

4-2. HP 5334A/B Performance Test Record Card 4-39
4-3. HP 5334A/B HP-IB Verification Test Record Card 4-47
4-4. HP-IB Operational Verification Program Listing 4-48
vii
HP 5334A1B
list of Figures
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure Tille Page
1-1. Model 5334A/B Universal Frequency Counters and Accessories 1-0
2-1. HP 5334A Voltage Selection with Power Module PC Board . 2-2

2-2. HP 5334B Voltage Selection with Slide Switches . 2-3
2-3. Hewlett-Packard Interface Bus Connection . 2-6
3-1. 5implified Block Diagram of the Reciprocal Counter . 3-2

3-2. Invalid Input Signal Conditions " . 3-3
3-3. Valid Input Signal Conditions . 3-4
3-4. Acceptable Peak-to-Peak Amplitude . 3-4
3-5. Insufficient Peak-to-Peak Amplitude . 3-5
3-6. Trigger Level Set Below Midpoint of Input Signal . 3-5
3-7. Varying the Sensitivity Control Changes the Hysteresis Window . 3-6
3-8. AC-DC Coupling . 3-6
3-9. Trigger Level and Actual Trigger Point . 3-7
3-10. Trigger Level Control Shifts Hysteresis Window . 3-7
3-11. Positive and Negative Trigger Points . 3-8
3-12. Use of External Arming to Measure Frequency . 3-10
3-13. Time Interval Measurement , " " . 3-12
3-14. Time Interval Delay Measurement . 3-13
3-15. Pulse Width Measurement '" . 3-14
3-16. Rise/Fall Time Measurements . 3-15
3-17. Channel A Peak Voltage Measurement Display . 3-15
3-18. Intermediate Power-up Display . 3-16
3-19. GATE Group . 3-18
3-20. GATE TIME Selection Display . 3-19
3-21. MATH/MEMORY Group . 3-20
3-22. OFFSET ENTRY Display . 3-20
3-23. HP 5334A STORE ENTRY Mode Display . 3-21
3-24. HP 5334A RECALL ENTRY Mode Display . 3-22
3-25. HP 5334A DAC5 ENTRY Mode Display . 3-23
3-26. FUNCTION/DATA Group . 3-23
3-27. Ratio Measurement Display . 3-24
3-28. Pulse Width Measurement Display . 3-25
3-29. T.!. Measurement Display " . 3-25
3-30. INPUT Group . 3-27
3-31. Trigger Level/Sensitivity Control Application . 3-28
3-32. DACS ON Display . 3-30
3-33. Channel B Peak Voltage Measurement Display . 3-30
3-34. EXTERNAL ARM SELECT Entry Mode Display, Arming Off . 3-32
3-35. EXTERNAL ARM SELECT Display, Arming States Selected . 3-32
3-36. Arming Modes . 3-35
3-37. HP 5334A and HP 5334B C-Channels . 3-36
3-38. Front Panel Display and Annunciators . 3-37
3-39. Front Panel Features, Controls, Indicators, and Connectors . 3-39
3-40. Rear Panel Features, Controls, and Connectors . 3-40
3-41. Details of INPUT C BNC Connector and Fuse Mounting (5334A Only) .. 3-43
3-42. Self-Check PASS Display . 3-44
3-43. Display Check . 3-45
viii
HP 5334A/B
List of Figures
LIST OF FIGURES (Continued)
figure Title Page
3-44. FAIL Message Display 3-48

3-45. Error Message Display 3-48
3-46. Frequency Measurements 3-52
3-47. Frequency C Measurements 3-53
3-48. Period Measurements 3-54
3-49. Time Interval Measurements 3-55
3-50. Time Interval Delay Measurements 3-56
3-51. Time Interval Averaging 3-57
3-52. Ratio A/B Measurements 3-58
3-53. Totalize Measurements 3-59
3-54. Pulse Width Measurements 3-60
3-55. Rise/Fall Time Measurements 3-61
3-56. (DVM) Voltage Measurements (for 5334A Only) 3-62
3-57. Trigger Level Measurements 3-63
3-58. Channel A, Peak Voltage Measurements 3-64
3-59. Channel B, Peak Voltage Measurements 3-65
3-60. Gate Time/Delay Setting '" 3-66
3-61. HP 5334A/B Address Entry Display 3-71
4-1. Time Base Reference Setup 4-14

4-2. Channel A Frequency and Sensitivity Setup, 10 Hz-20 MHz 4-15
4-3. Channel B Frequency and Sensitivity Setup, 10 Hz-20 MHz 4-17
4-4. Channel A Frequency and Sensitivity Setup, 80 MHz-100 MHz 4-18
4-5. Channel B Frequency and Sensitivity Setup, 80 MHz-100 MHz 4-20
4-6. Channel A Frequency and Sensitivity Setup for Option 060 4-21
.1 4-7.
4-8.
Channel B Frequency and Sensitivity Setup for Option 060
Period A Test Setup
4-23
4-24
4-9. Pulse Width A Test Setup 4-25
4-10. Time Interval A to B Test Setup 4-27
4-11. Time Interval A to B Delay Test Setup 4-28
4-12. Ratio A/B Test Setup 4-29
4-13. Rise/Fall Time A Test Setup 4-30
4-14. DVM Accuracy Test Setup 4-31
4-15. HP 5334A Channel C Frequency and Sensitivity Setup 4-33
4-16. HP S334B Channel C Frequency and Sensitivity Setup 4-35
4-17. HP-IB Verification Test Setup 4-43
Ix
HP 5334A1B
Documentation Map
5334A1B
OPERA TJ NG AND
PROGRWMING
MANUAL
05334-90028
FUNDAMENTALS or
ELECTRONIC COUNTERS "
'I • 5334B. OPTION 700
INTERNAL CIIl INTERFACE
5952-7506 OPERATING PROGRAMMING
~ y 05334-90034
TUTORIAL DESCRIPTION OF
THE HEWLETT-PACKARD
A
• REMOTE AND FRONT PANEL
OPERATION OF THE 5334A
INTERFACE BUS HP-IP UNIVERSAL COUNTER
5952-0156 ~ y 5952-7698
INTRODUCTORY OPERATING
CONDENSED DESCRIPTION OF A "- GUIDE FOR HP 5334A
THE HEWLETT-PACKARD UNIVERSAL COUNTER WITH
INTERFACE BUS HP-IB y
SERIES 200 COMPUTERS
59401-90030 ~ AND BASIC
5952-7750
"- QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE

FOR THE 5334A
UNIVERSAL COUNTER
y 5952-7716
, }
5334A
SERVICE MANUAL
LOGIC SYMBOLOGY
ANSI/IEEE STD. 91-1984 :) 05334-90004
OR 53348
SERVICE MANUAL
05334-80030
5334A/8 SERVICE MANUAL - Provides the information needed to repair, adjust, and test the HP 5334A/B
Universal Counter.
LOGIC SYMBOLOGY - Describes logic symbols used in the Service Manual.
FUNDAMENTALS OF ELECTRONIC COUNTERS - Provides the basic concepts. techniques, and underlying
principles of electronic counters.
REMOTE AND FRONT PANEL OPERATION OF THE 5334A UNIVERSAL COUNTER Provides applications and
programming examples along with a helpful description of HP 5334A remote and front panel operation.
INTRODUCTORY OPERATING GUIDE FOR THE HP 5334A UNIVERSAL COUNTER WITH SERIES 200 COMPUTERS
AND BASIC - Provides a good tutorial for learning t; write programs for HP 5334A remote operation.
QUICK REFERENCE GUIDE FOR THE HP 5334A UNIVERSAL COUNTER - Provides a reference guide for HP 5334A
remote operation using HP-IB.
TUTORIAL DESCRIPTION OF THE HEWLETT-PACKARD INTERFACE BUS - Provides bacKground and all the basics
for understanding the Hewlett-PacKard implementation of IEEE Std. 488-1978.
CONDENSED DESCRIPTION OF THE HEWLETT-PACKARD INTERFACE BUS - Provides a good summary of
HP-IB operation.
x
HP 5334MB
Preface
PREfACE
This manual is designed to present the information required by the user to effectively operate and
program the HP 5334A/B Universal Counter.
It is divided into sections, each relating to a specific topic. As much as possible the sections are
self-contained. It is the intention of this manual to allow for quick location of desired information,
while still providing the overall depth of detail required. Some sections provide the learning and
working information, and will be used frequently. Other sections are dedicated to general and
introductory types of information, and are intended to be used only for reference. Where
applicable, photos, illustrations, and diagrams foldout have been placed throughout the manual.
In limiting the depth of coverage in this manual, a certain amount of previous knowledge on the
part of the reader must be assumed. A variety of additional related documentation is available.
These materials address in depth the specific areas of interest, and should be used, whenever
necessary, to supplement this manual. Users unfamiliar with HP-IB or Logic Symbology, for
example, may want to refer to the HP S334A/B Documentation Map to find additional sources of
information.
xi
HP 5334A1B
General Information
·I··.~·.I
j
•!
•••
HP 5334A
.!.E~ ~ WJ;·
HP 53348
HP 8170-1378
POWER CORD
(1 EACH)
Figure 1-1. Model 5334A/B Universal Frequency Counters and Accessories
1-0
HP 5334A1B
General Information
SECTION I
GENERAL INFORMATION
1-1. INTRODUCTION
1-2. This manual contains the information necessary to install, operate, and program the
Hewlett-Packard Model 5334A/B Universal Counters. The counters are shown in Figure 1-1 with
supplied accessories.
1-3. MANUAl. SUMMARY

1-4. This manual is divided into four sections, each covering a particular topic for the operation
and programming of the HP 5334A/B. The information contained in each section is described
below:
SECTION I, GENERAL INFORMATION: describes the instrument documented by this

manual and covers instrument identification, options, accessories, specifications, recom-
mended test equipment, and other basic information.
SECTION II, INSTALLATION: provides information concerning initial inspection, prepara-

tion for use (including address selection for remote operation), and storage and shipment.
SECTION III, OPERATION AND PROGRAMMING: provides information pertaining to

operating characteristics, making measurements, panel features, operating features,
operator's checks, basic operating instructions for local operation, and programming
information for remote operation via the Hewlett-Packard Interface Bus (HP-IB).
SECTION IV, PERFORMANCE TESTS: Provides abbreviated procedures for operational

verification which give the operator a high degree of confidence the the counter is
operating properly; and performance tests, which provides the information reqUired to
check performance of the instrument against the critical specifications in Table 1-1. Also, an
HP-IB verification test using the HP 85A desktop computer as a controller is prOVided in
Section IV.
1-5. Additional copies of this manual and the Service Manual can be ordered through your
nearest Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office.
&1-6. SPECIFICATIONS
1-7. Instrument specifications are listed in Table 1-1. These are the performance standards, or
limits against which the instrument may be tested including typical characteristics as additional
information for the user.
1-8. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS

1-9. The HP 5334A/B Universal Counters are Safety Class I instruments (provided with a
protective earth terminal), designed according to international safety standards. Safety
information pertinent to the operation and servicing of this instrument is located in appropriate
sections of this manual including cautions and warnings which must be followed by the user to
ensure safe operation and keep the instrument in safe condition.
1-1
HP 5334A1B
General Information
1-10. General
1-11. The HP 5334A/B and related documentation must be reviewed for familiarization with
safety markings and instructions before operation. Before applying power, verify that the product
is set to match the available line voltage and the correct fuse is installed. Refer to Section II,
Installation.
Table 1-1. HP Model 5334A/B Specifications
(Apply to both HP 5334A and B unless otherwise noted.)

INPUT CHARACTERISTICS Sensitivity:
15 mV rms sine wave to 20 MHz.
CHANNEL A and CHANNEL B 75 mV rms sine wave to 100 MHz,
210 mV peak-to':"peak at a minimum pulse width of 5 ns.
Range:
de coupled: 0 to 100 MHz. Dynamic Range (X1):
ae coupled" 1 Mn, 30 Hz to 100 MHz. 45 mV to 5V peak-to-peak to 20 MHz.
500, 1 MHz to 100 MHz. 210 mV to 2.5V peak-to-peak to 100 MHz,
Sensitivity: Impedancet: 500 kn NOMINAL shunted by <85 pF or
15 mV rms sine wave to 20 MHz. son NOMINAL.
35 mV rms sine wave to 100 MHz. EXTERNAL ARM
100 mV peak~to~peak at a minimum pulse width at 5 ns. Front panel ARM input can be used to determine Start
Sensitivity can be continuously varied to 150 mV rms, and/or Stop point of a measurement, External Arm can be
INOMINALi using the TRIGGER LEVEL/SENS cOntrol used with ail measurements except DVM iHP 5334A) and
in sensitivity mode. In this mode, trigger levels Read Levels.
are automatically set toOV NOMINAL. Minimum Start to Stop Time: 50 ns.
Dynamic Range (X1): Maximum Transition Time: 1 !J.s.
45 mV to 5V peak-ta-peak, to 20 MHz. Sensitivity: 500 mV peak-to-peak.
100 mV to 2,5V peak-To-peak, to 100 MHz.
Signal Operating Range: -5 Vdc to +5 Vdc.
Signal Operating Range, DC: ±5V de (X ATTN I.
Dynamic Range: 500 mV to 10V peak-to-peak.
Trigger Level:
Arm Trigger Level:
Range:
Manual (Auto Trigger OFF): Continuouslyadjust-
HP 5334A: Adjustable from -4V to +4V by rear
panel control.
able over ±5.1V, displayed by Read Levels in 20 mV
steps. In X10, ±51V displayed in 200 mV steps.
HP 53348: Fixed at 1.5V.
Slope: Independent selection of START and STOP ARM
Preset: OV NOMINAL in Sensitivity Mode.
slopes: +, -, or OFF.
Auto Trigger: See Automatic Measurements Section.
Arm Set-up Time: Typically 20 ns for all measurements
Accuracy (Read Levels): except Totalize. Typicaily 100 ns for Totalize.
X1: ±30 mV ±1% of trigger level reading.
Impedancet: de Coupled, 1 kfl NOMINAL shunted by
Xl0: ±300 mV ±1% of trigger ievel reading.
<30 pF.
Coupling: ac or dc, switch selectable.
Damage Level: ±15 V ide + peak ael.
Trigger Slope: Independent s~lection of + or - slope,
Impedance 1-: 1 Mn NOMINAL shunted by <60 pF Or son FREQUENCY A and FREQUENCY B
NOMINAL, switch selectable. Range: .001 Hz to 100 MHz.
Attenuatar: LSD(i):
Manual: X1 or X10 NOMINAL, switch selectable. _",,_,,2",,~ ,
X FREQ,
Auto: Attenuator automatically switched when in Auto Gate Time
Trigger mode. See Automatic Measurements Section. Resolution: ! see Graph 1 i
Low Pass Filter: 100 kHz NOMiNAL. switehable in or out
of Channel A. ± LSD ±._!~~~_,!~,~9ger Error 92..~ 1 ns rmSi__ X FREQ.
Gate Time
Damage Level:
Accuracy: ± Resolution ± Timebase Error(D.
50i 1: 5V rms,
1 Mil. X1'
PERIOD A
a to 3.5 kHz: 200V ide --i- peak aCi.
Range: 10 ns to 103 s,
3.5 kHz to 100 kHz: 5 x 105V rms Hz/FREQ.
;> 100 kHz: 5V rms. LSDCi)
__~-2=- __ X PER.
Mil, X10: Gate Time
o to 35 kHz: 200V ide + peak aCI.
35 kHz to 100 kHz: 5 x 106V rms Hz/FREQ. Resolution: see Graph 1,
;> 100 kHz: 50V rhis.
Common Input: All specifications are the same as for

± LSD ± f 1.4 X Trigger Error CD +1 ns rms l,, X PER.
separate operation except for the following: Gate Time
Accuracy: ± Resolution ± Timebase Error(D
1-2
HP 5334A1B
General Information
Table 1-1. HP Model 5334A/B Specifications (Continued)
1 "Hz r--~--~--r--,----,-~--'-""---'
100 Hz I---i········
10 H.
; "'1--·· +.-
10 mHz 1===t==t~~b>;;;.-'1/'~+----J-·---i-----1
0.1 s gale, 1 mVrms noise. 1 Vpp sine wave ."c'·7..ci· Y j.----,.- -~.---+ - + +'"'
5 gate, 100 i.Nrms noise, 1 Vpp sine wave
5 gale, 100 ,Nrlns noise, 1 Vpp sine wave
10 pH\O~O.,.H.,.'-:;J.'.,.H'-.,.;,JO:-:.H.,.'-:':::OO:.:.J.H'.:::;:::M,JH:::':.::;:::O:::M:::H'=::;OO;-M::H=':'=' G:::H:7:,=---' 10 "H~~M.,."',-L':L':::"'-=:::--.,.L::::::-.,.:''::---::'::::--::::':::::-.c:'c,---...J '"
100~, 1". 10", 100", 1m,
Input Signal Frequency (F) Input Signal Frequency or TIme
(log scale) (l09W61,,)
Graph 1. Frequency Resolution Error: Noise on the input Graph 2. Timebase Error: Crystal environment and aging
signal and internal uncertainties affect Frequency and Period affects all measurements.
the input signal (F ""
error U~F), Period error (L\P) == (T) x P

*).
measurements. For Period, invert the period 1'P) of
and find frequency

"F
Resistance values are measured at dc and capacitance
values at 10 MHz.
This is a systematic error due to differential channel delay
fmatching Channel A and B) which can be eliminated by
proper measurement technique; i.e., numerical offset or
different cable lengths.
,. 100 ps rms using ;00 GATE AVERAGE.
TIME INTERVAL A to B AUTOMATIC MEASUREMENTS

These features are specified from 100 Hz to 20 MHz unless
Range: -1 ns to 103$ [single-shot), 10s noted. Minimum width at peak of signal: 5 ns. Auto
,100 GATE AVERAGE, Trigger and Auto Attenuation automatically engaged for
LSD CD: 1 ns nOD ps using 100 GATE AVERAGE':. Rise/Fall Time, Pulse Width, and AC/OC Voltage
Resolution: :,t LSD ± Start Trigger Error CD ± Stop measurements.
Trigger Error 0) ± 1 ns rms.·
W
Accuracy: ~: Resolution ± Timebase ErrorQ)

AUTO ATTENUATION
Enabled simultaneously with Auto Trigger. Voltage
± Trigger Level Timing ErrorQ) ± Trigger !_evei
Setting Error<}) ± 2 ns'.
values are NOMINAL. measured with termination son
X10 attenuator enabled when: either peak is greater
TIME INTERVAL DELAY than ~,: 5.1V OR difference between maximum and
Used with Time Interval A to 8, a selectable delay can be minimum peaks exceeds 5.1V,
inserted between START (Channel A trigger! and STOP
X1 attenuator enabled when: maximum and minimum
(Channel 8 trigger). Electrical inputs during delay are
ignored. Specifications are the same as for Time Interval peak amplitudes are less than ± 4.6V AND dif-
A to 8. ference between maximum and minimum peaks is
less than 4.4V
Delay Range: 1 ms to 99.999 s (1 ms stepsi.
Delay Accuracy: ±100 j.1s ± 0.05% X DELAY TIME. AUTO TRIGGER
DC Coupled: 100 Hz to 100 MHz.
.• RATtO AlB
AC Coupled: 1 M!l: 100 Hz to 100 MHz.
5011: 1 MHz to 100 MHz.
Range: .001 Hz to 100 MHz both channels. Minimum Amplitude: 100 mV rrns sine wave, 280 mV
LSD G): 4 X RATIO/iFREQ A X Gate Timel. peak-to-peak.
Resolution: Trigger Level Accuracy: ±30 mV!X ATTN).
For Rise/Fall Time, ±40 mV X ATTN!.
± LSD ± B Trigger Erro!CD X RATIO.
Auto Trigger is disabled for Totalize, Frequency C,
Gate Time
DVM HP 5334Al, and Read Trigger Levels.-
Accuracy: Same as Resolution.
Specified for higher frequency input connected to
Channel A
TOTALIZE A
Range: 0 to 10;2-1,
LSD Displayed: 1 count of input signal.
Resolution: ± LSD
Accuracy: ±LSO.
1-3
HP 5334A1B
General Information
100 ". " , _ - ,_ _. , - _ - ,_ _. , -_ _. , - _ . , -_ _. , - _ ,

100~. r-.,---,---,--.,---,.---,.--,-,
tO~. p..0,~-~ ~+-- +~-- +--~-1~--~~ +---f---j
10 p. L_....i.,-..".-L.,--,.-L-..,-:-"''''--=,=::-'C:':--:?'''::::--J
1 VI.m 10 mV/}.'" 100 mVlJ.'li 1 10 milin. 100 "lVln. 1 VI"" 10 mV/p'
VI}.'"
Input Signal Slew Rate at Trigger Point Input Signal Slew Rate at Trigger Point
(log scale) (log scale)
Graph 3. Input Noise Trigger Error: Noise on the input Graph 4, Trigger Level Timing Error: Affects the Start and
signa! affects both the Start and Stop points of all time Stop points of all time interval measurements. Total error is
interval measurements. the larger at the two trigger point errors.
L
';i
RISE/FALL TIME A MATH

Range: 30 ns to 10 ms. AI! measurements except for Totalize and Read Levels
Minimum Amplitude: 500 mV peak-la-peak. may be operated upon by MATH functions. Math values
Dynamic Range: 500 mV to 40V peak-la-peak. are toggled on or off using the DISABLE key. Offset and
Normalize may be used independently or together as
LSDQ): 1 ns (100 ps using 100 GATE AVERAGE).
follows:
Resolution: ± LSD ± Start Trigger ErroriJ) ± Stop
Display = (Measurement/Normalize) + Offset.
Trigger ErrorQ) ± 1 ns fms.
Accuracy: Entry Range: ± 1 X '10-10 to ± 9.99999999999 X 109.
± Resolution ± Trigger Level Timing Error@ At power~up, Offset = 0 and Normalize = 1.
± Trigger Level Setting Error at 10°/(1 pointCD
:= Trigger Level Setting Error at 90% pointeD
± Timebase Error@ ± 2 ns: GENERAL
Typically within 3% for triangular, trapezoidal, and TIMEBASE
"
pulse waveforms, 1V to 5V ,:X ATTN) peak-ta-peak. Standard Crystal: iii
PULSE WIDTH A Frequency: 10M Hz. "

Range: 5 ns to 10 ms. Aging Rate: <3 x 10- 7 per month.
LSDQ): 1 ns {WO ps using 100 GATE AVERAGE). Temperature: <5 x 10-6, 0" to 50" c.
Resolution: ± LSD ± Start Trigger ErrorG) ± Stop Trigger Line Voltage: <1 x 10-7 for 10% change.
ErrorG) ± 1 ns rms.·· High Stability Crystal: See Option 010,
Accuracy:
External Input: Rear panel BNC accepts 10 MHz, SOD mV
± Resolution ± Trigger Level Timing Error@
to 5V rms into 1 kO NOMINAL shunted by <20 pF.
± Trigger Level Setting ErrorG)
± Timebase ErrorQ). Timebase Output: 10 MHz, >500 mV rms sine wave into
50n via rear panel.
Typically within 2% for triangular and pulse waveforms,
1V to 5V IX ATTN) peak-to-peak. GATE TIME
Range: 1 ms to 99.999 seconds in 1 ms increments.
AC/DC VOLTAGE Automatically set to 300 ms at power up.
iJ.,C maximum and minimum peaks or dc level otChannel A
LSD: 1 ms.
or Channel B input are displayed by Read Level function.
Resolution: ± LSD.
Frequency Range: dc, 100 Hz to 20 MHz
Accuracy: ±100!J.s ±{0.05% x GATE TIMEI + up to one
Dynamic Range: ae: OV to 40V peak~to-peak<
period of input signal.
dc: ±51 volts.
Resolution: X1: 20 mV, X10: 200 mV. TIME BETWEEN MEASUREMENTS;
AC Accuracy: ± Resolution ± 10% of difference between Auto Trigger on: 1s NOMINAL.
maximum and minimum peak displayed. Auto Trigger off: 80 ms NOMINAL.
Typically within 3% for a sine wave >500 mV peak-to- 100 GATE AVERAGE: 100 gates accumulated and average
peak. displayed. This adds an additional digit of resolution. It
can be used with allfunctions except Totalize, DVM
DC Accuracy (mean value of display): iHP 5334A:, and Read Levels.
X1: ± 35 mV ± 0.5% ot reading.
XlO: ± 300 mV ± 2% of reading. SINGLE CYCLE: When enabled, one measurement is
taken with each push of RESET key
1-4
HP 5334A!B
General Information
MEMORY (HP 5334A only): Ten measurement set-ups, INTERFACE FUNCTIONS: SH1. AH1. T5. TEO. L4. LEO,
including trigger levels, may be stored in memory and SR1, RL1, PPo, DC1, DT1. CO, E2.
sUbsequently reeaded. When a measurement set-up has
been recalled, the trigger level equals the stored value
OPTIONS
'trigger level controls are inactive\. The trigger level OPTION 010: High Stability Timebase (Oven;.
can be toggled between the stored value and front panel Frequency: 10 MHz.
trigger level control using DACS ON/OFF function. With Aging Rate: <:5 x 1(}-10/day after 24 hour warm up.
instrument in STSY or Be power removed, the internal Short Term Stability: <5 x 10- 10 rms for a 1 second
battery will supply the nonvolatile memory for lypically average.
60 days.
Temperature: <7 x 10-9, 0 to 50°C.
RESET: Begins a new measurement cycle, clears front
Line VOltage: <5 X10- 10 for 10% change (2 minutes
panel data entry modes and error and failure messages,
after change;.
PRESET: PRESET LED indicates that front .panel trigger
Warm Up: Within 5 x 10-9 of final value in 20 minutes,
level/sensitivity controls are inactive.
GATE OUTPUT (HP 5334A only): Rear panel BNC drives OPTION 020 (HP 5334A only): DC Digital Voltmeter.
TTL levels into 1 kll. Level is high while gate isopen during
Range: 4 digits, autoranging, and auto polarity in ± 10V.
all measurements except Totalize, DVM, and Read Levels.
± 100V, ± 1000V ranges,
DISPLAY: 9-digit LED display in engineering format plus
SensitiVity: 100 p.V for ±1V reading. 1 mV for ±10V
one digit exponent. Range is ::t10-17 to ± 9.99999999 X 1019.
reading. 10 mV for ±100V reading. 100 mV for
OPERATING TEMPERATURE: 0 to 50'C. ±10DOV reading,
POWER REQUIREMENTS: 47.5 - 440 Hz, 90 - 126.5V; LSO: Same as Sensitivity,
47.5 - 66 Hz, 198 - 252V; 50 VA maximum.
Accuracy: 60 days, 24° ±5°C.
WEiGHT: Net, 5.3 kg (111b 12 oz); Shipping, 8,1 kg
10V Range: ±0,045% of reading ±8 mV.
I: 17 Ib 12 ali.
100V Range: ±0.045% of reading ±80 mV.
DIMENSIONS: 89 mm H X422 mm WX346mm D (31/2 in. H 1000V Range: ±0.060% of reading ±200 mV.
X 16 5/8 in. W x 135/8 in. D), excluding bottom feet.
;20 minute warmup and RH < 800/0.i
front handles, and rear feet.
Temperature CoeffiCient:
HEWLETT-PACKARD INTERFACE BUS lOV Range: ±,10.0055% of reading ±0.5 mVifO C,
100V Range: ±W.OO55% of reading =5 mV)/oC,
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLS: All front panel controls 1000V Range: ±{0,008 o/0 of reading ±5 mVj/oC.
and functions, except Option 030 Channel C sensitivity Input Type: Floating Pair.
and power on/stby switch,
Input Resistance: 10 Mf1 ±1%.
TRIGGER. lEVEL: Set Channel A or B from -5.1V to
Maximum Input: High to low: ±100DV in all ranges.
+5.1V in 20 mV steps iX ATTN:I.
Low to chassis ground: ±500V in all ranges.
Accuracy:
Response Time: 800 ms to within 1% of final value.
X1: ±30 mV ±1% of trigger level r!':'lading.
within one range.
X10: ±300 mV ±1% of trigger level reading.
Normal Mode Rejection: 30 dB at 50160 Hz.
OTHER: Initialize, Transmit Error, High-Speed Output,
Transmit Calibration Data, Device 10, and SRO Mask. Effective Common Mode Rejection (1 kn
DATA OUTPUT: unbalance): 2:.110 dB at 50/60 Hz.
Normal Operation: Format: 19 characters plus CR Filter: Singie pole from 10 Hz NOMINAL.
and LF.
Max. Rate: 10 readings/second. OPTION 030: 1300 MHz C Channel.
High Speed Output Mode: Format: 8 bytes of count Input Characteristics:
data and Interpolator Start and Stop counts. Range: 90 MHz to 1300 MHz.
Max. Rate: 140 readings/second, 55 readings/second
SensitiVity:
with Opt. 700.
15 mV rms (-23.5 dBm) sine wave,
Talk Only Mode: Selected by entering an address of 50 90 MHz to 1000 MHz.
(HP 5334AI. 31 HP 533461 75 mV rms (-9.5 dBm) sine wave,
1000 MHz to 1300 MHz"
HI mVln. 100 mV/o. 1 V/n. 10 mVlps
Input Signal Slew Rate at Trigger Point

(log scale)
Graph 5, Trigger Level Setting Error: Affects both the Start

and Stop points of ail time interval measurements.
1-5
HP 5334MB
General Information
Table 1-1, HP Model 5334A/B Specifications (Continued)
HP 5334A only: Sensitivity can be decreased continuously DEFINITIONS

by up to 20 dB NOMINAL from 90 MHz to 1000 MHz, and
14 dB NOMINAL from 1000 MHz to 1300 MHz using the CD LSD: Unit value aT Least Significant Digit. Calculations
sensitivity control. should be rounded to the nearest decade i i.e. 5 Hz becomes
10 Hz and 4 ns becomes 1 nSj.
Dynamic Range:
HP 5334A: LSD Displayed: There is a 9 digit mantissa maximum for the
15 mV rms to 500 mV rms 130.5 dB\, 90 MHz to 200 MHz. front panel display. If truncation is required the most
15 mV rms to 1V rms {36.S dB\, 200 MHz to 1000 MHz. significant digits are dispiayed. Up to a 12 digit mantissa
75 mV rms to 1V rms (22.5 dB), 1000 MHz to 1300 MHz. is available over HP-I B.
HP 53346: CD Timebase Error: Maximum fractional frequency change in
15 mV rms lo5V rms (50.5 dBl, 90 MHz to 1000 MHz, time base frequency due to all errors; ;e.g., aging, temp-
75 mV rms to 5V rms 136.5 dBl, 1000 MHz to 1300 MHz. erature, line voltage, etC.i multiplied by the measurement
Signal Operating Range: result {see Graph 2).
HP 5334A: -5 Vde to -+-5 Vde.
HP 53348: -50 Vde to +50 Vde. CD Trigger Error: (see Graph 3).
Trigger Level: Fixed at OV, NOMINAL. \leiT+e;,2 seconds rms

Impedance: ae coupled. 500 NOMINAL. Input Slew Rate in Vis at Trigger point
Damage Level:
HP 5334A: ±8V {dc + peak ael, fuse protected. Fuse Where ei "" Effective rms noise of counter's input
located in BNC connector. channel. ::250 p.V TYPICAL!
HP 53348: ±50 Vdc + 5 Vrms. en = rms noise of the input signal for a 100 MHz
Frequency C: bandwidth.
Range: 90 MHz to 1300 MHz. CD Trigger Level Timing Error: i see Graph 4 \.
LSDCD, Resolution, and Accuracy are the same as
Frequency A. 1/2 hysteresis band __ or
Probe Power (HP 5334A only): Compatible with HP 10B55A Input slew rate at start trigger point CD
Preamp.
______112 hysteresis band _whichever is the
OPTION 050 (HP 5334A only): Both DC Voltmeter, Option 020,
Input slew rate at stop trigger point CD larger error.
and 1300 MHz C Channel, Option 030. Specifications are the eD Trigger Level Setting Error: {see Graph 5)
same as for options ordered separately. Rise/Fall Time measurements:
±40 mV
OPTION 060: Rear Inputs. -------------
Input slew rate at trigger point CD
Channel A andS, and Arm inputs are rear terminals in
parallel with front inputs. Option 020 (HP 5334A only), Pulse Width and Time Interval measurements:
030 and 050 iHP 5334A only) inputs are at the rear panel only< _ 30 mV ± 1% of trigger level reading iTI onlYI
~ -------.." .----c-:-;::;--'--
Channel A and B separate input capacitance is increased by Input slew rate at start trigger point ®
50 pF. Arm input capacitance is increased by 45 pF. Channel A
and B input sensitivity is decreased to 50 mV rms from 20 MHz + 30 mV ± 1% of trigger level reading (TI only]
to 100 MHz (measured at rear panel with front panel termi-
nated in 50n or front panel with rear panel terminated
Input slew rate at stop trigger point CD
in SO{l). ® Trigger Point and Hysteresis:
OPTION 700 (HP 53348 only): Internal CIIL Interface.

Actual Trigger
Measurement Functions Provided: ..-....,f-",-- Point;-;.
Siopel
Frequency A, 8, and C: Period A, Time Interval A to 8, 1/2 Hystersis Band
Ratio A/B, Totalize A. Rise/Fall Time A, PUlse Width A. Read +....,f--:----I, Trigger Point
Levels A and 8 (AC/DC Voltage and Trigger). 1/2 Hystersis Band Actual Trigger
Programmable Controls: .z.,L-C""---i-,* Point ,- Siopel
Channel A and B:"Trigger Level, Auto Trigger,

Coupling, Trigger Slope, Impedance, Attenuator, Common.
External Arm: External Arm Select, Slope.
General: Gate Time. Auto trigger disabled: trigger point"" trigger level reading.
Maximum Data Output Rate: Auto trigger enabled:
2.5 readings/second, For all measurements except Rise/Fall Time, trigger points =
CIIL Operating Codes: Maximum t Minimum peak
IX ATTN)
FNC, SET, SRX, SRN, INX, FTH, CLS (+!, OPNI+!, RST, CNF,
1ST, STA, GAL_
For Rise/Fall Time, 10% trigger point =
MATE Interface Standard:
(.1 (maximum peak) +.9 (minimum peak!) (X ATTN)
2806763 Rev B,
90% trigger point =
-;'1 Sirce the HP 53348 irput channels are always internally
(.9 (maximum peak) ,+ .1 (minimum peak) (X ATTN)
connected, the OPN and CLS codes are accepted but no action iAC/DC VOltage function is used to measure peaks.)
is taken
1-6
HP 5334MB
General Information
1-12. INSTRUMENT AND MANUAL IDENTIfiCATION
1-13. The instrument serial number is located on the heat sink next to the power input module
on the rear panel of the instrument. Hewlett-Packard instruments have a 10-character serial
number in the form: OOOOAOOOOO. The first four digits and the letter are the serial prefix. The last
five digits are suffix. The prefix is the same for all identical instruments; the prefix is changed only
to identify changes to the instrument. The suffix is assigned sequentially and is different for each
instrument. If the serial prefix of your instrument differs from that listed on the title page of this
manual, there are differences between this manual and your instrument. Instruments haVing a
higher serial prefix are covered in a "Manual Changes" sheets included with this manual. If the
change sheet is missing, contact the nearest Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office listed at the
back of this manual. Instruments having a lower serial prefix than that listed on the title page are
covered in Section VII of the Service Manual.
1-14. DESCRIPTION Of INSTRUMENT

1-15. The HP 5334A and HP 5334B are Universal Counters capable of measuring up to 100 MHz.
With the optional C Channel this capability is extended to 1.3 GHz. The instrument's basic
measurement functions include Frequency, Period, Time, Time Delay, Ratio, and Totalize. The
resident Multiple Register Counter (MRC) and three single chip microprocessors used to
generate data, compute and display answers, expand the usefulness of the counter by providing
post measurement data manipulation. This allows the additional power and convenience of user-
defined measurement function keys for Math Functions, Pulse Width, Rise/Fall Time, and voltage
peaks of the input signal; and the Model HP 5334A includes a nonvolatile memory that provides
the capability to save and recall up to nine different front panel setups (the Model HP 53346 does
not contain the nonvolatile memory feature).
1-16. Full HP-16 programmability is a standard feature of the HP 5334A/B Universal Counter. All
front-panel features including gate time, trigger levels and sensitivity may be selected via HP-16.
HP-16 provides remote control of programming and data output. With the optional Modular
Automatic Test Equipment (MATE) Processor circuit the HP 53346 is allowed to respond to an
additional control language called Control Interface Intermediate Language (CIIL). Note thatthe
Option 700 MATE circuit is not available with the HP 5334A.
1-17. The differences between the HP 5334A and HP 53346 are listed in Table 1-2.
Table 1-2. Differences Between the HP 5334A and HP 5334B
MODEL NUMBER HP 5334A HP 5334B
MEMORY (STORE/RECAll) X
-. GATE OUTPUT (Rear Panel) X
External Arm Trigger level
Adjustment (Rear panel) X
External Fine Adjustment for
Option 010 Oven Oscillator (10811) X
OPTIONS:
Option 030 C Channel Input X X
C Channel Probe Power X
C Channel Fuse X
Option 020 DVM X
Option 700 MATE X
Option 050
Combination of Option 020 DVM
v
and Option 030 C Channel A
1-7
HP 5334MB
General Information
1-18. ACCESSORIES
1-19. Table 1-3 lists accessory equipment supplied with the HP 5334A/B Universal Counter and
Table 1-4 lists accessories available.
Table 1-3. Accessory Equipment Supplied

DESCRIPTION HP PART NUMBER
Detachable Power Cord
(229 em (7 1/2 feet long) 8120-1378
Table 1-4. Accessories Available
Decription HP Part Number

2- 1300 MHz Preamplifiers 10855A
Probe Power Supply (drives 10855As) 1122A
Low Pass Filter Kit 10856A
Probes:
500 MHz Active Probe 1120A
Time Interval Probes 53636
10:1 Divider 10001A
Resistive Divider 10020A
1-20. OPTIONS
1-21. The options available for the HP 5334A/B Universal Counter are listed and described
below. Specifications for the options are given in Table 1-1. If an option is included in the initial
order, it will be installed at the factory and ready for operation upon receipt ofthe instrument. For
field installation of Option 010, 020, 030 (5334A only; see Note below), 050, and 060, refer to
Section VI for part ordering information and to Section VIII for installation instructions. Both
Sections VI and VIII are part of the Service Manual.
1-22. The HP 5334B has an Option 700 (MATE board). The operating and programming
information for this option is documented in a separate manual, titled HP 53348, OPTION 700
INTERNAL ClIL INTERFACE Operating and Programming Manual, HP Part Number 05334-90034.
Option Description
010 High Stability Time 8ase (Oven Oscillator)

020 1000V Floating Digital Voltmeter Module (HP 5334A only)
030 1.3 GHz C-Channel Input Module
050 Combination, Options 020 and 030 (HP 5334A only)
060 Rear Panel Inputs (Channel A, B, ARMING; and C for instruments with Opt. 030)
700 MATE Processor Board/Block Assembly (HP 5334B only)
907 Front Handles, 5334B only (5061-9688)
908 Rack Mount (5061-9674)
909 Front Handels and Rack Mount Kit, 5334B only (5061-9675)
910 Extra Manual (One set of Operating/Programming and Service Manuals)
913 Rack Mount Kit for use with suppiied Front Handles, 5334A only (5061-9769)
W30 Extended Hardware Support (Adds two years of return-to-HP Hardware Service)
1-23. The options installed at the factory are noted on the rear panel of the counter.
1-8
HP 5334A1B
General InfOrmation
NOTE
To retrofit Option 030 C-Channel Input on HP 5334Bs, contact

the nearest Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office listed at the
back of this manual.
1-24. RECOMMENDED TEST EQUIPMENT
1-25. Table 1-5 lists the test equipment required for testing, adjusting, and servlcmg the
Universal Counter. The Critical Specifications column describes the essential requirements for
each piece of test equipment. Other equipment can be substituted if it meets or exceeds these
critical specifications.
Table 1-5 Recommended Test Equipment

RECOMMENDED
INSTRUMENT CRITICAL SPECIFICATIONS USE1
MODEl
DC Standard Voitage: 0 to 400 Volts FLUKE 343 A,P

Accuracy: 0.0025%
Frequency Standard Frequency, 10 MHz, HP 5061A or
A
Accuracy >lXl0-10 HP 5065A
Digital Multimeter Resolution: 100 I'V HP 3468A A,T
Range: 100 mV to 100V
Function Generator Frequency Range: 20 MHz HP 3325A A,P,T
Output Level: 0-100 mV rms
Resolution: 0.01 Hz
Oscilloscope 8andwidth: 200 MHz HP 1715A or A,T
External Trigger Equivalent
Signal Generator Frequency Range: 990 MHz HP 86568 A
Signal Generator Frequency Range: 1300 MHz HP 8660A/C' A,?
Resolution: 1 Hz
Signature Analyzer HP 5006A T
Power Meter Frequency Range: 990 MHz HP 436A A
Power Sensor HP 8481A A
10 d8 Attenuator HP 8491A, A,P
Option 010
Connectors:
8NClm) to N(m) HP 1250-0082
I A!P
N(I) to 8NClf) HP 1250-1474 A,P
N(m) to 8NClf) HP 1250-0780 A,P
Controllers: HP 85A or 858 P,T
ROM Drawer HP 82936A P,T
Input/Output ROM HP 00085-15003 P,T
16K Memory Module- (85A Only) HP 82903A P,T
HP-18 Interface HP 82937 A P,T
"'Requires either HP 866028 or HP 86603A Plug-In and the Frequency Extension Module HP 116616
lA=Adjustments P=Performance Tests T=Troubleshooting
1-9
HP 5334A/B
General Information
(This page intentionally left blank)
1-10
HP 5334NB
Installation
SECTION II
INSTALLATION
2-1. INTRODUCTION
2-2. This section contains information for unpacking, initial inspection, preparation for use,
installation, storage, and shipment for the HP 5334A/B Universal Counter.
2-3. UNPACKING AND INSPECTION
2-4. Inspect the shipping containers for damage. If the shipping containers or cushioning
material is damaged, it should be kept until the contents of the shipment have been checked for
completeness and the instrument has been checked mechanically and electrically. lithe contents
are incomplete, or if there is mechanical damage or defect, notify the nearest carrier as well as the
Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office (offices are listed at the back of this manual). Keep the
~
shipping materials for carrier's inspection. The HP office will arrange for repair or replacement
!
without waiting for claim settlement.
I
it. 2-5. PREPARATION FOR USE
2-6. Operating Environment

~
I
2-7. TEMPERATURE. The instrument may be operated in temperatures from O°C to +50°C.
2-8. HUMIDITY. The instrument may be operated in environments with humidity upto 90% RH
at 35°C. However, it should be protected from temperature extremes which cause condensation
in the instrument. Option 020, DVM, of the HP 5334A, may be operated in environments with
- humidity up to 80%.
)
2-9. ALTITUDE. The instrument may be operated at altitudes up to 4,600 metres (15,000 feet).
-I
2-10. Power Requirements
- 2-11. The HP 5334A/B requires a power source of 100-, or 115/120-volt ac, +5%,-10%, 47.5 to 440
I Hz single phase; 220- or 230/240-volt ac, +5%, -10% at 47.5 to 66 Hz single phase. Power
consumption for the instru ment is less than 50 volt-amperes.
-I
2-12. line Voltage and Fuse Selection
-
J
I WARNING I
BEFORE CONNECTING THIS INSTRUMENT TO THE AC MAINS,
ITS PROTECTIVE EARTH TERMINALS MUST BE CONNECTED
THROUGH THE PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS OF THE AC
CABLES TO SOCKET OUTLETS PROVIDED WITH PROTECTIVE
EARTH CONTACTS. DO NOT NEGATE THE EARTH-GROUND-
ING PROTECTION BY USING EXTENSION CABLES, POWER
CABLES, OR AUTOTRANSFORMERS WITHOUT PROTECTIVE
GROUND CONDUCTORS. FAILURE TO GROUND THE INSTRU-
MENT CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY. REFER TO PARA-
GRAPH 2-18.
2-1
HP 5334NB
Installation
BEFORE SWITCHING ON THIS INSTRUMENT, make sure it is

adapted to the voltage 01 the ac power source. You must set the
voltage selector card correctly to adapt the HP 5334A/B to the
power source as described in paragraph 2-13. Failure to set the ac
power input 01 the instrument to the correct voltage level could
cause damage to the instrument when plugged in.
2-13. LINE VOLTAGE REQUIREMENTS. The HP 5334A is equipped with a power module (on the
rear panel) that contains a printed-circuit line voltage selector to select 100-,120-,220-, or 240-volt
ac operation as shown in Figure 2-1. The HP 5334B rear panel contains two Power and Line Voltage
Select Slide switches to select 100-, 115-, or 230-volt ac operation as shown in Figure 2-2. Before
applying power, the pc selector or slide switches must be set to the correct position and correct
fuse must be installed as described below.
2-14. HP 5334A LINE VOLTAGE SELECTION. Power line connections are selected by the position
of the plug-in circuit card in the module. When the card is plugged into the module, the only
visible markings on the card indicate line voltage to be used. The correct value of line fuse, with a
250-volt rating, must be installed after the card is inserted. This instrument uses a 0.5A fuse (HP Part
Number 2110-0202) for 100/120-volt operation; a 0.25A fuse (HP Part Number 2110-0201) for
220/240-volt operation.
2-15. To convert from one line voltage to another, the power cord must be disconnected from
the power module before the sliding window covering the fuse and card compartment can be
moved to expose the fuse and circuit card. See Figure 2-1.
2-16. HP 5334B LINE VOLTAGE SELECTION. Power line connections are selected by various
combinations of settings of the two slide switches. The combinations of switch settings and their
selected line voltages are shown on the HP S334B rear panel under "LINE SELECT", see Figure 2-2.
The correct value of line fuse, with a 250-volt rating, must be installed after setting the switches. This
instrument uses a 0.75A fuse (HP Part Number 2110-0360) for 100/120-volt operation; a 0.375A fuse
(HP Part Number 2110-0421) for 220/240-volt operation.
2-17. To convert from one line voltage to another, BE SURE to disconnect the power cord from
the power LINE socket before changing the setting of a slide switch.
SELECTION OF OPERATING VOLTAGE
1. Open cover door and rotate fuse-pull to left.
2. Select operating voltage by orienting PC board to posi-

tion desired voltage on top-left side. Push board firmly
into module slot.
3. Rotate fuse-pull back into normal position and re-insert

fuse in holders, using caution to select correct fuse
value.
Figure 2-1. HP 5334A Voltage 5election with Power Module PC Board
2-2
HP 5334NB
Installation
,
',;
r - - - - - - - LINE - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - . ,
LINE SELECT
FUSE
~
.......... 230V
115V
lOGV
..
..
..
.... N/A d
D D
FUSE. 100-120V175OmAT 50/S0Hz60VA MAX
I 220-24QV/375mAT
SLIDE SWITCHES
,,
Figure 2-2. HP 53348 Voltage Selection with Slide Switches
2-18. Power Cable
2-19. The HP 5334A/B is shipped with a three-wire power cable. When the cable is connected to
an appropriate ac power source, this cable connects the chassis to earth ground. The type of
power cable plug shipped with each instrument depends on the country of destination. Refer to
Table 2-1 for the part numbers of the power cable and plug configurations available.
2-211. HEWLETT-PACKARD INTERFACE BUS
2-21. HP-IB Interconnections

-22. Interconnections data concerning the rear panel HP-IB connector is provided in Figure
2-3. This connector is compatible with the HP 10833A/B/C/D HP-IB cables. The HP-IB system
j allows interconnection of up to 15 (including the controller) HP-IB compatible instruments. The
HP-IB cables have identical "piggyback" connectors on both ends so that several cables can be
connected to a single source without special adapters or switch boxes. System components and
devices may be connected in virtually any configuration desired. There must be, of course, a path
from the desktop computer ( or other controller) to every device operating on the bus. As a
practical matter, avoid stacking more than three or four cables on any oneconnector.lfthestack
gets too large, the force on the stack produces great leverage which can damage the connector
mounting. Be sure each connector is firmly (finger tight) screwed in placeto keep it from working
loose during use.
2-23. Cable length Restrictions

2-24. To achieve design performance with HP-I B, proper voltage levels and timing relationships
must be maintained. If the system cable is too long, the lines cannot be driven properly and the
system will fail to perform properly. Therefore, when interconnecting an HP-IB system, it is
important to observe the following rules:
a. The total cable length for the system must be less than or equal to 20 metres (65.6 feet).
b. The total cable length for the system must be equal to or less than 2 metres (6.6 feet) times
the total number of devices connected to the bus.
c. The total number of instruments connected to the bus must not exceed 15.
2-3
HP 5334NB
Installation
2-25. Address Selection

2-26. The HP 5334A HP-IB instrument address is input via the front panel using the
MATH/MEMORY keys and the FUNCTION/DATA keys. The HP 5334B HP-IB instrument address
is input via the address switch, located on the rear panel. Instructions for selecting the address are
provided in Section III of this manual along with programming codes. When the instrument is
turned on, the setting of the address is momentarily displayed in decimal form.
2-27. HP-IB Descriptions

2-28. A description is provided in Section III of this manual. A study of this information is
necessary if the user is not familiar with the HP-IB concept. Additional information concerning
the design criteria and operation of the bus is available in IEEE Standard 488-1978, titled Standard
Digital Interface for Programming Instrumentation.
2-29. STORAGE AND SHIPMENT

2-30. Environment
2-31. The instrument may be stored or shipped in environments within the following limits:
TEMPERATURE _40°C to +75°C

HUMIDITY up to 90% RH at 60°C
ALTITUDE 7,620 metres (25,000 feet)
2-32. The instrument should also be protected from temperature extremes which cause
condensation within the instrument.
2-33. Packaging
2-34. ORIGINAL PACKAGING. Containers and materials identical to those used in factory
packaging are available through Hewlett-Packard for servicing; attach a tag indicating the type of
service required, return address, model number, and full serial number. Also, mark the container
FRAGILE to ensure careful handling. In any correspondence, refer to the instrument by model
number and full serial number.
2-35. OTHER PACKAGING. The following general instructions should be used for repacking
with commercially available materials:
a. Wrap instrument in heavy paper or plastic. (If shipping to Hewlett-Packard office or

service center, attach tag indicating type of service required, return address, model
number, and full serial number.)
b. Use strong shipping container. A double-wall carton made of 2.4 MPa (350 psi) test
material is adequate.
c. Use a layer of shock-absorbing material 70 to 100 mm (3- to 4-inch) thick around all sides
of the instrument to provide firm cushioning and prevent movement inside container.
Protect control panel with cardboard.
d. Seal shipping container securely.
e. Mark shipping container FRAGILE to ensure careful handling.
f. In any correspondence, refer to instrument by model number and full serial number.
7-4
HP 5334NB
Installation
Table 2,1. AC Power Cables Available

CABLE
CABLE HP 'C CABLE
PLUG TYPE PLUG DESCRIPTION LENGTH FOR USE IN COUNTRY
PART NO. D COLOR
(INCHES)
25011 8120-1351 0 Straight "B51363A 90 Mint Gray United Kingdom,

8120-1703 6 goo 90 Mint Gray Cyprus, Nigeria
~
Rhodesia, Singapore
o 0
25011 8120-1369 0 Straight '*NZ5S1981ASCl12 79 Gray Austrailia,

8120-0696 4 goo 87 Gray New Zealand
V L
'\:. fl
25011
N
8120-1689 7 Straight "CEE7-Y11 79 Mint Gray East and West Europe,

8120-1692 2 goo 79 Mint Gray Saudi Arabia,
eY aN aL
12511 8120-1348 5 Straight **NEMA5-15P 80 Black

Egypt, So Africa,
India (Unpolarized
in many nations)
United States,
8120-1398 5 goo 80 Black Canada, japan
~
8120-1754 7 Straight '*NEMA5-15P 36 Black (100V or 200V),
8120-1378 1 Straight '*NEMA5-15P 80 Jade Gray Mexico, Philippines,
8120-1521 6 90° 80 jade Gray Taiwan
8120-1676 2 Straight '*NEMA5-15P 30 jade Gray
25011 8120-2104 3 Straight "SEV1011 79 Gray Switzerland

1959-24507
cr§ •a ~
E
Type 12
j) .-"(
25011 8120-0698 6 Straight "NEMA6-15P United States,
Canada
@ 00
22011 8120-2956 2 Straight '*DHCK 107 79 Gray Denmark

8120-2957 3 goo 79 Gray
U aN aL
'"'CD = Check Digit (refer to Section VI).

"'Part number shown for plug is industry identifier for plug only. Number shown for cable is HP Part Number for
,
compiete cable including plug.
'I E = Earth Ground L = Line N = Neutral
2-5
HP 5334NB
Installation
PIN LINE
1 0101
2 0102
3 0103
4 0104
13 0105
14 0106
15 0107
16 0108
5 EOI
17 REN
6 DAV
7 NRFD
8 NDAC
9 IFC
10 SRQ
11 ATN
12 SHIELD-CHASSIS GROUND
18 PIO TWISTED PAIR WITH PIN 8
19 PIO TWISTED PAIR WITH PIN 7 THESE PINS
20 PIO TWISTED PAIR WITH PIN 8 ARE
21 PIO TWISTED PAIR WITH PIN 9 INTERNALLY
22 PIO TWISTED PAIR WITH PIN 10 GROUNDED
23 PIO TWISTED PAIR WITH PIN 11
24 ISOLATED DIGITAL GROUND
LOCKSCREW
1390-0360
The 5334A contains metric threaded HpwlB cable mounting studs

as opposed to English threads. Metric threaded HP 10833A, B. C.
or 0 HP~IB cable lockscrews must be used to secure the cable to
the instrument. Identification of the two types of mounting studs
and lockscrews is made by their color. English threaded fasteners
are colored silver and metric threaded fasteners are colored black.
DO NOT mate silver and black fasteners to each other or the
threads of either or both will be destroyed. Metric threaded HP-IB
cable Jackscrew illustration and part number follow.
Logic Levels
The HeWlett-Packard Interface Bus logic levels are TTL compatible, i.e., the true (1) state is
O.OV dc to GAV dc and the false (G) state is +2.5V dc to +5.0V dc.
Programming and Output Data Format

Refer to Section III, Operation
Mating Connector
HP 1251-0293: Amphenol 57-30240.
Mating Cables Available

HP 10833A. 1 metre (3.3 ft.), HP 108338, 2 metres (8.8 ft.)
HP 10833C, 4 metres (13.2 ft.), HP 108330, 1/2 metre (1.8 ft.)
Cabling Restrictions
1. A HeWlett-Packard Interface Bus System may contain no more than 2 metres (6.6 ft.) of
connecting cable per instrument.
2. The maximum accumulative length of connecting cable for any Hewlett-Packard Inter-
face Bus System is 20.0 metres (65.6 ft.).
3. The maximum number of instruments in one system is fifteen.
Figure 2-3: ~Hewlett-Packard Interface Bus Connection

2-6
HP 5334A!B
SECTION III
OPERATION AND PROGRAMMING
3-1. INTRODUCTION
3-2. This section provides complete operating and programming information for the HP Model
5334A/B Universal Counter. Operating characteristics, and various modes of operation are
explained. Descriptions of all front and rear panel controls, connectors and indicators are
provided, including detailed instructions for operation, programming, and operator's checks.
3-3. The information contained in this section is as follows:
• Operating Characteristics, paragraph 3-4.

• How to Make Measurements, paragraph 3-51.
• Initial Power-Up Checks and Self-Diagnostics, paragraph 3-88.
• Front Panel Controls, Indicators, and Connectors, paragraph 3-92.
• Front Panel Display and Annunciators, paragraph 3-206.
• Rear Panel Controls and Connectors, paragraph 3-208.
• Operator's Maintenance, paragraph 3-233.
• Operator's Checks, paragraph 3-240 (Quick procedures to verify the instrument is
operating properly).
• Preset and Lockout Conditions, paragraph 3-250.
• Error Indications, paragraph 3-252.
• Error Examples, paragraph 3-255.
• Detailed Operating Instructions, paragraph 3-257.
• Remote Programming via HP-IB, paragraph 3-260.
• Interface Commands, paragraph 3-286.
• Programming Commands, paragraph 3-312.
• Programming Exampies, paragraph 3-359.
3-4. OPERATING CHARACTERISTICS
3-5. The HP 5334A/B is a universal counter, provided with 100 MHz frequency range, 2 ns single-
shot time interval resolution, and frequency and period measurement resolution of nine digits
per second of gate time. The gate time is continuously adjustable, in millisecond increments, from
1 millisecond to 99.999 seconds. An internal microcomputer performs the measurement
calculations, automatically taking into account the selected gate time. Most measurements are
displayed in engineering notation (i.e., exponents of blank (0), ± 3, ± 6, or ± 9).
3-6. The HP 5334A!B is a fuily HP-IB (IEEE Std. 488-1978) programmable instrument, capabie of
the following basic measurements:
Frequency
Period
Time Interval
Time Interval Delay
Ratio
Totalize
Voltage (Option 020 - HP 5334A only)
Pulse Width
Rise/Fall Time
Peak Voltage Levels
3-1
HP 5334A!B
3-7. In addition to the basic measurement functions, three built-in microprocessors provide
convenience features such as:
• Math Functions (offset and normalize) give the user the capability of manipulating
measurement data. Refer to paragraph 3-116.
• Voltage Peaks and Trigger Levels of the A and B input signals are available by pressing a
key on the front panel. Refer paragraph 3-178.
• Nonvolatile Memory (HP 5334A only) gives the capability of storing and recalling up to 10
different front panei setups. Refer to paragraph 3-102, 3-126, and 3-130.
3-8. Basic Circuits and Measurements

3-9. To maximize accuracy and resolution the HP 5334A/B uses a reciprocal counting technique
and analog interpolation. Since the HP 5334A/B is a reciprocal counter, it always makes a period
measurement of the input signal. If a frequency measurement is desired, the counter computes
and displays the frequency by taking the reciprocal of the period measurement. The period
measurement characteristic of the HP 5334A/B inherently produces high resolution at all
frequencies over the entire 100 MHz bandwidth. A basic block diagram of a reciprocal counter is
shown in Figure 3-1.
VV\ JUlJl
INPUT - - - - - - :,..- EVENT
>-- COND IT ION I NG REGISTER I- ARITHMETIC
INPUT SWITCHING
SIGNAL
JUlJl AND
MAIN GATE
- - - - - - ,..- TIME ,..-
MICROPROCESSOR
SYSTEM
VV\
r'" REGISTER
+
10 lvIHz COUNTER
I TIME BASE
OSCILLATOR
}- 10 MHz
CLOCK DISPLAY
Figure 3-1. Simplified Block Diagram of the Reciprocal Counter
3-10. With the addition of Option 010 Oven Oscillator, temperature stability and aging rate are
improved, allowing extended calibration peri_ods. When Option 030C-Channel input is installed,
the frequency counting range of the counter is extended to 1.3 GHz.
3-11. Input Characteristics and Signal Conditioning

3-12. The HP S334A/B has two independent input channels, featuring matched 100 MHz input
amplifiers. Each channel includes a full complement of input signal conditioning controls. The
major elements of the circuitry for each input channel are the attenuator, amplifier, and input
trigger. The input trigger converts the analog output of the input amplifier to a pulse train,
compatible with the counter's Multiple Register Counter (MRC). The data accumulated by the
3-2
HP 5334A1B
MRC is used by the counter's internal microprocessors to compute and format measurements for
display. The counter's input characteristics described in the following paragraphs are:
• Range
IS Sensitivity
• AC-DC Coupling
• Trigger Level
• Slope Control
• Input Impedance
$ Attenuators
• Damage Level
• Separate/Common Input
• 100 kHz Filter
• Arming Input
Specifications for the input characteristics of the HP 5334A/B are given in Table 1-1.
3-13. RANGE
3-14. Range defines the frequency range over which the input amplifier sensitivity is specified.
The range varies with the selected coupling and input impedance. Although the specification
states that the input amplifier has a range from de to 100 MHz, the range may be different for
measurements in each operating mode. Consult the individual RANGE (Signal Operating and/or
Dynamic) specifications under the appropriate OPERATING MODE in Table 1-1.
3-15. SIGNAL OPERATING RANGE. Signal operating range defines the maximum positive and
negative voltages within which the peak-to-peak signal can reliably operate. If the signal peaks
extend beyond the specified signal operating range, as shown Figure 3-2 (bottom), one or more
operating modes may give incorrect results; for example, frequency miscounting or time interval
inaccuracies.
3-16. DYNAMIC RANGE. Dynamic range is the minimum to maximum allowable peak-to-peak
signal range, specified with the trigger level set at midpoint of the input signal and centered
within trigger level range. The instrument's dynamic range is limited by the input amplifier's
linear range of operation. If the input signal exceeds this range, as shown in Figure 3-2 (top), the
input amplifier may saturate, causing transitions of the input to be missed.
t +5V
SIGNAL
EXCEEDS TRIGGER
DYNAMIC LEVEL
SIGNAL
RANGE -.---+1--+1--+1---- OPERATING
RANGE
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _....JL -5V
SIGNAL
EXCEEDS --I-\--I-\--I-\-----~----.-
_ _ _ TRIGGER
+5V
SIGNAL
OPERATING LEVEL
RANGE
SIGNAL
OPERATING
RANGE
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _L -5V
Figure 3-2. Invalid Input Signal Conditions
3-3
HP 5334A/B
3-17. The dynamic range puts a further restriction on the allowable signal peaks as specified by
the signal operating range. For optimum performance, the signal peaks must stay within the signal
operating range specification, and the peak-to-peak value must stay within the maximum
dynamic range specification, as shown in Figure 3-3.
----------------.1- +5V
MAXIMUM
PEAK-TO-PEAK TRIGGER
OF" DYNAMIC LEVEL
RANGE SIGNAL
OPERATING
RANGE
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - ' - - -5V
Figure 3-3. Valid Input Signal Conditions
3-18. SENSITIVITY
3-19. Sensitivity is the lowest amplitude signal at a particular frequency that the counter will
count. The amplifier gain and the voltage difference between the input trigger hysteresis levels
determine the counter's sensitivity: Sensitivity is specified with the trigger level set at a value equal
to the midpoint of the input signal. The input waveform must cross both upper and lower
hysteresis levels to generate a count, as shown in Figure 3-4.
UPPER
HYSTERESIS
LEVEL
PEAK-TO PEAK { TRIGGER

SENSITIVITY LEVEL
-,---+1--\+-'-+1--
LOWER
HYSTERESIS
LEVEL
INPUT SIGNAL!
TO COUNTER
Signal crosses through both

hysteresis levels to effect a couni.
Figure 3-4. Acceptable Peak-to-Peak Amplitude
3-4
HP 5334MB
3-20. If the signal peaks do not exceed beyond both hysteresis limits the input signal will not
generate a count. For example, the peak-to-peak amplitude is insufficient, or the trigger level is
set above or below the midpoint of the input signal, as shown in Figures 3-5 and 3-6.
UPPER
HYSTERESIS
LEVEL
PEAK-TO PEAK
SENSITIVITY lr TRIGGER
LEVEL
l -.---'J.........-J'---jL--_ _
LOWER
HYSTERESIS
LEVEL
INPUT SIGNAL!
TO COUNTER
Signal will not generate a count.
Figure 3-5. Insufficient Peak-to-Peak Amplitude
UPPER
HYSTERESIS
LEVEL
PEAK-TO PEAK { TRIGGER

SENSITIVITY LEVEL
-,-_ _..JL---'''-----''-_ _
LOWER
HYSTERESIS
LEVEL
INPUT SIGNAL!
TO COUNTER
Signal will notgenerata a count.
Figure 3-6. Trigger Level Set Below Midpoint of Input Signal
3-21. The sensitivity specification is given in terms of volts rms for applications that involve
measuring a sine-wave signal, though it should be noted that a different waveform with the same
rms voltage may not trigger a count.
3-22. Since the counter input does not respond to the rms value of the waveform but only to the
peak-to-peak value, the sensitivity specification is also given for volts peak-to-peak with a
minimum pulse width.
3-S
HP 5334A/B
3-23. The sensitivity of the HP 5334A/B can be varied continuously by adjusting the sensitivity
control. In the SENSITIVITY mode the trigger level is preset at zero volts nominal. Note, at
minimum sensitivity, the hysteresis window is increased requiring a larger peak-to-peak voltage
to generate a count, as shown in Figure 3-7. Optimum sensitivity depends on measurement
application; and other factors such as noise, and interfering signals.
HYSTERESIS HYSTERESIS
WINDOW WINDOW
MAXIMUM MINIMUM
SENS IT1 v ITY SENSITIVITY
Figure 3-7. Varying the Sensitivity Control Changes the Hysteresis Window
3-24. AC-DC COUPLING
3-25. Selectable ac or dc coupling is provided for each input channel. For signals with a dc
content that exceeds the hysteresis limits of the input trigger, ac coupling should be used. Figure
3-8 demonstrates the hysteresis limits, and the use of ac coupling.
UPPER
HYSTERESIS - - - - - - -
LEVEL
ov------
-iri\--
LOWER
HYSTERESIS - - -
LEVEL
- --- ~
(a) (b)
DC COUPLING AC COUPLING
Figure 3-8. AC-DC Coupling
NOTE
An input signal with dc content shown (a) would not be counted

unless ac coupling as shown in (b), was used to remove the dc
content.
3-6
HP 5334A!B
3-26. TRIGGER LEVEL
3-27. Trigger level is the voltage at the center of the hysteresis window. The actual trigger points
are typically at the upper hysteresis level (+ slope) and at the lower hysteresis level (- slope), as
shown in Figure 3-9.
TRIGGER ACTUAL~
POINT
(+SLOPE) 'J"\
\
TRIGGER HYSTERESIS
LEVEL WINDOW
.I ~~ACTUAL
TRIGGER POINT
(-SLOPE)
Figure 3-9. Trigger level and Actual Trigger Point
3-28. One use of the trigger level control is to shift the hysteresis levels above (b) or below (c),
ground, to enable counting positive or negative pulse trains, respectively, as indicated in Figure 3-
10.
1
-fT
JUU[-rt-rt- TR I GGER
LEVEL
HYSTERES I S
WINDOW
OV (GROUND)
~~~~
~ iJ itit ~
TRIGGER
LEVEL
HYSTERESIS
WINDOW
(a) (b) (e)
Figure 3-10. Trigger levei Control Shifts Hysteresis Window
NOTE
The signal (a) will not be counted. Using the trigger level control
to shift the hysteresis levels above ground (b), or below ground
(c), enables a count.
3-7
HP 5334A1B
3-29. The HP 5334A!B is provided with:
a. Continuously adjustable trigger level controls.
b. Selectable AUTO TRIGGER.
c. Front panel programmable trigger levels (for HP 5334A only), set via the internal trigger
level controls (DAC51.
3-30. ADJUSTABLE TRIGGER LEVEL CONTROLS. The trigger levels are adjustable overthe entire
dynamic range of the counter when both AUTO TRIGGER, and DACS are off. This arrangement
ensures that any signal of sufficient amplitude and within the dynamic range, can be counted. The
triggering range of the input signal is indicated by the flashing TRIGGER light. Optimum trigger
point is usually determined by positioning the trigger level control within the triggering range. If
you are operating an HP 5334A then refer to paragraphs 3-170 through 3-177 for information
regarding the DACS.
3-31. SELECTABLE AUTO TRIGGER. When AUTO TRIGGER is selected the trigger levels are
controlled by the amplitude of the input signal, and automatically set in accordance with the
measurement application. With AUTO TRIGGER on, the TRIGGER lights will flash continuously,
and the front panel controls will be disabled.
3-32. PROGRAMMABLE TRIGGER LEVELS (HP 5334A ONLY). The trigger level settings are
programmed into memory, whenever a front panel setup is stored. The stored trigger levels are
programmed into the internal trigger level controls (DACS) when the setup is recalled; and the
front panel controls are disabled. Forfurther information on programming and setting the trigger
levels via the 5334A front panel, refer to paragraph 3-170 and Table 3-1.
3-33. SLOPE CONTROL
3-34. The slope control determines which edge of the input signal will trigger the count. With
the positive (+) slope selected a signal going from one voltage level to a more positive level,
regardless of polarity, will generate a trigger pulse at the upper hysteresis limit. With the negative
H slope selected, the negative going edge of the signal will generate a trigger pulse at the lower
hysteresis limit. Trigger points for positive and negative slopes are shown in Figure 3-11. For some
operating modes the HP 5334A/B the slope control has other uses (for example, for rise/fall time,
the slope is used to specify whether rise or fall time is being measured) .
•"oec~
TRIGGER
POINT
..J\
HYSTERESIS
---- - - '- jTRIGGER
LEVEL WINDOW
I f
_SLOPE~V
TRIGGER
POINT
Figure 3-11. Positive and Negative Trigger Points
3-il
HP 5334A1B
3-35. INPUT IMPEDANCE
3-36. Each input has a selectable impedance of 1 MO or 500. With 1 MO impedance, the input is
shunted by <60 pF. At the higher frequencies the 50fl nominal input impedance is usually
preferred, since the inherent shunt capacitance of high impedance inputs rapidly reduces input
impedance. For the lower frequencies, the 1 Mfl input impedance may be selected. The input
impedance becomes 500 kO in the 1 MO position when COMMON input is enabled, (shunted by
85 pF maximum). In the 500 position, the impedance remains 500 for COMMON input.
3-37. ATIENUATORS
3-38. Attenuators are used to reduce the amplitude of the input signal and prevent overloading
without introducing appreciable phase or frequency distortion. Step attenuators with selectable
attenuation positions of Xl or X10 are provided in the HP 5334A/B. For signals that exceed the 5
Vp-p dynamic range of the input, X10 attenuation reduces the signal by a factor of 10. When XI0
attenuation is selected the trigger level reading is multiplied by 10.
3-39. Attenuation is automatic when AUTO TRIGGER is selected. The X10 attenuator is
automatically enabled when the signal exceeds the dynamic range or signal operating range.
When the signal is within both limits X1 attenuation is enabled. Refer to Table 1-1 for exact
specifications on auto-attenuation.
3-40. DAMAGE LEVEL
3-41. Damage level is the maximum input voltage the counter can withstand without danger of
input failure. The damage level value varies with input impedance, attenuator setting, and
coupling selection. Refer to the damage level specifications in Table 1-1. For accurate
measurements, the input signals must stay within the dynamic range and the signal operating
range of the counter.
3-42. SEPARATE/COMMON A INPUT
3-43. Two separate inputs are provided on the standard Model HP 5334A/B. The A and B inputs
are identical in specification. Identical controls are provided for each input to allow maximum
versatility and accuracy. The COM A key, located between the two inputs, controls the selection
of separate or common input. All specifications are the same for separate or common operation,
except sensitivity and impedance. Refer to Table 1-1 for detailed specifications.
3-44. In the SEPARATE position, the A and B inputs and controls operate independently of each
other for applications in time interval, ratio, or other operations where signals applied to the A
and B inputs are from different sources.
3-45. In the COMMON position, the INPUT Bconnector is disconnected and the A and B input
amplifiers are connected together at INPUT A. The channel A coupling, and impedance controls,
condition the input signal to both channel A and B input amplifiers. The input impedance
becomes 500 kfl in the 1 Mn position when COMMON input is enabled, (shunted by 85 pF
maximum). In the son position, the impedance remains son for COMMON or SEPARATE input.
The signal operating range, dynamic range and damage level remain unchanged.
3-46. The A and B input amplifiers have independent LEVEL and SLOPE controls in both
SEPARATE and COMMON mode of operation (provided AUTO TRIG is turned off).
3-47. 100 kHz FILTER
3-48. The HP 5334A/B is provided with a low pass 100 kHz filter for input signals applied to
channel A. The filter is tuned so that signals about 100 kHz are attenuated by approximately 3 dB,
3-9
HP 5334A!B
and all freq uencies above 100 kHz are attenuated greater than 3 dB. Use the filter (100 kHz FI LTER
A enabled) to effectively attenuates noise and harmonics (above 100 kHz), which may affect the
correct measurement.
3-49. ARMING INPUT
3-50. The HP 5334A/B may be armed (made ready to start orstopa measurement) by GATE TIME
control, or the input signal (ARMING OFF); or externally armed by a signal not directly involved
in the measurement (ARMING ON). Further information on external arming may be found in
paragraphs 3-195 through 3-199. The external ARM input allows the operator to choose the point,
on a waveform, at which the start and/or stop of a measurement occurs. Refer to Table 1-1 for
specifications on the ARMING INPUT. Figure 3-12 illustrates using external arming to measure
frequency at various points along a modulated signal.
INPUT A
ARMING SIGNAL 1
ARMING SIGNAL 2
Figure 3~ 12. Use of External Arming to Measure Frequency
NOTE
The STOP ARM can be turned off, allowing the gate time control
to arm the stop, if the appropriate pulse width cannot be
generated by the arming signal source.
3-51. HOW TO MAKE MEASUREMENTS

3-52. The following paragraphs describe how the counter performs in each of the following ten
measurement modes:
• Frequency
• Period
• Time Interval
• Time Interval Delay
• Ratio
• Totalize
• Voltage (Option 020 - HP 5334A only)
• Pu Ise Wi dth
• Rise/Fall Time
• Peak Voltage
3-53. For each measurement mode of the counter, Range, Least Significant Digit displayed (LSD
displayed), Resolution, and Accuracy are described, and specified in Table 1-1.
3-10
HP 5334A1B
3-54. Frequency Measurements

3-55. See figures 3-46 and 3-47 for details of Frequency measurements. The HP 5334A/B makes
frequency measurements on input signals within the ranges of 1 mHz to 100 MHz, and 90 MHz to
1.3 GHz. Input signals up to 100 MHz are received through standard input Channels A and/or B.
Higher frequencies (90 MHz to 1.3) are measured through Option 030, Channel C input.
3-56. Frequency measurements are made by connecting a signal to one of the inputs, pressing
the corresponding function key (i.e., FREQ A, FREQ B, FREQ C), and selecting the appropriate
input signal conditioning. For low amplitude signals on inputs A and B, the sensitivity mode may
be enabled by pressing the SENS key on. In this mode the trigger level is preset at zero volts, and
the sensitivity can be varied by adjusting the TRIGGER LEVEL/SENS control.
3-57. For channel A and B frequency measurements, if SENS and AUTO TRIG are turned OFF,
the TRIGGER LEVEL/SENS control may be adjusted to the optimum trigger point. Triggering range
is indicated by the flashing TRIGGER light. Optimum trigger point is usually midrange over which
the trigger light flashes. The trigger level may be determined by pressing the READ LEVELS key.
Trigger level controls may be readjusted while in the READ LEVELS mode. The voltage displayed
will be within the accuracy and resolution specified in Table 1-1, over a ± 5-volt range.
3-58. The GATE TIME setting determines the resolution of the frequency measurement; and
may be displayed by pressing the GATE TIME key. The gate time range is one millisecond t099.999
seconds in millisecond increments. Note, maximum resolution displayed is nine digits, with one
second of gate time. One millisecond of gate time will display six digits of resolution.
3-59. On power-up, the HP 5334A/B initializes to the FREQ A function with the GATE TIME setat
300 milliseconds, automatic trigger ON (AUTO TRIG), and automatic attenuation ON (X1/X10
ATTN). A periodic signal connected to INPUT A will self-arm the counter, and measurements will
begin immediateiy (provided the signal is within input specifications, and within the restrictions
set by the signal conditioning controls).
3-60. Period Measurements

3-61. See figure 3-48 for details of Period measurements. The HP 5334A/B allows signal period
measurements to be made over a range of 10 nanoseconds to 1,000seconds through the INPUT A
connector. Measurements displayed will be within the accuracy and resolution specified in Table
1-1.
3-62. Period measurements are made by connecting a signal to INPUT A, pressing the PERIOD A
key, and selecting the appropriate input signal conditioning. The TRIGGER LEVEL/SENS control
may be adjusted as described previously under FREQUENCY mode measurements. Thegate time
range is one millisecond to 99.999 seconds in millisecond increments; and may be displayed by
pressing the GATE TIME key. Period averaging is automatic, whenever the gate time is set greater
than the period of the input signal. The number of periods average is determined by the GATE
TIME setting and the input period.
3-63. Time Interval Measurements

3-64. See figure 3-49 for details of Time Interval measurements. The Time Interval mode of the
HP 5334A/B measures the length of time between a START signal at INPUT A and aSTOP signal at
INPUT B, as shown in Figure 3-13. The START and STOP signals may be derived from separate
signal sources, or they may be from a single source. Independent SLOPE and TRIGGER
LEVELISENS controls for the START and STOP signals allow variable triggering on either positive
or negative going slopes. A single-shot time interval measurement may be made over a range of-
(minus) 1 nanosecond to 1,000 seconds. The minimum STARTISTOP pulse width is 5
nanoseconds.
3-11
HP 5334A1B
----J 5",r.:: f-- ----J 5",r';.,5 f--
START~i Iii I I
i
CHANNEL A - - - - -....1
i STop~i
CHANNEL s------+I-----------!I 11------
I I I
I I I
;. .1.O---M"'E"'l"'Jti~"'E"D--- ....·.,1~I
MINIMUM START/STOP
PULSE WIDTH = 5 ns
Figure 3-13. Time Interval Measurement
3-65. When using separate sources forthe START and STOP signals, the START signal connects to
INPUT A, the STOP signal connects to INPUT B, and the COM A key must be in the SEPARATE
position. The appropriate input signal conditioning may then be selected. When both the START
and STOP signals are derived from the same signal, the signal connects to INPUT A, and the COM
A key must be set tothe COMMON position (LED on). The controls may be adjusted, as described
for separate signal sources.
3-66. The position of the corresponding SLOPE key, determines whether the trigger point for
the START or STOP signal will be on the rising or falling edge. If the signals are not repetitive,
AUTO TRIG should be turned off. Then, the TRIGGER LEVEL/SENS controls may be adjusted to
the desired trigger points. Triggering is indicated by the flashing TRIGGER lights. Trigger level
controls must be set within the triggering range to generate a count. The trigger levels may be
determined by pressing the READ LEVELS key. The voltages displayed will be within the accuracy
and resolution specified in Table 1-1.
3-67. Actual gate time is controlled by the measured time interval. The HP 5334A/B makes
single-shot time interval measurements and displays them continuously from gate cycle. The gate
time settings control the time between measurements. When the SINGLE CYCLE gate key is
enabled, each time the RESET key is pressed, a single measurement is made and displayed.
Pressing the SINGLE CYCLE gate key again, returns the HP 5334A/B to the normal Time Interval
mode,
3-6B. Time Interval Averaging is done by pressing the 100-GATE AVERAGE key, while in the Time
Interval mode. Time Interval Average provides greater resolution of measurements than single-
shot measurements provide. See Figure 3-51 for details ofTime Interval Averaging measurements.
3-69. Time Interval Delay Measurements

3-70. See Figure 3-50 for details of Time Interval Delay measurements. The Time Interval Delay
mode of operation is similar to Time Interval mode, but with the following additional control: the
front panel GATE TIME control inserts a variable delay between the START (INPUT A) event and
the enabling of the STOP (INPUT B) event, as shown in Figure 3-14. Potential STOP events are
ignored during the specified delay. The delayed time interval may be continuously measured and
displayed by pressing the T.I.-B DELAY function key. GATE TIME DELAY is the same as the gate
time setting, and may be displayed by pressing the GATE TIME DELAY key while in the Time
Interval Delay mode. The gate time delay is adjustable over a range of one millisecond to 99.999
seconds in millisecond increments.
3-12
HP 5334A1B
START
II-o.t------DESIRED T. I. MEASUREMENT------<
I ACTUAL T. I.
STANDARD T. I. A--t>-S
8T ART STOP
I-j""o------OESIRED T. I. MEASUREMENT-----.....ooI!
~i.o--------ACTUAL ~1
T. I. MEASUREMENT-------4..
I-I.o-------HOLDOFF "I I
1..----. I 1,..-_--.
I I I
I
I
T. I. DELAY
Figure 3-14. Time Interval Delay Measurement
3-71. Ratio Measurements

3-72. See Figure 3-52 for details of Ratio measurements. The Ratio mode of operation provides
measurement of the ratio between two frequencies. The HP 5334A/B measures and displays the
frequency ratio of signals on INPUT A in relation to signals on INPUT B. Both input channels have
35 mV rms sensitivity up to 100 MHz. For ratio displays greater than 1, the higher frequency is
connected to Channel A. Although the HP 5334A/B can measure and display ratios of less than 1, it
Is recommended that the higher frequency be connected to INPUT A.
3-73. Frequency ratio measurements are made by connecting signals to input channels A and B,
pressing the RATIO AlB function key, and selecting the appropriate input signal conditioning.
The GATE TIME control determines the resolution by selecting the number of cycles of the INPUT
B signal over which the ratio is measured. Increasing the gate time or increasing the signal
frequency at INPUT A results in greater resolution of the measurement.
3-74. Totalize Measurements

3-75. See Figure 3-53 for details of Totalize measurements. The Totalize mode of operation
displays the number of counts (events) received through INPUT A, while the gate is open. The
count is continuously displayed, accumulated from input cycle to input cycle. Totalize is manually
gated and is independent of the GATE TIME setting. External arming may also be used to START
and STOP totalize measurements.
3-76. Pressing the TOT START A function key opens the main gate, allowing the number of
INPUT A events to be counted. Pressing the TOT STOP A function key closes the gate, and stops
the count. You may continue counting, without resetting the previous total, by pressing the TOT
START A key again. The RESET key clears the count and resets the display to zero. Pressing any
front panel key will reset the count to zero also.
3-13
HP 5334A1B
3-77. Voltage Measurements (applies only to HP 5334A with Option 020)

3-78. See Figure 3-56 for details of dc Voltage measurements. Operating the HP 5334A in the
Voltage mode requires the Option 020 DVM input module. The module contains HI (red) and LO
(black) input connectors for fully the floating, autoranging Digital Voltmeter. There is no need for
predetermined gate times. Gate time is automatically set at 100 ms when the Voltage mode is
enabled. The voltmeter measures dc inputs up to ± 1000 volts. It automatically selects the ± 10V, ±
100V, or ± 1000V range and polarity, depending on the input voltage. The sensitivity is 1001'S to
100 mV, depending on the range. Pressing the DVM function key enables the operation of the
Voltage mode.
3-79. Pulse Width Measurements

3-80. See Figure 3-54 for details of Pulse Width measurements. The HP 5334A/B provides
automatic Pulse Width measurements, shown in Figure 3-15, through the INPUT A connector, for
repetitive signals over a pulse width range of 5 nanoseconds to 10 milliseconds. Pulse Width
measurements are specified for trigger levels as 50% amplitude of the input signal in Table 1-1.
Pressing the the 100-GATE AVERAGE key increases the number of digits of resolution displayed.
AUTO
CHANNEL A - - TRIGGER
(SLOPE "\) LEVEL
W
PULSE
WIDTH
MEASURED
Figure 3-15. Pulse Width Measurement
3-81. Pulse Width measurements are made by connecting a signal to INPUT A, pressing the
PULSE WIDTH A function key, and selecting the appropriate input signal conditioning. AUTO
TRIG is automatically set on, to trigger at the 50% point of the signal. The channel A SLOPE key
position determines whether positive or negative pulse width measurements will be made.
Measurements are continuously displayed from gate cycle to gate cycle. Actual gate time is
controlled by the input pulse width. The gate time setting controls the time between
measurements.
3-82. Rise/Fall Time Measurements

3-83. See Figure 3"55 for details of Rise/Fall Time measurements. The Rise/Fall time mode of
operation automatically configures the counter to perform either rise orfall time measurements,
through the INPUT A connector, shown in Figure 3-16. The input is automatically set to COM A,
and triggering to AUTO TRIG. In this mode, AUTO TRIG automatically locates the 10% and 90%
points of the input signal, and sets the trigger levels accordingly. RISE TIME is measured when the
SLOPE A control is set positive; FALL TIME, when SLOPE A is set negative. For rise and fall time
measurements the input signal must be continuous. AUTO TRIG and COM A cannot be disabled
when the HP 5334A/B is operating in the Rise/Fall Time mode. Actual gate time is controlled by
the rise/fall time interval. Gate time setting determines the time between measurements.
3-14
HP 5334A/B
I I
I
r - - 907. 1AUTO
TRIG
CHANNEL A I I I
I
--+ --
I I
107. f TRIGGER
LEVELS
! I!
ARMING _ I I I
SIGNAL I I I I
~ ~
SLOPE A fRISE FALL} SLOPE A

Tof 1TIME TIME TO 1:.
Figure 3-16. Rise/Fall Time Measurements
3-84. Rise/fall time measurements are made by connecting a signal to INPUT A, pressing the
RISE/FALL TIME A function key, and selecting the appropriate input signal conditioning. COM A
and AUTO TRIG are automatically seton; the SLOPE A key maybe set for either RISE TIME or FALL
TIME. Measurements are continuously displayed from gate cycle to gate cycle. Pressing the 100-
GATE AVERAGE key increases the number of digits of resolution displayed.
3-85. Peak Voltage Measurements
3-86. See Figures 3-58 and 3-59 for details of Peak Voltage measurements. The HP 5334A/B
measures peak voltages of periodic signals received through input Channels A and/or B, and
positive and negative de voltage levels. Peak Voltage measurements are specified (Table 1-1) with
AUTO TRIG on, over a frequency range of 100 Hz t020 MHz. The measurement range is ±40V for
positive and negative peaks. Auto attenuation automatically enables X10 ATTN when either peak
exceeds ± 5.1V, or when the difference between the upper and lower peaks is greaterthan ±5.1V.
Upper and lower peaks of INPUT A or INPUTB are displayed when the HP 5334A/B is operating in
the Peak Voltage mode.
3-87. The Peak Voltage mode is enabled with the READ LEVELS function key. Pressing the READ
LEVELS key once displays the trigger levels of the A (left three digits) and B (right three digits) input
channels. Pressing the READ LEVELS key twice displays the upper (left three digits) and lower
(right three digits) peak levels of the INPUT A signal, shown in Figure 3-17. To display the upper
and lower peaks of the INPUT B signai, press the READ LEVELS key a third time; a fourth time exits
the Peak Voltage mode, and returns the counter to the previous mode of operation. DC voltage
measurements are made in the same manner as the ac peak-to-peak measurements (see Table 1-1.
Specifications, for maximum de voltage); except that the input dc voltage reading win be
displayed twice.
Figure 3-17. Channel A Peak Voltage Measurement Display
3-15
HP 5334MB
3-1111. INITIAL POWER-UP CHECKS AND SElF-DIAGNOSTICS

3-89. When power is applied to the HP 5334A/B, an automated internal check is made to several
major components, including the microprocessors and related circuitry. During the power-up
cycle, all front panel display indicators will light momentarily, followed by momentary display of
the instrument model number shown in Figure 3-18 ("HP 5334b" will be displayed on the HP
5334B), then the momentary display of the instru ment's decimal HP-IB address (e. g., Addr 03). The
ARM and GATE lights will toggle back and forth briefly, then on successful completion of all tests,
a "PASS" message will be displayed momentarily. During the power-up cycle the HP S334A/B
checks the following;
a. The three microprocessors: Executive MP, Measurement MP, and HP-IB MP, perform a
ROM and RAM check.
b. The Measurement uP performs a limited I/O port check. The GATE and ARM
annunciators flash if the tests pass up to this point.
c. Communication is checked between the Executive and the Measurement microproces-

sors, and between the Executive and HP-IB microprocessors.
d. The counter is checked for a timebase oscillator.
e. The HP-IB address is read from the CMOS RAM and checked for validity.
f. A front panel display check is performed, during which all front panel LED's are turned
on, except STANDBY, and the trigger lights.
Figure 3-18. Intermediate Power-up Display
3-90. Any failures during the power-up cycle will produce a display of a numbered error or fail
message. Fail messages generally indicate a hardware failure within the HP 5334A/B, and error
messages indicate the user has attempted a disallowed operation or key sequence. If an error
(5.0X through 5.2), or a failed message is displayed, pressing the RESET key will clear the display,
and return the counter to the next test in the power-up sequence. Refer to Error Indications,
paragraph 3-252 and Table 3-3 and 3-4.
3-91. After the power-up sequence, the counter will initialize itself. All gate, math/memory
(5334A only), and input signal conditioning keys will be off; the function will be FREQ A, with
AUTO TRIG and auto-attenuation on; gate time setting will be 300 milliseconds; math offset value
will be set at 0, and normalize value at +1. The trigger levels are set automatically, according to the
input signals, and the internal control of trigger and sensitivity levels is disabled (dACS OFF; 5334A
only). If you are operating an HP 5334A then refer to paragraphs 3-170 through 3-177 for
3-16
HP 5334MB
information regarding the DACs. Various aspects of the performance of the HP 5334A/B are
tested dynamicaily during normal operation of the instrument, as describe below:
a. In most cases, whenever two front panel keys are pressed simultaneously, Error 3.0 is
displayed. If one key sticks and another is pressed, it will be detected immediately.
b. If either the Measurement or HP-IB microprocessor stops operating, it will be detected

whenever the counter attempts a data transfer, and the appropriate error message will be
sent to the display immediately.
c. If the Front Panel is inoperative, an error message can be obtained via HP-IB.
d. The CMOS RAM is checked whenever a STORE or a RECALL operation is performed.

Refer to paragraphs 3-126 through 3-134 for further details on STORE and RECALL. Note
that the CMOS RAM and its STORE/RECALL functions are available in the HP 5334A only.
e. Depending upon the configuration of the instrument, if the oscillator stops operating,
the display will either freeze until another key is pressed, which causes the message "NO
OSC" to be displayed, or this message wiil be displayed immediately.
3-92. FRONT PANEL CONTROLS, INDICATORS, AND CONNECTORS
3-93. Figure 3-38 shows the front panel controls, indicators and connectors. Each of the main
sections is described in general terms. Each control, indicator, and connector is described in
complete detail in the following paragraphs.
3-94. POWER (STANDBY/ON) Key
3-95. When the POWER switch is in the ON position, power is supplied to the entire instrument.
~
The STANDBY position removes normal operating power to the instrument, but supplies power
I for the Option 010 high stability oscillator oven to maintain a constanttemperature for the crystal.
The STANDBY indicator wiil remain on when the power switch is in the standby position.
Therefore, the input to the main power transformer, plus the unregulated de voltage to the
osciilator oven circuitry is always energized whenever power is connected, whether the POWER
switch is in STANDBY or ON.
I WARNING ~
THE AC POWER CIRCUITS TO TRANSFORMER T1, THE
STANDBY LED AND THE UNREGULATED DC VOLTAGE ARE
STIll ON, EVEN WHEN THE POWER SWITCH IS IN STANDBY.
CONTACT WITH THESE CIRCUITS CAN RESULT IN PERSONAL
INJURY OR DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT.
3-96. t-:iote that the HP 5334A is provided with an internal battery (not available for HP 5334B) for
continuous memory storage of up to 10 separate front panel setups. The battery is recharged only
when the power SWitch is in the ON position.
3-97. RESET/LOCAL Key
3-98. The RESET key clears and updates the display in continuous measurement modes, and
SINGLE CYCLE gate modes; resets the internal countto zero; and resets the counter to zero in the
TOTALIZE mode. Pressing RESET/LOCAL when the counter is operating in REMOTE, will return
the counter to the LOCAL mode of operation, ilthe HP-IB LOCAL LOCKOUT command is not on.
3-17
HP 5334A/B
3-99. front Panel Controls

3-100. The keyboard is divided into several groups, according to the purpose of the keys. From
the left (see Figure 3-38), are GATE, MATH/MEMORY (MATH only; for HP 5334B),
FUNCTION/DATA, INPUT, and if installed, and INPUT C (Option 030), and DVM (Option 020-
HP 5334A only).
3-101. With some exceptions, each group operates fairly independently of the others. The
operation of each front panel key is discussed in detail in the following paragraphs.
3-102. Operation of the individual keys is relatively straightforward. The LED's (Light Emitting
Diodes), in the center of most keys, indicate the key stalUs. When the LED is on, it indicates the
key's labeled function is active or in effect. When the LED is off, it indicates the key's labeled
function is disabled or inactive. Many keys operate in this toggle (on/off) fashion.
3-103. Front Panel MEMORY (applies to HP 5334A only)

3-104. To avoid having to reenter math constants, signal conditioning setups, etc., whenever
switching between two or more functions repetitively, the Front Panel MEMORY has ten storage
registers. This allows you to set up to 10 function modes, each with its own front panel setup. The
GATE TIME setting, TRIGGER LEVEL setting, and key setups for each of the keys in the GATE,
MATH/MEMORY, FUNCTION/DATA, and INPUT sections can be stored in memory and
recalled. Refer to paragraphs 3-126 and 3-130 for details.
3-105. GATE Group
~ _ _.GATE ~
(8
OATE TI!'£
(]MJ
88
SINGlE
CYCLE
tOO-GATE
AVERAGl::
Figure 3-19. GATE Group
3-106. The GATE group keys toggle ON/OFF each time a key is pressed.
3-107. GATE TIME/DELAY Key
3-108. GATE TIME/DELAY control key displays the current gate time (or delay time) setting, and
enables the GATE TIME ENTRY mode. Each time the key is pressed it will toggle on or off. When
the GATE TIME key is enabled, the key indicator will remain on, the current gate time will be
displayed, and the ENTRY light will flash, indicating that entry may be made. The desired setting (1
ms to 99.999 s) is entered from the keyboard in decimal form, scientific notation, or engineering
notation, by pressing the FUNCTION/DATA keys (digits and special functions are labeled to the
left of each key). As each key is pressed, the corresponding digit will be displayed, as shown in
Figure 3-20 (e.g., the keystrokes are 0, " 4, 5, 6). Only RESET/LOCAL, GATE TIME, and
FUNCTION/DATA keys are operational during GATE TIME ENTRY. All other keys are
nonfunctional, and will display, "Error 2.0", if pressed.
3-18
HP 5334A!B
Figure 3-20. GATE TIME Selection Display
3-109. After the desired gate time has been entered, pressing the GATE TIME/DELAY key again
will store the selected setting in memory, and return the counter to the previous mode of
operation. If the displayed gate time is acceptable, no input is necessary. Pressing the GATE
TIME/DELAY key again, will retain the current gate time setting and return the HP 5334A/B to the
previous mode of operation.
3-110. For FREQUENCY, PERIOD, and RATIO modes, the GATE TIME/DELAY provides a
continuously variable gate time from one millisecond to 99.999 seconds, in millisecond
increments (actual minimum measurement time is one period of the input signal). For time
interval modes, such as T.I.-B, PULSE WIDTH A, and RISE/FALL TIME A, the gate time setting
varies the time between measurements. For T.1. DELAY mode, the gate time setting provides a
continuously variable delay between START and STOP enable.
3-111. SINGLE CYCLE key
3-112. When the SINGLE CYCLE gate mode is enabled, the key indicator remains on, and the
counter makes and display a single measurement. While the SINGLE CYCLE gate mode is enabled,
each time RESET key is pressed the counter updates and displays another single measurement.
Each time the SINGLE CYCLE gate key is pressed, it toggles on or off.
3·113. 100·GATE AVERAGE Key
3-114. The 100-GATE AVERAGE key selects the Measurement Averaging mode of operation.
Each time the key is pressed it toggles on and off. When the 100-GATE AVERAGE mode is enabled,
the key indicator remains on, and measurement modes, except the TOTALIZE mode. (Refer to
paragraph 3-74 for further information on gate time control in the TOTALIZE mode of operation.)
If the 100-GATE AVERAGE and SINGLE CYCLE modes are both enabled, the counter makes and
displays a single, 100-gate average measurement.
3-115. MATH/MEMORY Group
3-116. In the MATH/MEMORY section the keys toggle ON or OFF, with the exception of the
MATH SELECT/ENTER key. When the memory (5334A only, as shown in Figure 3-21) STORE or
RECALL key is ON, the counter is ina data entry mode, indicated by the flashing ENTRY light in the
display. The MATH SELECT/ENTER key has two data entry modes; the first permits an offset value
to be entered; the second allows entry of a normalize value. (SELECT/ENTER key activates an
operational stack similar to that of the READ LEVELS key.) Pressing the key a third time exits the
MATH SELECT entry mode, and returns the counter to the previous mode of operation. When not
in the data entry mode, the DISABLE function toggles between ON and OFF with each press of the
key.
3-19
HP 5334A1B
HP 5334A HP 53348
_ _ _ MATH _
MATH/MEMORY
(8 (8
Sl::LECT I STORE
(8
SELECT/
ENTER 0-9 ENTER
(8 (8
DISABLE RECALL
(8
DISABLE
0-'
Figure 3-21. MATH/MEMORY Group
3-117. SELECT/ENTER Key
3-118. The math SELECT/ENTER key allows the user to perform a number of mathematical
operations on the measurement before it is displayed. OFFSET (OFS), and NORMALIZE (NML)
allows for the addition (or subtraction), and division (or multiplication), respectively, of the
measurement by user specified constants. Modification of the display by the math operations is
represented by the following relationship;
Measurement
Display = + OFFSET
NORMALIZE
3-119. The OFFSET operation is performed after normalization. Any single or combination of
these operations can be selected. This provides the user extensive control over the resultant
display. It can be used, for example, to subtract systematic errors or display percentage
differences.
3-120. The values for the user specified constants are entered from the keyboard. Pressing the
Math SELECT/ENTER key once, displays the current OFFSET value, and enables the OFFSET ENTRY
mode. The key indicator and the OFS light will remain on, and the ENTRY light will flash,
indicating an OFFSET value may be entered. In Figure 3-22.. the display shows the default "0" offset
value.
NML
Figure 3-22. OFFSET ENTRY Display
3-121. During the OFFSET ENTRY mode, the FUNCTION/DATA keys respond to the digits and
special functions labeled to the left of each key (see Figure 3-26, FUNCTION/DATA Group). As
3-20
HP 5334A1B
each key is pressed, the corresponding digit or special function will be displayed, All other
MATH/MEMORY keys, GATE and INPUT keys are nonfunctional, and will display "Error 2,0", if
pressed, For a negative mantissa, the CHS/EEX key must be pressed first, After any digit has been
pressed, the CHS/EEX key refers oniy to the exponent The Math SELECT/ENTER key must be
pressed a second time, to store a newly entered OFFSET value,
3-122. Pressing the Math SELECT/ENTER key a second time, displays the current NORMALIZE
value, and stores any newly entered OFFSET value. (Default normalize value is +1.) If no OFFSET
value was entered, the displayed value will remain in memory. The key indicator and the NML
light will remain on, and the ENTRY light will flash, indicating a NORMALIZE value may be
entered. During the NORMALIZE ENTRY mode, the front panel keys operate in the same manner
as the offset entry mode. To store a newly entered NORMALIZE value, the math SELECT/ENTER
key must be pressed a third time.
3-123. Pressing the Math SELECT/ENTRY key a third time, exits all math entry modes, stores any
newly entered NORMALIZE value, and returns the counter to the previous mode of operation. If
no NORMALIZE value was entered, the displayed value will remain in memory. Pressing the
RESET/LOCAL key at any time during a math entry mode, will exit all math entry modes
immediately, and return the counter to the previous mode of operation. Current entries will not
be stored if the math entry mode is exited with the RESET/LOCAL key.
3-124. DISABLE Key
3-125. When the counter is not in a math entry mode, the math DISABLE key permits theoverall
math operations to be disabled and then reestablished without haVing to reenter constants. Each
time the key is pressed it toggles on or off. When the Math DISABLE key is on, the key indicator
remains on, and all math operations are disabled. When the key is turned off, any previously
entered math constants will be reenabled. Math operations are automatically disabled whenever
the function selection is changed (i.e., FREQ A, PERIOD A, etc.).
3-126. STORE Key (HP 5334A Only)
3-127. The Memory STORE key permits up to 10 complete front panel setups to be stored.
Battery power retains data for 60 days, typically, with the instrument in STANDBY or AC power
removed. Setups will be stored indefinitely with the power on. All 10 storage locations are
completely independent Math constants, Gate Time, Arming, and all other front panel key states
are included in any stored setup. Additionally, the Trigger Level or Sensitivity Level settings are
digitized and stored. Storage register numbers are entered from the keyboard.
3-128. Entry begins by enabling the STORE key. The key indicator will remain on, and ENTRY
light will flash, indicating an entry is expected. A "store register" prompt will be displayed, as
shown in Figure 3-23. An entry is completed by pressing one of the numeric DATA keys (0-91. at
which time the entire front panel setup is stored at the indicated location, and the counter returns
to the previous mode of operation.
v
Hz
•
LSN TLK SRQ NML EN,TRYPRESET ARM···· GATE
Figure 3-23. HP 5334A STORE ENTRY Mode Display
3-21
HP 5334A1B
3-129. Each time the STORE key is pressed, it toggles on or off. When the STORE ENTRY mode is
enabled, only the STORE, RESET/lOCAL, and numeric data keys in the FUNCTION/DATA group
are operational. All other front panel keys are nonfunctional, and will display "Error 2.0" if
pressed. If STORE or RESET/LOCAL is pressed while in the STORE ENTRY mode, the entry mode
will be exited; the counter will return to the previous mode of operation; and the front panel
setup will not be saved. To save a front panel setup, press the STORE key then one of the DATA
keys.
3-130. RECALL Key (HP 5334A Only)
3-131. The Memory RECALL key permits one often previously stored panel setups to be recalled
into the front panel, allows the HP 5334A HP-IB address to be displayed and/or changed, and
allows the preViously stored trigger and sensitivity levels to be reset. Register numbers are entered I
IF
from the keyboard. Pressing the RECALL key enables the RECALL ENTRY mode. The key indicator
will remain on, and the ENTRY light will flash, indicating an entry is expected. The RECALL is
completed by pressing one of the numeric DATA keys (0-9). The complete setup (stored at the I
indicated location) will be recalled to the front panel, including the function. The counter will
then resume making measurements and displaying the results.
,(
NOTE
The trigger and sensitivity levels are set internally when a setup is
recalled, and the TRIGGER LEVEL/SENS controls are not
operational. To return to front panel control of the trigger and
sensitivity levels, refer to instructions in paragraph 3-174.
3-132. Each time RECALL key is pressed, it toggles on or off. When the RECALL ENTRY mode is
enabled, only RECALL, RESET/LOCAL, and the keys in the FUNCTION/DATA group are
operational. All other front panel keys are nonfunctional, and will display "Error 2.0", if pressed. If
RECALL or RESET/LOCAL is pressed while in the RECALL ENTRY mode, the entry mode will be
exited; the counter will return to the previous mode of operation; and the front panel setup will
not be recalled. To recall a front panel setup, press the RECALL key then one of the numeric DATA
keys (0-9). Refer to Figure 3-24 for the RECALL ENTRY mode display.
Figure 3-24. HP 5334A RECALL ENTRY Mode Display
3-133. When the RECALL key is on, pressing the decimal point 1.1 will display the HP 5334A HP-
IB address, and enable the ADDRESS ENTRY mode. The HP-IB address may be changed at this
time. (Refer to paragraph 3-282, Setting the HP 5334A Address, for further instructions.) Pressing
the RESET/LOCAL key will exit the ADDRESS ENTRY mode, without changing the current address
3-22
HP 5334A!B
setting. During the ADDRESS ENTRY mode only the STORE, RECALL, RESET ILOCAL, and numeric
DATA keys in the FUNCTION/DATA group are operational. All other front panel keys are
nonfunctional, and will display "Error 2.0", if pressed.
3-134. When the RECALL ENTRY mode is enabled, pressing the CHS/EEX key will display the
current DACS setting (ON or OFF), and enable the DACS ENTRY mode, shown in Figure 3-25.
Pressing the CHS/EEX key again will display the alternate DACS setting. Each time the CHS/EEX
key is pressed the display will alternate between "dACS On" or "dACS OFF". The DACS setting
may be changed at this time, by pressing the STORE key when the desired setting is displayed.
Pressing the RESETILOCAL key will exit the DACS ENTRY mode, without changing the current
DACS setting. During the DACS ENTRY mode only the STORE, RECALL, CHS/EEX, and
RESET ILOCAL keys are operational. All other keys are nonfunctional, and will display "Error 2.0"
if pressed. (Refer to paragraph 3-170, for further information on setting the DACS.)
Figure 3-25. HP 5334A DACS ENTRY Mode Display
3-135. FUNCTION/DATA Group
_ FUNCTION/DATA _
mEG A F"REQ B fREG C
6(8) 0(8) 0(8)

TI A·8
PERIOD A TI A~a (DELAY!
B(8) 0(8) 0(8)

TOT TOT
RATIO MEl STOP A START A
0(8) 0(8) 0(8)

PULSE RISE/FALL ~- HP 5334A ONLY
WIDTH A TIt-E A DVM .....-
8(8) D(8)~(8)
Figure 3-26. FUNCTION/DATA Group
3-23
HP 5334A1B
3-136. Function selection for the HP 5334A/B is performed by pressing one key per function in
the FUNCTION/DATA group. Twelve (eleven for HP 5334B; no DVM functionl function modes
(labeled in black above each keYI are directly accessible via the front panel. Only one function
may be enabled at a time. Pressing another function key automatically disables the previous
function. Pressing the RESET key starts a new measurement, but does not affect any current
function selection or key setups. To disabled a current function, another function key must be
pressed. The key indicator (LED) identifies which function is active. During a data entry mode (i.e.,
MATH/MEMORY, or GATE TIME;, the key functions are reassigned to the numeric or special
entry values labeled to the left of each key.
3-137. FREQ A Key
3-138. The FREQ A key selects the Frequency mode of operation for signals received through
Input A. The FREQ A mode allows measurements on frequencies from 1 mHz to 100 MHz. On
power-up, the HP 5334A/B assumes the FREQ A function with the GATE TIME set at 300
milliseconds, automatic trigger ON (AUTO TRIG), and automatic attenuation ON (Xl/Xl0ATTN).
Any periodic signal connected to INPUT A at this time, will self-arm the counter, and
measurements will begin immediately (provided the signal is within input specifications, and
within the restrictions set by the signal conditioning controls). The displayed resolution is
controlled by the GATE TIME setting.
3-139. PERIOD A Key
3-140. The PERIOD A key selects the Period mode of operation for signals received through
Input A. The PERIOD A mode allows period measurements from 10 nanoseconds to 1,000
seconds. The HP 5334A/B automatically averages period measurements whenever the GATE TI ME
setting is greater than the period of the signal being measured. The number of periods averaged is
determined by the GATE TIME setting and the period of the input signal.
3·141. RATIO AlB Key
3-142. The RATIO A/B key selects the Ratio mode of operation, measuring the ratio of the signal
frequency at Input A to the signal frequency at input B. The higher frequency can be applied to
either input channel, since the HP 5334A/B can display ratios of less than 1. However, it is
recommended that the higher frequency be applied to Channel A for measurements and displays
greater than 1, as shown in Figure 3-27. The GATE TIME setting determines the resolution by
selecting the number of cycles of the INPUT B signal over which the ratio is measured. Increasing
the gate time or increasing the signal frequency at INPUT A results in greater resolution of the
measurement.
IICIDCl
Hz
_I _I _ s
REM LSN TLK SRQ ors NML ENTRY PRESET ARM GATE
Figure 3-27. Ratio Measurement Display
3-24
HP 5334A/B
3-143. PULSE WiDTH A Key
3-144, The PULSE WIDTH A key selects the Pulse Width mode of operation for signals received
through Input A. AUTO TRIG is automatically enabled, to trigger at the 50% point of the input
signal. (AUTO TRIG cannot be disabled in this mode.) The Pulse Width mode allows
measurements of input signals with a minimum pulse width of 5 nanoseconds, The A Channel
SLOPE control key can be setto measure positive or negative pulses. Gate time is controlled by the
input pulse width. Pressing the 100-GATE AVERAGE key, while in the Pulse Width mode, increases
the number of digits of resolution displayed, as shown in Figure 3-28,
/2'-/5
•
- 1.:,
'':: •
Hz
5
REM LSN TLK SRQ OFS NML ENTRY PRESET ARM GATE
Figure 3-28, Pulse Width Measurement Display
3-145. FREQ B Key
3-146, The FREQ B key selects the Frequency mode of operation for signals received through
Input B. The FREQ B mode allows measurements on frequencies from 1 mHz to 100 MHz, When
the FREQ B mode is selected, a periodic signal connected to Input B will self-arm the counter, and
measurements will begin immediately (provided the signal is within input specifications, and
within the restrictions set by the signal conditioning controls), The displayed resolution is
controlled by the GATE TIME setting,
3-147. T.I. A-B Key
3-148, The T,L A-B key selects the Time Interval mode of operation, measuring elapsed time
between a Start signal on Input A and a Stop signal on Input B, Independent SLOPE and TRIGGER
LEVEL/SENS controls for the START and STOP signals allow variable triggering on either positive
or negative going slopes, Time Interval measurement may be made over a range of -1 nanosecond
to 1000 seconds, The minimum STARTISTOP pulse width is 5 nanoseconds, Gate time is
controlled by the measured time interval. Figure 3-29 shows a T,1. measurement display, where
the stop signal occurs before the start signal.
, v
REM
j
LSN TLK SRO ors NML ENTRY· PRESET ARM
-9 .5
GATE
Hz
·· Figure 3-29. T.I. Measurement Display
3-25
HP 5334A/B
3-149. Time Interval Averaging is done by pressing the 100-GATE AVERAGE key, while in the
Time Interval mode. Time Interval Average provides greater resolution of measurements than
single-shot measurements provide.
3-150. RISE/fAll TIME A Key
3-151. The RISE/FALL TIME A key selects the Rise/Fall Time mode of operation, and
automatically configures the counter to perform either rise or fall time measurements through
INPUT A. The input is automatically set to COM A and triggering to AUTO TRIG. In this mode,
AUTO TRIG automatically locates the 10% and 90% points of the input signal, and sets the trigger
levels accordingly. Rise/Fall Time measurements require a periodic signal. AUTO TRIG and COM
A cannot be disabled when the HP 5334A/B is operating in the Rise/Fall Time mode. Gate time is
controlled by the rise/fall time interval.
3-152. fREQ C Key
3-153. The FREQ C key selects the Frequency mode of operation for signals received through
INPUT C. Operation in the FREQ C mode requires the Option 030 Channel C input module, and
allows measurements on frequencies from 90 MHz to 1.3 GHz. INPUT C prescales signals by a
factor of 20, however, there is no loss of resolution. When the FREQ C mode is selected, the
Channel A and B INPUT section is disabled. Measurements through INPUT C respond to all other
controls the same as FREQ A measurements.
3-154. T.I. A-B/DELAY Key
3-155. The T.1. A-B/DELAY key selects the Time Interval mode of operation, measuring elapsed
time between a Start signal on INPUT Aanda Stop signal on INPUT B. Triggering of the Stop signal
is DELAYED for a period of time determined by the Gate Time Delay setting. Potential Stop events
are ignored during the specified delay.
3-156. TOT START A Key
3-157. The TOT START A key selects the Totalize mode of operation, and starts a continuous
count and display of the number of events received through INPUT A. The count is accumulated
from input cycle to input cycle. The Totalize mode is manually gated from the front panel, and is
independent of the gate time setting. RESET clears the count and sets the display back to zero.
Pressing any key in the input group will reset the count to zero.
3"158. TOT STOP A Key
3-159. The TOT STOP A key Stops and holds the count when the counter is operating in the
Totalize mode. Counting continues without resetting the previous total, when the TOT START A
key is pressed again. RESET clears the counter and resets the display to zero. Pressing any key in
the input group will reset the count to zero.
3-160. DVM Key (Option 020, for HP 5334A only)
3-161. The DVM key selects the Voltage mode of operation, which provides dc voltage
measurements of signals received through the Option 020 DVM input module. The DVM is fully
floating and autoranging. Gate time is internally set at 100 ms when the Voltage mode is enabled;
GATE TIME entry, AUTO TRIG and EXT ARM SELECT are automatically disabled.
3-26
HP 5334A1B
3-162. INPUT Group
A INPUT B
LEV7@\O
TRIGGER
TRIGGER
r@)E~~~
SENS READ LEVELS
SEllS
...... SLOPE
G1 G1
lOO1<.Hz ,-SLOPE
- + MAX
START ARM XIO ATTN FILTER A '<N A STOP ARM XI0 ATTN
G1 GJ G1
AC 50ll 2 AUTO TRIG
(8 (8 (8
EXT ARM
SE:LECT AC 50ll Z
-I (8 GJ G1 (8 (8 (8
-
5Y&_
MAX IN
son
(®> J. ±15v
MAX
10
~J.
ARM
5Y&_
MAX IN
50ll
~J.
.f Figure 3-30. INPUT Croup
3-163. The INPUT group keys toggie ON/OFF each time the key is pressed, with the exception of
the READ LEVELS key. When the READ LEVELS key is pressed, the counter displays one of three
internal registers. (Refer to paragraph 3-87, for information on the contents of the registers.) The
registers are positioned to form an operational stack. Once activated, each time the READ LEVELS
key is pressed, the stack will roll up to display the next register. After the third register has been
displayed, pressing the READ LEVELS key will return the counter to the previous mode of
operation. Note that the RESET key will NOT disable the READ LEVELS key.
3-164. TRIGGER Light
3-165. The tri-state TRIGGER LED (Light Emitting Diode) flashes when the corresponding
channel is triggering; is OFF when the input signal is below the trigger level setting; and ON when
the input signal is above the trigger level setting.
1
3-166. TRIGGER LEVEljSENS Control
NOTE
Any references to DACS apply to the HP 5334A only.
3-167. The TRIGGER LEVELISENS control sets the voltage level at which corresponding input
channel will trigger (with AUTO TRIG, SEN$ and DACS turned off), and is variable over± Svolts in
Xl ATTN. When the SENS key is enabled,the TRIGGER LEVELISENS control varies the sensitivity of
the corresponding input from MAX to MIN, as shown in Figure 3-31. When AUTO TRIG is on, the
trigger levels are controlled by the input signal, and automatically set according to the
measurement application. The front panel TRIGGER LEVELISENS controls are disabled when
AUTO TRIG is ON, or when DACS are ON; and the trigger levels are controlled internally. If you
are operating an HP 5334A then referto paragraphs 3-170 and 3-171 for further details on selecting
3-27
HP 5334A/B
the internal trigger levels via the DACS. After the HI' 53348's TRIGGER LEVEL/SENS has been
operating in the AUTO TRIG mode, the following steps must be performed to regain front panel
control of the TRIGGER LEVEL/SENS control:
1. Press RESET/LOeAl.
2. Press READ LEVELS key (described in paragraph 3-178) three limes (this will cycle the
53348 out of the READ LEVElS mode). The TRIGGER LEVEl/SENS knob should now
control the trigger and sensitivity levels.
~
~~r
,/ . TRIGGER LEVEL ADJUSTABLE
TRIGGER OVER ±5 VOLTS WITH
±5V LEVEL} SENSITIVITY CONSTANT
SENSITIVITY MAX . . . . . ./ AT MAX
::::15 mY Rrms /'./. -5V
MIN >300 mV r:sT -

MAX 1 --A--fA--t-- J
--- =A-fj-\j-
- - 'I
I
SENSITIVITY ADJUSTABLE FROM
::::15mV TO >300 mV .
"15 mV rms
- 1-----------
- - -
.
ov WITH TRIGGER LEVEL CONSTANT
AT 0 VOLTS
Figure 3-31. Trigger Level/Sensitivity Control Application
3-168. SE NS Key
3-169. The SENS key sets the function of the corresponding TRIGGER LEVEL/SENS control to
either Trigger Level or Sensitivity mode. In the Trigger Level mode (blue key indicator OFF),
sensitivity is preset to MAX, and trigger levels are variabie. In Sensitivity mode (blue key indicator
ON), trigger level is preset to 0 volts, and the sensitivity is variable. Refer to Figure 3-31.
3-170. PROGRAMMING 5334A TRIGGER/SENS LEVELS VIA THE FRONT PANEL. Before the
desired trigger levels can be selected, AUTO TRIG must be OFF, SENS must be OFF, and DACS
must be OFF (i.e., the internal control of trigger/sensitivity levels is disabled as described in
paragraph 3-174). Compatible settings are shown in Table 3-1. Then, the trigger levels may be
varied over the entire dynamic range of the counter by adjusting the TRIGGER LEVEL/SENS
controls. The triggering range of the input signal is indicated by the flashing TRIGGER Light.
Optimum trigger point is usually at the midpoint of the range over which the trigger light flashes.
(Refer to paragraph 3-166 and 3-168 for details on adjusting the sensitivity levels.)
3-28
HP 5334A1B
Table 3-1. HP 5334A Trigger/5ensitivity Level Settings

COMPATl8lE SETTINGS RESULTS
AUTO TRIG DACS SENS TRIGGER LEVElS HYSTERESIS SENSITIVITY
Off Off Off Front Panel MIN MAX
Controls
Off Off ON
i o volts Front Panel Front Panel
Controls Controls
Off ON Off Internal MIN MAX

Controls
Off ON ON o volts Internal 1nternaJ

Controls Controls
ON Off Off AUTO MIN MAX

DISALLOWED SETTINGS
ON Off ON X X X
ON ON Off X X X
ON ON ON X X X
3-171. for selecting specific trigger level voltages, it is recommended that the trigger levels be
determined by pressing the READ LEVELS key, then adjusting the controls to the desired voltages.
The voltages displayed will be within the accuracy, resolution, and range specified in Table 1-1.
3-172. After the trigger level controls have been adjusted, the dc voltages are programmed into
memory by pressing STORE, then the selected register number (0-9). Refer to paragraph 3-126 for
details on the operation of the STORE key. Note, the entire front panel setup will be stored in
addition to the sensitivity and trigger levels, including the function (i.e., READ LEVELS, FREQ A,
etc.).
3-173. The store trigger levels and sensitivity levels are programmed into the instrument by
pressing RECALL, then the register number (0-9). The dc voltages for the INPUT A and B trigger
levels and sensitivity levels will be set internally, and the front panel will display "dACS ON" if the
current status of the DACS is called up (as described in paragraph 3-134). Referto paragraph 3-130
for details on the operation of the RECALL key. Note that the entire front panel setup will be
recalled in addition to the sensitivity and trigger levels, including the function (i.e., READ LEVELS,
FREQ A, etc.). The front panel TRIGGER LEVEL/SENS controls will be disabled.
3-174. RETURNING 5334A TRIGGERISENS LEVEL CONTROL TO FRONT PANEL (dACS OFF). To
return to front panel operation of the TRIGGER LEVEL/SENS controls, the Internal Control
(DACS) must be disabled. Internal Control is turned OFF by pressing RECALL, pressing CHS/EEX
once or twice to display "dACS OFF", then pressing STORE. The counter will return to the
previous mode of operation, and the front panel TRIGGER LEVEL/SENS controls will then be
enabled. Paragraph 3-167 describes how to return TRIGGER LEVEL/SENS control to the front
panel of the HP5334B.
3-175. CONTROLLING 5334A TRIGGERISENS LEVELS INTERNALLY (dACS ON). Internal
Control may be used to set the triggerIsensitivity levels for most measurement modes, except
PULSE WIDTH A, RISE/FALL TIME A, and PEAK VOLTAGE. Pressing RECALL, then CHS/EEX will
display the current Internal Control (DACS) status. Pressing RESETILOCAL will exit the DACS
entry mode, without changing the current status. Refer to paragraph 3-130 for further details on
the RECALL operation, and the DACS entry mode. During measurements, the triggerlsensitivity
levels are controlled internally, by setting "dACS On".
3-176. Internal Control is enabled by pressing RECALL, pressing CHS/EEX once or twice to
display "dACS On" (shown in Figure 3-32), then pressing STORE. The counter will then return to
3-29
HP 5334A1B
the previous mode of operation, but the trigger and sensitivity levels will be those settings from
the last time the DACS were enabled. Those sensitivity and trigger levels will be set internally, and
the front panel TRIGGER LEVEL/SENS controls will be disabled. (Refer to paragraph 3-170 for
details on programming trigger levels via the front panel.l
I
•
Figure 3-32. DACS ON Display

l
Ii'!
3-177. When the Internal Controls are enabled manually, as described in the previous
paragraph, the last recall operation determines the trigger level values stored in the Internal
Controls. To return to front panel operation of the TRIGGER LEVELISENS controls, Internal
Control must be turned off, as described in paragraph 3-174.
3-178. READ LEVElS Key
3-179. The READ LEVELS key selects the Peak Voltage mode of operation, measuring trigger
levels, and peak voltages of periodic signals and dc voltages received through input channels A
and/or B. Each time the READ LEVELS key pressed, the counter displays the values stored in one of
three stacked registers: The trigger levels of the A and B input channels; the upper and lower
peaks of the signal at INPUT A; and the upper and lower peaks of the signal at INPUT B, shown in
Figure 3-33. Pressing the READ LEVELS key a fourth time exits the Peak Voltage mode, and returns
the counter to the previous mode of operation. When using the READ LEVELS function to
measure a dc voltage at the appropriate input channel the A and/or B channel readings will be
displayed twice.
I!"
Figure 3-33. Channel B Peak Voltage Measurement Display
3-180. SLOPE/START ARM/STOP ARM Keys
3-181. The SLOPE key selects triggering on either the positive or negative slope of the input
signals received through the corresponding input channel. When the LED (inside the key) is OFF,
it indicates the positive slope is selected. When the LED is ON, it indicates the key's labeled
3-30
HP 5334A1B
function (negative slope) is in effect. For external arming, the A channel SLOPE key selects the
START ARM state, and the B channel SLOPE key selects the STOP ARM state, refer to paragraph 3-
195, for further information on using START ARM and STOP ARM in the external arming mode.
3-182. AC Key
3-183. The AC key selects ac coupling (key indicator ON), or dc dc coupling (key indicator OFF)
for the corresponding input signal. When in COM A, the channel A selection determines
coupling for both the A and B input channels.
3-184. X10 ATTN Key
3-185. The Xl0 ATTN key selects the attenuation of signals at the corresponding input channels.
The Xl position (key indicator OFF) connects the input signal directly to the input amplifiers; Xl0
position (key indicator ON) attenuates the input signal by a factor of 10. When AUTO TRIG is on,
attenuation is automatically controlled by the input signal voltage and cannot be changed
manually.
3-186. 50 Ohm Z Key
3-187. The son Z key selects the input impedance for the corresponding input channels. When
the. key LED is ON it indicates the 50-ohm impedance is selected, and l-Megohm impedance is
selected when the key indicator is OFF. When in COM A, the channel A selection determines
impedance for both the A and B input channels.
3-188. 100 kHz FILTER A Key
3-189. The 100 kHz FILTER A key inserts a low pass filter configuration into INPUT A, attenuating
frequencies above 100 kHz by greater than 3 dB. When the 100 kHz FILTER is enabled, the key
indicator is ON. When the filter is turned OFF, the counter then resumes normal operation over
the entire 100 MHz bandwidth. FILTER A is disallowed in the RISE/FALL TIME mode.
3-190. COM A Key
3-191. The COM A key selects Separate or Common input amplifier control. In the COM A
position (indicated when the key LED is ON), the signal at INPUT A is also applied to INPUT B;
INPUT B connector is disconnected from the input circuitry; and coupling and impedance
selection is controlled by channel A. In the Separate position (indicated when the key LED is OFF),
the A and B inputs and controls operate independently of each other. COM A is automatically set
(and cannot be disabled) when the HP 5334A/B is operating in the RISE/FALL TIME mode.
3-192. AUTO TRIG Key
3-193. The AUTO TRIG key selects the Automatic Triggering mode of operation. When AUTO
TRIGGER is selected (key LED on) the trigger level is controlled by the input signal and is
automatically set according to the measurement application. Attenuation is automatic when
AUTO TRIG is selected; the Xl0 attenuator is enabled when the signal exceeds the dynamic range
or the signal operating range; when the signal is within both limits, Xl attenuation is enabled.
Attenuation and trigger levels cannot be controlled manually when AUTO TRIG is ON.
3-194. AUTO TRIG is automatically enabled when the HP 5334A/B is operating in the RISE/FALL
TIME mode; in this mode, AUTO TRIG sets the trigger levels at the 10% and 90% points of the
input signal. In the PULSE WIDTH mode AUTO TRIG is automatically enabled, to trigger at the
50% point of the input signal. In the PEAK VOLTAGE mode AUTO TRIG finds the upper and lower
peak levels of the input signal. AUTO TRIG cannot be disabled and trigger levels cannot be
adjusted manually when the counter is operating in either of these modes.
3-31
HP 5334A1B
3-195. EXT ARM SELECT Key
3-196. External arming can be used to specify the start and/or stop of a measurement, by a signal
that is not directly involved in the measurement. When external arming is enabled, a signal must
be connected to the ARM input connector to arm the gate to open and/or close. Pressing the EXT
ARM SELECT key displays the arming status, shown in Figure 3-34, and allows the START ARM
(open gatel and/or STOP ARM (close gate) states to be changed.
Figure 3-34. EXTERNAL ARM SELECT Entry Mode Display, Arming Off
3-197. The arming status is represented as "St" (START ARM) and "SP" (STOP ARM). The states
are defined by" - " (arming offl, shown in Figure 3-34; and" I "(armi ng set on negative slope),
and"..J " (arming set on positive slope) as shown Figure 3-35 slopel. The channel A SLOPE key
controls the START ARM, and the channel B SLOPE key controls the STOP ARM.
Figure 3-35. EXTERNAL ARM SELECT Display. Arming States Selected
3-198. Pressing the START ARM or STOP ARM key while the EXT ARM SELECT key is enabled,
will change the corresponding arming state. After the desired states have been selected, the EXT
ARM SELECT key must be pressed again, to record the changes. Pressing the RESET/LOCAL key
will exit the entry mode. without changing the arming status. If either slope has been set on, the
EXT ARM SELECT key LED will remain on to indicate external arming is enabled. Any combination
of these three states can be selected to arm the counter. To DISABLE arming, the START ARM and
STOP ARM must both be set to " - ", arming off.
3-32
HP 5334A1B
3-199. The EXT ARM SELECT key displays the arming status, and allows the START ARM and/or
STOP ARM states to be changed. The EXT ARM SELECT key operates as follows:
a. When START ARM and STOP ARM are both set to" - ", the arming off position:
1. Each time the EXT ARM SELECT key is pressed, it toggles ON or OFF.
2. The LED inside the key turns ON or OFF, respectively.
3. When the EXT ARM SELECT key is ON, it enables the ARM ENTRY mode; OFF,
returns the counter to the previous mode of operation.
NOTE
Pressing the EXT ARM SELECT key does NOT enable external
arming. The counter will not make any measurements while the
EXT ARM SELECT key is in the ARM ENTRY mode. The EXT ARM
SELECT key allows external arming to be enabled or disabled, as
determined by the START/STOP ARM status.
b. When the EXT ARM SELECT key is ON, and the ARM ENTRY mode is enabled:
1. The key indicator remains ON.
2. The counter displays, fiSt" for start arm, liSP" for stop arm, and the current
starllstop arm states (see Figure 3-35).
3. The ENTRY light flashes, indicating the arming states may be changed (see Figure
3-35).
NOTE
Figure 3-35 shows the EXT ARM SELECT entry mode display, with
the START ARM set negative, and the STOP ARM set positive.
4. If neither state is changed, pressing the EXT ARM SELECT key will keep the
displayed states in memory (5334A only), and return the counter to the previous
mode of operation.
c. During the ARM ENTRY mode:
1. The arming states are represented as follows:
" indicates arming is off.
11-, JI indicates arming set on negative slope.
..1" indicates arming set on positive slope.

1/ ...
3-33
HP 5334A1B
NOTE
The various modes of arming are determined by the status of the

START ARM and the STOP ARM. (Referto Arming Modes, Figure
3-36.)
2. The Input A SLOPE key controls the START ARM (St).
3. The Input 8 SLOPE key controls the STOP ARM (SP).
4. Pressing either SLOPE key at this time, changes the corresponding arming state.
NOTE
Only the EXT ARM SELECT, START ARM, STOP ARM, and
RESETILOCAL keys are operational. All other front panel keys
are non-functional, and will display "Error 2.0", if pressed.
The HP S334A rear panel contains a Arm Trigger Level

potentiometer for adjusting the arming signal trigger level from
-4V to +4V. The HP 5334B does not have this type of adjustment;
r
instead the arming signal trigger level is preset to +1.5V. ,f
S. After the desired states have been selected, the EXT ARM SELECT key must be
pressed again to record any changes, and return the counter to a measurement
mode of operation.
6. Pressing the RESETILOCAL key during the ARM ENTRY mode, will immediately
exit the entry mode, and return the counter to the previous mode of operation.
However, any changes to the arming states will not be recorded.
d. When external arming is enabled (i.e., either SLOPE key is set to an ON position):
1. The EXT ARM SELECT key LED remains ON.
2. The ARM light in the display turns ON when the counter is armed to
START ISTOP a measurement, and waiting for an input signal edge.
3. Each time the EXT ARM SELECT key is pressed, the ARM ENTRY mode turns on or
off, however, the key LED does not turn OFF.
4. The ARM ENTRY mode operates in the same manner as previously discussed
paragraph c.
S. External arming is disabled by enabling the ARM ENTRY mode, and setting the
START ARM and STOP ARM states back to " - " (arming off). The EXT ARM
SELECT key must be pressed again to record the status change.
NOTE
The START ARM and STOP ARM must 80TH be set back to
ARMING OFF to DISABLE arming.
3-34
HP 5334A1B
I I L
ARMING
CHANNEL
I I
I I
I I
I I
CHANNEL A
INPUT
DISPLAY
START STOP
-- --
.J J OFF
.J OFF J
.J .J J J
.J J
Figure 3-36. Arming Modes
3-35
HP 5334A!B
3-200. INPUT A,I!
3-201. BNC connectors are used at the point of entry to connect signals to the corresponding
input channels. INPUT A and B are used for all functional modes of operation, except FREQ C, and
DVM (HP 5334A only).
3-202. ARM INPUT
3-203. The ARM INPUT uses a BNC connector at the point of entry for an external arming signal.
This input can be used to specify the START and/or STOP of most measurements.
3-204. iNPUT C (Option 030)
3-205. The INPUT C module, as shown in Figure 3-37 contains the C-Channel input BNC,
SENSITIVITY control (HP 5334A only), and PREAMP POWER jack (HP 5334A only). The input
connector is a special fused BNC, HP 5334A only (refer to paragraph 3-235, for fuse replacement
instructions). The SENSITIVITY control varies the C Channel input sensitivity (refer to
specifications, Table 1-1). The 5334A's C Channel PREAMP POWER jack allows the use of an
optional high frequency broadband preamplifier, such as the HP 10855A. Since the 5334B's C
Channel does not provide a PREAMP POWERjack,an HP 1122A Probe Power Supply may be used.
The HP 1122A has the capability to drive up to four HP 10855As. The GATE TIME control operates
in channel C as it does with channel A or B.
NOTE p
•
The PREAMP POWER jack supplies ~+15V de and a ground
output. This connector will not support a three-wire type power i
probe. •
I
•
~INPUT
HP 5334A
~
c_ IiM----
HP 53348
INPUT C ~
©~X
SENSITIVITY
PREAM" POWER
SVRMS~
MAX!N~
•
,...-::rus~
&
sv
MAX IN
500
RMS
500 90-1;500 t+lz
Figure 3-37. HP 5334A and HP 53348 C-Channels
3-36
v HP 5334A1B
3-206. fRONT PANEL DISPLAY AND ANNUNCiATORS
3-207. The front panel Display and Annunciators are shown and described in Figure 3-38, Front
Panel Display and Annunciators.
-=t=7=a==,==f=f=?::k:ia==6='=a=l.=g=,=g=:::·r-iJ
r:::(
• .•• • e'· • .' .• •
~.
T~1:r-tHW'
o DISPLAY
The 5334A/B contains a nine-digit red LED display, with a floating decimal point. Each LED has seven
segments. Most measurements are displayed in engineering notation with an exponent range of
+9.
o EXPONENT SIGN
The EXPONENT SIGN indicates the polarity of the displayed exponent; ON H If negative; OFF
(blank) if positive.
. . EXPONENT
The EXPONENT LED displays the value of the exponent of the measurement. Measurements are
displayed with exponents of blank (+01, +3, +6, +9. When the READ LEVELS key is enabled, the
exponent is used to display "L", "A", or "b"; for trigger levels, input A or input 8 peak levels,
respectively.
Ov
The V (Volts) annunciator indicates the displayed data is in the voltage domain, in units of Volts.
o Hz
The Hz (Hertz) annunciator indicates the displayed data is in the frequency domain, in units of
Hertz.
Gs
The S (Seconds) annunciator indicates the displayed data is in the time domain, in units of Seconds.
o REM
The REM annunciator lights when the 5334A/B is under remote controL Refer to Remote
Programming via the HP~!B, paragraph 3-260, for further information.
Figure 3-38. Front Panel Display and Annunciators
3-37
HP 5334A1B
:r:
\f
o lSN
The LSN annunciator lights when the 5334A/B is addressed to listen. Referto Remote Programming
via the HP-IB, paragraph 3-260, for further information.
o ILK
The TLK annunciator lights when the 5334A/B is addressed to talk, or when it is being used in the
TALK ONLY mode. Refer to Remote Programming via the HP-iB, paragraph 3-260, for further
information.
Ill> SRQ
The SRQ annunciator lights when the 5334A/B sends a service request to the controller in charge of
the HP-IB. Refer to Remote Programming via the HP-IB, paragraph 3-260, for further information.
G) Of5
The OFS annunciator lights when the mathematical operation (addition) has been performed on
the measurement displayed, other than the default iO OFFSET); or when the counter is in the math
entry mode, indicating an OFFSET value may be entered.
4D NMl
The NML annunciator lights when the mathematic! operation (division) has been performed on the
measurement displayed, other than the default i+1 NORMALIZE); or when the counter is in the
math entry mode, indicating a NORMALIZE value may be entered.
4D ENTRY
The ENTRY annunciator flashes when the instrument is in a data entry mode, and is waiting for a
user specified constant to be entered. for example, when the MATH SELECT/ENTER, EXT ARM
SELECT, MEMORY STORE or RECALL, or the GATE TIME function key is enabled. When an error or
fail message is displayed, while in a data entry mode, the ENTRY light remains on steadily.
lD PRESET
The PRESET annunciator lights whenever AUTO TRIG, or the DACS are on (5334A only) and the
trigger/sensitivity levels are set internally. The TRIGGER LEVEL/SENS controls are disabled when
PRESET is on.
(D ARM
The ARM annunciator lights whenever the counter is externally armed (made ready) tostart and/or
stop a measurement, and waiting for an input signal edge.
(lil GATE
The GATE annunciator shows the status of the counter's gate. Before a measurement starts, this light
is off, indicating the gate is closed. During a measurement, the light is on, indicating the gate is
open. When the gate duration is :5100 ms, the gate light will remain on for a minimum of ~100 ms.
Figure 3-38. Front Panel Display and Annunciators (Continued)
3-38
HP 5334A1B
Numeric display provides 8-digit mantissa FUNCTION/DATA keys provide one INPUT Keys and controls determine
plus exponent, with measurement data shown key per function selection of each how the 'i nput signa 1 is cond i t i oned
in engineering notation. Annunciators measurement mode. During data entry (such as, att.enuat i on, impedance,
indicate units of measurement, HP-IB status, modes key functions are reassigned coupling. seperate or common input
math operations. and Gate status ENTRY LED to numeric or special entry values contro 1, and tr i gger ing).
flashes in data entry mode. PRESET LED labeled to the left of each key.
indicates internal trigger/sens level control.
READ LEVELS Key controls st cked

RESET/LOCAL Key restarts gate, starts SENS Key ON selects adjustable registers to display Channe A&8
new measurement, clears display, returns sensitivity levels and presets trigger levels, Channel A s gnal
counter from remote contra 1 (HP- 18) to trigger levels to OV; OFF selects PeaKs, and Channel 8 signals Peaks.
front panel control. During any data adjustable trigger levels and
entry mode, returns counter to measurement presets sensitivity to MAX.
mode. The DVM module, Option 020, provides
a fully floating autoranging DC voltmeter.
Input DC voltage range up to 100QV
CHP 5334A ONLY).
5334~ UN I VER~AL ~ ~,.,'"

A~ -'r
INPUT 8 "puTT- .!
\
DVM",,-
Pi) COUNTER HEWLETT· PACKARD
!©S~~~
TRIGGER
©\0
'''0 LE '" ;~~~
TRIGGER
~ I
~~, 0~~! 0~)
''"'
8 .MA' 8 - @MA'
"\.SLOf>E 1COkH% "\. SLOPE
SENSITIVITY
START A~ )(10 ATTN FILTER A CO" STOP ARM Xl0 ATTN
88 08 08 Gl 8 8 8 8 8
GJ-fGJ IIG)H/ME(8l
f'REAtJf> POW£fl If::":':
•
TOT TOT EXT AI'IM
\ START A SELE:CT oon z
RATtO A/8 STOP A
" AUTO TRIG
... STANOOY
lQ]
lQ] lG1 08 08 08 lG1" 8""" 88188
~ ~"\ "''''~"
RESETI DATE TII>£ SINGLE loa-GAiE SELECT STORE
,r::CU'~
0-, PlUE RISE/FALL
LDCM- ! O£LAY i CYCLE AVERAGE ENTER
~ ON WIDTH A Tt!'£ A 0""
POWER ,
8 8
DISABLE RECALL\
~8 o8~~J ,,&-
MAX IN
500
(W ~
HI. ARM 500
5v_18
MAXtN~
oon
""300
~\::-J I \
The POWER key applies power to the

ant i re instrument when ON ~) n). In
STANDBY (out), power is applied only MATH keys provide post~measurement
HP 5334A ONLY
RECALL key followed by [e] data key,

provides HP-IB address selection. RECALL
followed by [CHS/EEX], displays status
\
EXT ARM SELECT Key displays arming
status and enables ARM entry mode.
SLOPE keys determine arming status
The input connection for Option 020
Voltmeter. Input voltage lOOOV DC max.
COM is floating. CHP 5334A ONLY)
to the high stability oscillator oven. manipulation of displayed date via of (DACS) Trigger/Sense control, and during entry mode. "-" indicates The C Channel input BNC is a special
Option 010. mathematical operations, OFFSET (±) provides selection of front panel of external arming is disabled. fused connector. The fuse (HP Part
and NORMALIZE (~). Math constants are .\ internal control of Trigger/Sens levels. No. 2110-0301) is l/8A, and is accessible
entered via the FUNCTION/DATA keys (for replacement) from the front panel.
when GATE TIME entry is enabled.
GATE Keys provide SIGNAL CYCLE and MEMORY keys allow up to 10 front panel AUTO TRIG ON selects automatic attenuation The INPUT C module, Option 030. provides
lOO-GATE AVERAGE selection; and a setups to be stored and recalled, including and Trigger/Sens level control, according for FREQUENCY measurements from 90 MHz
GATE TIME/DELAY range of 1 ms to FUNCTION. GATE TIME. MATH. Trigger/Sens to measurement application. up to 1.3 GHz. Controls are provided
99. 999s set via the FUNCTION/DATE levels, and input Key selections. for adjustable SENSITIVITY and PRE-AMP
Keys when GATE TIME entry is enabled. power
Figure 3-39. Front Panel Features, Controls, Indicators, and Connectors
3-39
HP 5334A
AC Power Module. Option 060 Parallel Input BNC Option 060 with Option 030 Option 060 with Option 020
connectors for A-Channel. C-Channe 1 I nsta 11 ed. DVM Installed.
8-Channel and Arming,
@ @)
woO 0 Ir~;/;I«<01~A
v
§' "
@
.~ ~'"~ ~ .©.~ ~I@. ( 1< I
TIME BASE HP-IB D PR£:SS RECAL 3) ENTER AODRESS 0-:50 (3 PRE-! ~ I-
LINE; 48 - 66H::I:, 5OV,," MAX ADDRESS 2) IUS£/rALL. T1 A PERRElL 50 TALK ALWAYS) II ~I'
GATE OUT IN/OUT 2V RMS MAX 4) STORE
+5% - 10%
24O'1,A
~:::::::::JY @
FUSE: 100 - 120'0' 220V - TTL 500
@ SOOnAT 250 mAT ~ @
@ @
-I '\
1/
Time Base Adj. Arm Trigger

HP-IB Connector.
Leve 1 Contro 1 .
Gate Output BNC Connector Time Base Input/Output Internal/External Switch.
when Gate is open TTL High BNC Connector. Sets Time Base to Output
is generated. or Input, respectively.
HP 53348
AC Power SocKet. Option 060 Parallel Input BNC Option 060 with Option 030
Connectors for A-Channel, 8-Channel C-Channel Installed.
and Arming.
tl - l;jj
j L1NE-----------,
LINE SELECT
::.:::::=@
WARNING
@
A
~A
G
A
....
T~TL ARM
G
A
...
~B
G I A ~O-
-
J \
Lf
~
FUSE
---. (@J ~
.....
ill.
...
..a
ITTT'"l'I
230V....
115V &0.
lOOV..
N/A....
ITTT'"l'I
~
TQ .vold ..1...,...... 10
<1<1 nat,...........- ooy_.
l ldft.
R...,. "II .......vlol"'$
~",,1
shool<
No u.... "'''''Vlc,,,,"ble part•
t 0
A.dU."
060 0 700 J
I
~
INPUT 5-5V
TIME BASE
INIOUT
OUTPUT>.5Vrme
ADJ INT IEXT

~
r
II
I
-~
--
F::::;=»
'
11111'3":~~~E~~LJ ~
~-~' ,~,=n_' ~::::::~ @
a 'lgggOOI
to
:::.="
"11'1'1,,..
........ 0 '1~
,...,-'
/
s:: --'"'7..
_)
HP 53348 7.: 4)
I ::IJ .
@
. :.
~I
ruse Holder.
~ Time Base Adj. HP-I
Internal/External Switch HP-IB Address Switch.
Slide Switches selects Time Base Input/Output
appropriate line voltage. BNC Input/Output. Sets Time Base to Output Figure 3-39
or Input, respectively.
fRONT PANEL FEATURES, CONTROLS,
Figure 3-40. Rear Panel Features, Controls, and Connectors
INDICATORS, AND CONNECTORS
(See Page 3-39)

HP 5334A/B
....",. Figure 3-40

......... REAR PANEl fEATURES, CONTROLS, AND CONNECTORS
3-40
HP 5334A/B
3-208. REAR PANEL CONTROLS AND CONNECTORS
3-209. A number of signal inputs, outputs, and controls are provided on the rear panel,
including the optional rear panel inputs for Channel A, Channel B, Arming, Channel C, and the
DMV (HP 5334A only). These features are shown in Figure 3-40. The following paragraphs provide
a detailed description of the function of each panel feature.
I
3-210. Hi> 5334A AC Power Input Module
I
3-211. The AC Power Module permits operation from 100-, 120-, 220-, or 240-volt ac. The power
module contains a printed circuit line voltage selector card, which must be positioned to agree
with the voltage of the power source. When the card is plugged into the module, the number
I
visible in the module window indicates the nominal line voltage to which the instrument must be
connected. The correct value line fuse must be installed after the card is inserted (see Section II,
Line Voltage Requirements, paragraph 2-13, and Figure2-1 for more information). The protective
grounding conductor connects to the instrument through this module.
I WARNING I
ANY INTERRUPTION OF THE PROTECTIVE (GROUNDING)
CONDUCTOR, INSIDE OR OUTSIDE THE INSTRUMENT OR
DISCONNECTING OF THE PROTECTIVE EARTH TERMINAL
WILL CAUSE A POTENTIAL SHOCK HAZARD THAT COULD
RESULT iN PERSONAL INJURY AND/OR DAMAGE TO THE
iNSTRUMENT.
3-212. HI' 5334B AC Power Input Circuit
3-213. The AC Power Input Circuit permits operation from 100-,115-, or 230-volt ac. The ac
power circuit contains two slide switches, which must be positioned to agree with the voltage of
the power source. The nominal line voltage to which the instrument must be connected is
indicated by the illustrated switch setting combinations shown on the rear panel under "LINE
SELECT", see Figure 2-2.
3-214. GATE OUT Connector (Hi> 5334A Only)
3-215. GATE OUT is a BNC output connector that permits the activity of the counter's internal
gate to be monitored. When the gate is open (indicated by the GATE LED in the Front Panel
display) the GATE OUT generates a TTL high. This output can be connected to an oscilloscope to
provide a visual indication of when a measurement occurs, or the duration of a measurement.
3-216. TIME BASE IN/OUT Connector
3-217. Time Base IN/OUT is a BNC connector that can be used as an input or output, depending
on the position of the Time Base INT/EXT switch. When used as an Output, the connector
provides a sine wave signal from the HP 5334A/B internal 10 MHz time base that may be used as a
reference for other instruments. If the reference to the HP 5334A/B is provided from another
source, the IN/OUT connector can be used as an Input, and will accept a 10 MHz signal.
3-2111. TIME BASE ADI Control
3-219. The Time Base AD) control allows the adjustment of the internal reference oscillator,
without requiring removal of the instrument covers.
3-41
HP 5334A/B
3-220. TIME BASE INT/EXT Switch

3-221. The Time Base INT/EXTswltch sets the function of the corresponding Time BaseIN/OUT
connector to either INPUT or OUTPUT mode. When the switch is in the INT (internal) position the
connector is in the Output mode; in the EXT (external) position the connector is in the Input
mode (to accept an external reference).
3-222. HP-lB Interface Connector

3-223. The HP-IB 24 pin Interface connector Is used to convey data and programming
information. Refer to paragraph 3-260, Remote Programming Via HP-IB, for fu rther information.
3-224. Arm Trigger level Control (HI' 5334A Only)

3-225. The ARM TRIGGER LEVEL control allows the adjustment of the arming signal trigger level
from -4V to +4V. This control simultaneously adjusts the trigger level for both the START ARM
and the STOP ARM; they cannot be adjusted Independently.
3-226. R.ear Panel INPUT Connectors (Option 060)

3-227. Front and Rear Panel PARALLEL inputs are provided for Channels A, B, and Arming. This
offers the convenience of connecting signals to these inputs through either the front or rear
panel. Only rear panel input are provided for Channel C, and/or the DVM, for instruments that
have one or both of these options. BNC connectors are used at the point of entry to connect
signals to the corresponding inputs.
3-228. All Optional rear panel inputs are used for the same functional modes of operation as the
front panel inputs. All signal conditioning, gate math/memory, and function controls for these
inputs remain on the front panel.
3-229. Option 010 Oven Oscillator Control (HI' 5334A Only)

3-230. A hole is provided on the rear panel of the HP 5334A to allow external fine adjustment of
the Option 010 Oven Oscillator (10811), as shown in Figure 3-40.
3-231. Address Switch (HI' 5334B Only)

3-232. The HP 5334B is equipped with an HP-IB Address switch, located In the rear panel, as
shown in Figure 3-40. The instrument's HP-I B address is set to "03" at the factory but can be set by
the user to addresses "00" to "30". Refer to paragraph 3-284 for further details on HP-I B address
setting of the 5334B.
3-233. OPERATOR'S MAINTENANCE

3-234. The only maintenance the operator should normally perform is replacement of the
primary power fuse (when necessary) located within the AC Power Module. For instructions on ,i
how to change the fuse, refer to Section II, Line Voltage and Fuse Selection.
For continued protedion from lire hazards, be sure that only

slow-blow type fuses with the required current and voltage
ratings are used lor replacement Do not use repaired luses or
short-circuited fuse-holders.
3-42
HP 5334A1B
3-235. Replacing C-Channel Fuse (HP 5334A only)

3-236. When Option 030 C-Channel is installed. the operator may be required to replace the C-
Channel input BNC fuse. This is a 1/8A fuse (HP Part Number 2110-0301) which is located within
the INPUT C BNC connector (see Figure 3-41 for details). To replace the fuse:
a. Disconnect the power cord.
b. Unscrew the special BNC barrel (HP Part Number 05305-60205).
c. With needle-nose pliers, remove and replace the fuse.
d. Reinstall the BNC barrel, and tighten using a BNC cable connector -Be careful not to
overtighten.
PANEL
~
SPECIAL BODY HEX NUT
BNC 05305-20104 05BO-0038
. 05305\;0205
/ ( r LOCKWASHER
I
I
[[]I}
rl
~(r MINI CONNECTOR
TELFON INSULATOR ~ 05305-60206
05305-20105
PANEL
J
Figure 3-41. Details of INPUT C BNC Connector and Fuse Mounting (5334A Only)
3-237. Power-Up/Warm-up
3-238. The HP 5334A/B has a two-position power switch, STANDBY and ON. Forthe HP 5334A/B
Option 010 High Stability Time Base, it is important that the instrument remain connected to the
power source in the STANDBY mode when not in use. This supplies power to the standby LED,
and to the crystal oscillator oven, maintaining a constant oven temperature, thus eliminating the
need for a warm-up period. When the STANDBY mode is not used, and power is disconnected
from the instrument, allow 30 minutes from the application of external power in the ON mode for
the instrument (crystal oven) to warm-up.
I WARNING I
POWER IS ALWAYS PRESENT AT THE LINE SWiTCH (STANDBY
LED) AND TRANSFORMER, AND UNREGULATED DC is PRESENT
WHENEVER THE LINE CORD IS CONNECTED TO THE POWER
SOURCE. DISCONNECTING THE POWER CORD IS NECESSARY
TO REMOVE ALL POWER FROM THE iNSTRUMENT.
3-43
HP 5334A!B
3-239. The HP 5334A is provided with an internal battery, for front panel continuous memory
(this feature is not available for the HP 5334B). The battery is recharged only when the POWER key
is in the ON position.
3-240. OPERATOR'S CHECKS

3-241. The following procedures will verify the basic operation of the HP 5334A/B Universal
Counter. These checks are not intended to verify the overall accuracy or performance
specifications of the instrument. They should, however, provide the operator with a quick
method of determining that the counter is operating properly. Operator's checks are provided in :1
two levels (The operator should perform both tests):
a. Power-up Self-check.
b. Diagnostic Sequence.
r
>
Before switching on the instrument, ensure the following:
1. The transformer primary is matched to the available line ,

~,
voltage, paragraph 3-210 (HP 5334A) or paragraph 3-212
(HP 5334B).
2. The correct fuse is installed, paragraph 3-233.
3. All safety precautions and warnings have been observed,

Section I and II. I
3-242. Power-Up Self-Check
3-243. To perform the Power-Up Self-Check after the HP 5334A/B has been turned ON, cycle
the POWER switch to STANDBY, then back to ON. When the POWER is cycled back ON, an
internal check is made of the display, and the microprocessors and related circuitry. During this
cycle, all front panel display segments and indicators will light momentarily, followed by the
momentary display of the instrument model number, then the momentary display of the
instrument's decimal HP-IB address (e.g., Addr 03). The ARM and GATE lights will toggle back and
forth, followed by the momentary display of the "PASS" message, when all tests have successfully
completed, as shown in Figure 3-42.
v
Hz
5
• ••
Figure 3-42. Self-Check PASS Display
3-44
HP 5334A1B
3-244, After the power-up sequence, the counter will initialize itselL All gate, math/memory,
and input signal conditioning keys will be OFF; the function will be FREQ A, with AUTO TRIG and
auto-attenuation ON, and the gate time setting at 300 milliseconds; math offset value wi II be set at
+0, and normalize at +1; internal trigger levels controls will beset atO volts, and dACS will be OFF.
3-245. Any failures during the power-up cycle will produce a display of a numbered error or fail
message. Fail messages generally indicate a hardware failure within the HP 5334A/B, and error
messages indicate the user has attempted a disallowed operation or key sequence. If a fail
message is displayed, press the RESET key to clear the display, and return the counter to the next
test in the power-up sequence. Refer to Error Indications, paragraph 3-252, and Tables 3-3 and 3-4.
3-246. Diagnostic Sequence

3-247. The Diagnostic Sequence is a continuous cycle which will repeat until manually reset.
During the Diagnostic Sequence an internal check is made of several major components,
including the microprocessors and related circuitry, such as:
a. Executive, Measurement, and HP-IB Microprocessor ROMs and RAMs.

~
'I
b. Communication between the Executive and HP-IB Microprocessors, and between the
Executive and Measurement Microprocessors.
c. Front Panel Display.
d. The HP-IB Address is read from the CMOS RAM and verified.
e. MRC Registers.
3-248. When all tests have successfully completed the HP 5334A/B will display a "PASS"
message. If an ERROR or FAil message is displayed, during the test cycle, press the RESET key to
clear the display; and return the counter to the next test in the Diagnostic Sequence. Refer to
Error Indications, paragraph 3-252, and Tables 3-3 and 3-4.
3-249. To perform the Diagnostic Sequence, cycle the POWER key to STANDBY and back to ON,
while pressing the RESET key (press both these keys simultaneously). Hold the RESET key until the
"dIAG" message is displayed. Verify, during this cycle, all front panel display segments and
indicators turn ON and OFF momentarily, except STANDBY, and the A and B INPUTtrigger lights,
as shown in Figure 3-43. The ARM and GATE lights toggle back and forth during the display of the
"PASS" message, if all tests have successfully completed. The momentary display of the "dIAG"
message is then repeated. To exit the Diagnostic Sequence, recycle the POWER switch to
STANDBY and back to ON.
• v
-BBBBBBBBB -B .5
•.,............ . :: :.•'<.. '. :'. ".•: : '. :.•.:, : :. .:' .•
• Hz
• • •• •• ••
REM LSN ILK SRQ Of'S NML ENTRY PRESET ARM GATE
Figure 3-43. Display Check
3-45
HP 5334A1B
3-250. PRESET AND LOCKOUT CONDITIONS
3-251. As each HP 5334A/B front panel key is pressed, various parameter settings are controlled
internally. These are referred to as Preset and Lockout conditions. The Preset conditions are the
parameters and/or key settings that are enabled on initial selection of each key. The Lockout
conditions are the parameters and/or key settings that are disallowed after initiai seiection of each
key. Attempting to perform a disallowed key stroke, or key sequence, in a given mode of
operation, will produce a displayed error message. Error Messages are described in paragraph 3-
252. Preset and Lockout condition are listed in Table 3-2.
Table 3-2. Preset and Lockout Conditions

MODE PRESET CONDITiONS LOCKOUT CONDITIONS
PARAMETER SETTING SETTING
RISE/FALL SINGLE CYCLE OFF none
TIME A 100-GATE AVERAGE OFF none
EXT ARM SELECT OFF none
I, MATH DISABLE ON none
AUTO TRIG ON OFF
I X10 ATTN controlled by AUTO TRIG ON/
~.'
OFF
SENS OFF ON
DACS iS334A only) OFF ON
COM A' ON OFF
INPUT B SLOPE controlled by INPUT A
INPUT B COUPLING controlled by INPUT A

+SLOPE/
-SLOPE
AC/
=
~.'.
iDC)
INPUT B IMPEDANCE controlled by INPUT A son z/
i1MnZ)
FILTER A OFF ON
'NOTE
INPUT B SLOPE, COUPLING, and IMPEDANCE
are set to corresponding INPUT A settings via
COM A.
DVM SINGLE CYCLE OFF ON

(Voltage) 100-GATE AVERAGE OFF ON
(HP S334A EXT ARM SELECT disallowed in DVM mode ONI
only) OFF
MATH DISABLE ON none
AUTO TRIG OFF ON
GATE TIME ENTRY (100 ms) controlled by DVM ON
TRIGGER SINGLE CYCLE OFF none

LEVELS 100-GATE AVERAGE OFF ON
EXT ARM SELECT disallowed in TRIG LEVEL ON/
OFF
READ MATH DISABLE ON OFF
LEVELS AUTO TRIG OFF ON
GATE TIME ENTRY disallowed in TRIG LEVEL ON
3-46
"
HP 5334A1B
Table 3-2. Preset and Lockout Conditions (Continued)
MODE ,I PRESET CONDITIONS LOCKOUT CONDITIONS

i I PARAMETER SETTING SETTING
A,B PEAK SINGLE CYCLE Off none
VOLTAGE 100-GATE AVERAGE Off ON
;
EXT ARM SELECT disallowed in PEAK LEVEL ONI
I Off
READ MATH DISABLE ON OfF
LEVELS AUTO TRIG ON OFF
Xl0 ATTN controlled by AUTO TRIG ONI
OFF
SENS OfF ON
DACS (S334A only) OfF ON
GATE TIME ENTRY disallowed in PEAK LEVEL ON
AUTO TRIG Xl0 ATTN controlled by AUTO TRIG ONI
Off
, (ON) SENS OFF none
Note, if SENS is turned ON, AUTO TRIG is turned OFF,
DACS (S334A only) OfF none
Note, if DACS are turned ON, AUTO TRIG is turned Off.
TRIGGER (set internally) (controis disabled)
LEVELISENS
,
COM A (ON) ACI INPUT B coupling controlled by INPUT A ONI
DC I OFF
son UINPUT B impedance controlled by INPUT A I ONI
(1 Mn Z) OfF
SENS ION) AUTO TRIG OFF none
Note, if AUTO TRIG is turned ON, SENS is turned OFf.
DACS ION) AUTO TRIG OfF AUO none
(S334A Note, if AUTO TRIG is turned ON, DACS are turned OfF.
only) TRIGGER (set internally) (controls disabled)
LEVELISENS
3-252. ERROR INDICATIONS

3-253. Under certain conditions the HP 5334A/B will display either an Error or a Fail message.
These messages typically occur during the Power-Up cycle, as shown in Figures 3-44 and 3-45. The
fail messages generally indicate a hardware related problem. Error messages usually indicate that
the user has attempted a disallowed operation or incorrect sequence, either through the
keyboard or the HP-IB. Table 3-3 lists the Error Messages, and Table 3-4 lists the Fail Messages.
J
3-254. Error messages 1.0 to 2,4, as shown in Figure 3-45, are displayed momentarily and
automatically cleared, when the counter is in local operation. Error messages 4.0 to 4,4 are only
generated in remote operation. Refer to paragraph 3-352 for details on HP-IB Error Handling.
Error messages 5.0X to 5.2, and Fail messages may be cleared by pressing the RESETILOCAL key.
All keys are disabled when a fail message or an error message 5.0X through 5.2 is displayed, except
RESETILOCAL and POWER. If a displayed Error or Fail message cannot be cleared, refer to the
1
troubleshooting information in Section VIII of the Service Manual.
3-47
HP 5334A/B
-
f/J
, I
"-
",
,'_I •
Qrs
•
NML ENTRY PRESET ARM
Figure 3-44. FAIL Message Display
Figure 3-45. Error Message Display
Table 3-3 Error Messages
TYPE DISPLAY MESSAGE DESCRIPTION

0.0 No Error (used via HP-iB only)
FRONT PANEL 1.0 Parameter disallowed in present'mode
SETUP 1.1 Attenuators controlled by AUTO TRIG
1.2 SO-ohm B, AC B settings preset by COM A
1.3 Slope B set by Slope A in Rise/Fall mode
I 1.4 Parameter disallowed in High Speed mode (HP-IB)
1.5 Calibration data unaccessible in present mode (HP-IB)
DATA ENTRY 2.0 Invalid key entry
2.1 Data outs-ide valid range
2.2 Data exceeds maximum resolution
2.3 Mantissa digit buffer full
2.4 Decimal point previously entered
KEYBOARD 3.0 Multiple key closures
HP-IB 4.0 Mnemonic not recognizable
PROGRAMMING' 4.1 Numeric syntax error
4.2 Alpha character expected
4.3 Data exceeds valid range
4.4 Attention (ATN) asserted in Talk-Only mode
SETUP S.OX Store instrument setup operation failed
MEMORY (X = register number: 0-9)
(S334A only) 5.1X Recall instrument setup operation failed
(X register number: O~9)
5.2 HP~IB address cannot be recalled at power-up;
address defaults to 03
3-48
HP 5334A1B
Table 3-4 Failure Messages

TYPE DISPLAY MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
EXECUTIVE 6.0 Internai ROM (U191 failure
PROCESSOR 6.1 Internal RAM IU191 failure
MEASUREMENT 7.0 Internal ROM iU291 or RAM IU29) failure
PROCESSOR, MRC 7.1 MRC iU20) register problem iE#T or E=T=O)
7.2 iU29) I/O Port 5 failure
7.3 IU29) I/O Port 1 failure
HP-IB 8.0 ROM IU17) failure
PROCESSOR 8.1 RAM iU17) failure
PROCESSOR 9.0 Executive Processor (U19) not responding
DATA 9.1 Measurement Processor (U29) not responding
COMMUNICATIONS 9.2 HP-IB Processor (U17) not responding
9.3 Exec/Meas CPU data communications failure
9.4 Exec/HP-IB CPU data communications failure
3-255. ERROR EXAMPLES
3-256. The following paragraphs demonstrates several key sequences that will produce an Error
Message, and include an explanation of the message displayed.
a. Press I RISE/FALL TIME A I function key:
1. Press I COM A I or I AUTO TRIG I

~:
DISPLAY: Error 1.0

CAUSE: COM A and AUTO TRIG cannot be disabled in RISE/FALL TIME mode.
2. Press I X10 ATTN I

,
,-' DISPLAY: Error 1.1
CAUSE: Attenuation is controlled by AUTO TRIG.
3. Press INPUT B 150 Z I or I AC I

DISPLAY: Error 1.2
CAUSE: INPUT B impedance and coupling are controlled by corresponding
INPUT A key settings, via COM A.
4. Press INPUT B I SLOPE I

DISPLAY: Error 1.3
CAUSE: INPUT A SLOPE determines whether RISE or FALL TIME is measured,
and sets the INPUT B SLOPE accordingly.
b. Press I GATE TIME I key, to enable data entry mode:
1. Press I SINGLE CYClE I key.

DISPLAY: Error 2.0
CAUSE: Only RESET/LOCAL, GATE TIME, and FUNCTION/DATA keys are
operational during GATE TIME ENTRY. All other keys are nonfunctional.
3-49
HP 5334A1B
2. Press 191, 191, I 91, !CHS/EEX!, 191
Press IGAIE TIME I

DISPLAY: Error 2.1
CAUSE: Gate time may be set from 1 ms to 99.999 s; 9,999E+9 exceeds the valid
gate time range.
RESULT: Gate time will defauit to previous setting, and allow reentry.
3. Press! 41, i 51, 161, I CHS/EEX I, 151
Press I GAIE TIME I

DISPLAY: Error 2.2
CAUSE: Gate time cannot be set at increments less than 1 ms; 4.56 ms (456E-5)
exceeds maximum resolution.
RESULT: Digits that exceed the maximum resolution (.56), will be truncated to
dispiay: "400.-5", and allow reentry. Small zeroes represent non-significant
digits.
4. Press 191, 191, 191, i 91, 191, 191, 191, 191, 191, 191
DISPLAY: Error 2.3
CAUSE: Display buffer cannot accept more than nine digits.
Press IGAIE TIME I

DISPLAY: Error 2.1 (See step b, 2)
RESULT: Gate time will default to previous setting, and allow reentry.
5. Press 191, !.I, 191, 1.1

DISPLAY: Error 2.4
RESULT: counter will redisplay 9.9 s, and allow reentry.
6. Press I fREQ A 1 and I fREQ III simultaneously.

DISPLAY: Error 3.0
CAUSE: May result if more than one key is pressed at a ti me; or if a key sticks, and
another is pressed.
7. Press 1RESET/LOCAL 1 key to exit GATE TIME ENTRY mode.
c. The following example (applies to HP 5334A only) may result, if a valid 5334A front panel
setup is not stored in the selected register; or if the recall operation cannot be completed
due to a hardware failure.
1. Press IRECALL I memory key. ,L

....
2. Press any digit; i. e., 8.

DISPLAY: Error 5.18
CAUSE: Recall operation cannot be completed (I.e., no front panel setup stored
at selected register).
3-50
HP 5334A1B
NOTE
If Error 5.1X results, try storing a front panel setup, to determine

whether it is due to a hardware failure. Refer to paragraph 3-252,
Error Indications.
3-257. DETAILED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

3-258. The following paragraphs provide detailed operating instructions for the various
functions of the instrument. Step-by-step procedures are included in tabular form to allow you to
become familiar with all of the basic functions. For further information on operating the HP
5334A/B, refer to the following:
a. Detailed description of the performance, and function of the counter's signal

conditioning and input controls (such as, sensitivity, coupling selection, trigger level
control, impedance selection, and attenuation), paragraph 3-11, Input Characteristics
and Signal Conditioning.
b. Detailed description of how the HP 5334A/B performs in each measurement mode, and
application of the input signal conditioning controls within each measurement mode,
paragraph 3-51, How to Make Measurements.
c. Overall description of the performance of the counter's display, keyboard, front panel
memory, gate time selection, time base, and auxiliary features, paragraph 3-92, Front
Panel Controls, Indicators, and Connectors.
d. Detailed description of the operation, and function of each front panel key, control, and
feature, paragraph 3-92, Front Panel Controls, Indicators, and Connectors.
e. Detailed description of the operation, and function of each rear panel feature, paragraph
3-208, Rear Panel Controls and Connectors.
f. Detailed operating procedures for each measurement mode, Figures 3-46 through 3-60.
3-259. Within each specific measurement mode (e.g., FREQ A, PERIOD A), a considerable
amount of flexibility is present for both the type of input signal and measurement technique. The
intent of the following figures and text is to provide instructional procedures for each major
functional mode. These operating guidelines should assist in making the most useful and accurate
measurement possible.
3-51
HP 5334MB
~5334A UNIVERSAL COUNTER

,
.'<HI:
•
•
-
NOTE
For specifications concerning bandwidth, accuracy, and
amplitude on input signals, refer to Table 1-1.
1. Press POWER switch to ON position.
2. Press COM A key to (SEPARATE) position (LED OFF) for separate inputs; COMMON position (LED ON)
for common inputs.
3. Connect signal to INPUT A or INPUT B jack.
4. Press corresponding function key (FREQ A, FREQ B).
5. Press AC/(DC), son Z/(1Mn), and SLOPE keys to appropriate positions.
6. Press SENS key to SENSITIVITY position (LED ON); rotate TRIGGER LEVEL/SENS control fully ccw. This
sets the trigger level at 0 volts (nominally) and sensitivity to minimum.
7. Adjust TRIGGER LEVEL/SENS control in a clockwise direction until a stable measurement is dispiayed.
8. Adjust GATE TIME setting for preferred resolution. Gate time is displayed by pressing the GATE TIME
key. Setting selection is entered from the keyboard, by pressing appropriate FUNCTION/DATA keys,
while GATE TIME key is enabled (LED ON). Be sure to press GATE TIME key again to store selected
setting in memory, and return to frequency measurement mode. Refer to GATE TIME/DELAY,
paragraph 3-107.
9. To manually adjust TRIGGER LEVEL, turn AUTO TRIG off (LED OFF), and press SENS key to TRIGGER
LEVEL position (LED OFF). Adjust TRIGGER LEVEL/SENS control to optimum trigger point, usually
midrange over which trigger light flashes. NOTE, when AUTO TRIG is off, appropriate attenuation
must be selected manually> and sensitivity is set to maximum.
PRESET AND LOCKOUT CONDITIONS
Lockout conditions during FREQ A,
Preset conditions on initial selection of FREQ A, FREQ B:
fREQ B mode:
EQUIVALENT EQUIVALENT
MODE SETTING
HP-IB COMMAND SETTING I HP-IB COMMAND
SINGLE CYCLE OFF GSO no lockout
100-GATE AVERAGE OFF GVO no lockout
EXT ARM SELECT OFF XA2, X02 no lockout
MATH DISABLE I ON MD1 no lockout
Figure 3-46. Frequency Measurements
3-52
HP 5334A1B
_INPUTC_ ". INPUT C ----MIl

~
©~'
SENSITIVITY
"
&
,,"x
500
...
IN
~ -'-
90-130041:1:
HP 5334A HP 53348
Make sure the amplitude of the signal does not exceed the
1V rms dynamic range.
NOTE
amplitude on input signals, refer to TabJel-1.
2. Connect signal to INPUT C jack.
3. Press FREQ C function key.
4. For S334A oniy - Set INPUT C SENSITIVITY control to minimum, fully ccw. Slowly rotate the control in a
clockwise direction until the GATE light turns on.
5. Adjust GATE TIME setting for preferred resolution. Gate time is displayed by pressing the GATE TIME key.
Setting selection is entered from the keyboard, by pressing appropriate FUNCTION/DATA keys, while GATE
TIME key is enabled (LED ON). Be sure to press GATE TIME key again to store selected setting in memory, and
return to frequency measurement mode. Refer to GATE TIME/DELAY, paragraph 3-107.
Preset conditions on initial selection of FREQ C: lockout conditions during fREQ C mode:
MODE EQUIVALENT SETTING EQUIVALENT
SETTING
I HP-IB COMMAND HP-IB COMMAND
MATH DISABLE
AUTO TRIG
ON
OFF I MDl
AUO ON
no lockout
I AUl
Figure 3-47. Frequency C Measurements
3-53
riP 5334A/B
NOTE
For specifications concerning bandwidth, accuracy, and amplitude on input signals, refer to Table 1~1.
2. Press COM A key to (SEPARATE) position (LED OFF).
3. Connect signal to INPUT A jack.
4. Press PERIOD A function key.
5. Set AC/(DC), SOl1 V(lMl1), and SLOPE keys to appropriate positions.
6. Press SENS key to SENSITIVITY position (LED ON); rotate TRIGGER LEVEL/SENS control fully ccw. This sets the
trigger level at 0 volts (nominally) and sensitivity to minimum.
7. Adjust TRIGGER LEVEL/SENS control in a clockwise direction until a stable measurement is displayed.
8. Adjust GATE TIME setting for preferred resolution. Gate time is displayed by pressing the GATE TIrE key.
Setting selection is entered from the keyboard, by pressing appropriate FUNCTION/DATA keys, whi e GATE
I"
return to period measurement mode. Refer to GATE TIME/DELAY, paragraph 3-107.
9. To manually adjust TRIGGER LEVEL, turn AUTO TRIG off (LED OFF), and press SENS key to (TRIGGER LEVEL)
position (LED OFF). Adjust TRIGGER LEVELISENS control to optimum trigger point, usually midrange over
which trigger light flashes. NOTE, when AUTO TRIG is off, appropriate ATTN must be selected manually.
PRESET AND LOCKOUT CONDITIONS ,
Preset conditions on initial selection of PERIOD A: Lockout conditions during PERIOD A mode:
MODE SETTING
HP-IB COMMAND
SETTING
I HP-IB COMMAND
MATH DISABLE ON MOl no lockout
Figure 3-48. Period Measurements
. 3-54
HP 5334A!B
5334A UNIVERSAL COUNTER >l£"ltTT .PACICUID
~El)El)
•
.. G~~ ~ ~
GGG
eD~=1ID
NOTE
2. If Start and Stop signals are from separate sources, connect Start signal to INPUT A jack, Stop signal to INPUT B
jack, and press COM A key to (SEPARATE) position (LED Off). If Start and Stop signals are from a common
source, connect signal to INPUT A jack, and press COM A key to COMMON position (LED ON).
3. Press T.I. A-B function key, and press AUTO TRIG off.
4. Press AC/(DC), SOl1 Z/ilMl1), SLOPE, and Xl0 ATTN keys to appropriate positions.
NOTE
When the COM A key is in COMMON (LED ON), only the A
CHANNEL AC/(DC), and 50 Z/(lM ) keys are effective.
However, Xl0(Xl) ATTN, SLOPE, and TRIGGER LEVEL/SENS
controls operate independently.
5. Press SENS key to (TRIGGER LEVEL) position (LED Off). This sets the sensitivity to maximum, and allows variable
selection of trigger levels.
6. Adjust TRIGGER LEVEL/SENS controls for optimum triggering, usually midrange over which trigger lights flash.
Use READ LEVELS to adjust for specific trigger level voltages.
7. Adjust GATE TIME setting for preferred sample rate. Gate time is displayed by pressing the GATE TIME key.
Setting selection is entered irom the keyboard, by pressing appropriate fUNCTION/DATA keys, while GATE
return to time interval measurement mode. Refer to GATE TIME/DELAY, paragraph 3-107.
1 NOTE
The first measurement is not displayed until the gate time
-1 delay has elapsed.
Lockout conditions during TIME
Preset conditions on initial selection ot T.I. A-II: INTERVAL mode:
MODE SETTING
HP-lil COMMAND
SETTING
I HP-IB COMMAND
SINGLE CYCLE Off GSO no lockout
100-GATE AVERAGE Off GVO no lockout
EXT ARM SELECT Off XA2, X02 no lockout
MATH DISABLE ON I MOl no lockout
Figure 3-49. Time Interval Measurements
3-55
HP 5334AiB
Operation and Programming "
~5334A UNIVERSAL COUNTER H£WI.£T T. ~.CI(.RD

_. _. _. - - =z©)o_ ~,-
_. iG rG ,-(G)~©~~(G) (G)(G).- (G) ,---(G) (G) ~lt!f

V
J.IiJ/fliliJli1fl.'-jJ'HiliJ .... ~
.,11 rG
.... ... _.., rG G_. ~
,,- .~- ,I."" ••
~
_
.
~10 ,l.TIM
- .- .- -_. - .-
>flO
UIN TUl: ..,...
OF'$···.··.K £NTR'l' J"IlE:lltT ...........~.
,m
..l!dl-
- - _.-
• lIot.TlO .... ~. ~- •
...
[jJ, (G) (G) (G)
.-- (G) (G) rG G,.. G !ltl (G) (G) (G) (G) (G)
. .....
~
- 'IIkll'l' = .-
BEl O(G}=8 -.~~-
-~
- ~- .~~-
.-
(G) (G)
"=' . - ~
- -
-~
NOTE
I For specifications concerning bandwidth, accuracy, and
1. Press POWER switch to ON position,
2. If Start and Stop signals are from separate sources, connect Start signal to INPUT A jack, Stop signal to INPUT B
jack, and press COM A key to (SEPARATE) position (LED OFF). If Start and Stop signals are from a common
source, connect signal to INPUT A jack, and press COM A key to COMMON position (LED ON).
3. Press T.!. A-B (DELAY) function key, and press AUTO TRIG off.
4. Press AC/(DC), SOil Z/(1Milj, SLOPE, and X10 AnN keys to appropriate positions.
NOTE
When the COM A key is in COMMON (LED ON),onlytheA
CHANNEL AC/(DCj, and SOil Z/(1Mil) keys are effective.
However, X10(X1) ATTN, SLOPE, and TRIGGER LEVELISENS
5. Press SENS key to (TRIGGER LEVEL) position (LED OFF). Thissets the sensitivity to maximum, and allows variable
selection of trigger levels. 1:"""""
6. Adjust TRIGGER LEVELISENS controls for optimum triggering, usually midrange over which trigger lights flash.
~.
Use READ LEVELS to adjust for specific trigger level voltages.
7. Adjust GATE TIME/(DELAY) setting for preferred delay time between Start on Channel A, and enabling of the
Stop signal on Channel B. Potential Stop events are ignored during the specified delay. Delay time is dispiayed
by pressing GATE TIME/(DELAY) key. Setting selection is entered from the keyboard, by pressing appropriate
FUNCTION/DATA keys, while GATE TlME/(DELAY) key is enabled (LED ON), Be sure to press GATE
TIME/(DElAY) key again to store selected setting in memory, and return to time interval delay, measurement
mode. Refer to GATE TIME/DELAY, paragraph 3-107,
NOTE
delay has elapsed,
PRESH ANO LOCKOUT CONDITIONS
Lockout conditions during TIME
Preset conditions on initial selection of T.I. A-B (DELAY):
INTERVAL DELAY mode:
MODE SETTING SETTING
HP-18 COMMAND HP-18 COMMAND
MATH DISABLE ON MD1 no lockout
I
Figure 3-50. Time Interval Delay Measurements
3-56
HP 5334A1B
!ijl5334A UNIVERSAL COUNTER H£\oILCTT. f" A(:K,t,'HI
--
GIGI
--
GIGI
.~
NOTE
2. If Start and Stop signals are from seperate sources, connect Start signal to INPUT A jack, Stop signal to INPUT B
jack, and press COM A key to (SEPARATE) position (LED OFF), If Start and Stop signals are from a common
source, connect signal to INPUT A jack, and press COM A key to COMMON position (LED ON),
3, Press TJ, A-B function key, and press AUTO TRIG ofI,
4, Press AU(DC), SOil Z/(1Mil), SLOPE, and X10 ATTN keys to appropriate positions,
NOTE
When the COM A key is in COMMON (LEDON),onlythe A
CHANNEL A AC/(DCi, and SOil Z/(1Mil) keys are effective,
However, X10(X1) ATTN, SLOPE, and TRIGGER LEVELISENS
5, Press SENS key to (TRIGGER LEVEL) position (LED OFF), This sets the sensitivity to maximum, and allows variable
selection of trigger levels.
6, Adjust TRIGGER LEVEL/SENS controls for optimum triggering, usually midrange over which trigger lights flash,
Use READ LEVELS to adjust for specific trigger level voltages,
[ 7, Adjust GATE TIME setting for preferred sample rate, Gate time is displayed by pressing the GATE TIME key,
TIME key is enabled (LED ON), Be sure to press GATE TIME key again to store selected setting in memory, and
I return to time interval measurement mode, Refer to GATE TIME/DELAY, paragraph 3-107,
8, Press 100-GATE AVERAGE key,
I! NOTE
The first measurement is not displayed until the gate has
cycled 100 times. Actual time depends on the gate time
setting.
J PRESET AND LOCKOUT CONDITIONS

lockout conditions during TIME
Preset conditions on initial selection of I.1. 1\-0: INTERVAL mode:
HP-IB COMMAND I HP-IB COMMAND
SINGLE CYCLE OFF Gsa no lockout
1:100-GATE AVERAGE OFF GVO no lockout
1
Figure 3-51. Time Interval Averaging
3-57
HP 5334A1B
•
~5334A UNIVERSAL COUNTER IH;WU.:1 T. F' ,lCI(.UID
105 /23'-1
88
-8 8-
-
.- - , -
NOTE
amplitude on input signals, refer to Table 1~ 1.
3. Connect signals to INPUT A and INPUT B jacks. For ratio displays greater than 1, connect higherfrequency to
Channel A. Note, the S334A/B will display ratios of less than 1, but it is recommended that the higher frequency
be applied to Channel A.
4. Press RATIO AlB function key, and press AUTO TRIG off.
5. Press AC/(DC), 5011 Z/(1MI1), SLOPE, and X10/(X1) ATTN keys to appropriate positions.
6. Press SENS key to SENSITIVITY position (LED ON); rotate TRIGGER LEVEL/SENS controls fully ccw. This sets the
trigger level at 0 volts (nominaJly) and sensitivity to minimum.
7. Adjust TRIGGER LEVELISENS controls in a clockwise direction until a stable measurement is displayed.
8. Adjust GATE TIME setting for preferred resolution. Gate time is displayed by pressing the GATE TIME key.
return to ratio measurement mode. Refer ,to GATE TIME/DELAY, paragraph 3-107.
Preset conditions on initial selection of RATIO AlB: Lockout conditions during RATIO mode
il--------,------.,---=::-:::':":':"=:---+------,---::::-"'::~~=__i
MODE SETTING
EQUIVALENT I EQUIVALENT
HP-IB COMMAND SETTING HP-IB COMMAND
100-GATE AVERAGE OFF GVO no iockout
Figure 3-52. Ratio A/B Measurements
3-58
HP 5334A/B
1M 5334A UNIVERSAL _. _. _. - - .-
COUNTER i<(;WL£:TT. P ACICUID
,
2' 6 .• Cl
_. ~@~= ~
iG iG ,- _. ~@'t
,- ~
-~
iG iG ~ m m ~ ~ --
i
8JfEBffi7HI1
.... ... 3NI19 X
i·.·. ~
_.-
no •.",.
mm
,,~
=.~
~
_
.
·ors'<· :I'M; n; ~--
-
l...IHi.1UC omrt··PROIE:T 1ollfI4.•.••••
_ ..
--~- m m
•
_. ,_. -
.. r-'" ~_.
..n"' ...... •• _'fill.

.~-
~.
IQJm m m
-,- -- ,--
,- m m Cl Cl iG mm ~
" "
I
-""'" '!lIllfl'
mm G
=.' ":': ~
_.&~ n. ~~ &~ .I.

.- "='"
Gm~ ~-
• -• -~ :""'l':
•
NOTE
II NOTE
This mode will totalize EVENTS on Channel A for the elapsed
I
I
time between selection of TOT Start and TOT Stop, using the
front panel keys.
4. Press TOT START A function key, AUTO TRIG will automatically turn off.
5. Press AC/(DC), son Z/(lMil), SLOPE, and X10/(Xl) ATTN keys to appropriate positions.
6. Press SENS key to SENSITIVITY position (LED ON); rotate TRIGGER LEVEL/SENS control fully ccw. This sets the
trigger level at 0 volts (nominally) and sensitivity to minimum.
7. Adjust TRIGGER LEVEL/SENS control in a clockwise direction until Channel A trigger light begins to flash.
8. Press RESET to clear display.
9. Press TOT START A to start a totalize measurement; press TOT STOP A to stop totalizing. Repeat this procedure
to accumulate counts. Press RESET to dear display and enable a new measurement.
Preset conditions on initial selection of TOT START A: Lockout conditions during TOTALIZE mode:
I MODE SETTING
EQUIVALENT
SETTING
EQUIVALENT
HP-IB COMMAND , HP-IB COMMAND
SINGLE CYCLE OFF GSO ON GSl
100-GATE AVERAGE OFF GVO ON GVl
MATH DISABLE ON MDl OFF MDO
AUTO TRIG OFF AUO ON AUl
GATE TIME ENTRY controlled by TOT STOP A ON GA<n>
Figure 3-53. Totalize Measurements
3-59
HP 5334MB
~5334A UNIVERSAL COUNTER >IrWL ElT. P. CIo:,lflD
so
NOTE
1, Press POWER switch to ON position.
4. Press PULSE WIDTH A function key, AUTO TRIG will automatically turn on.
5. Press AC/(DC), and SOfl Z/(lMfl) keys to appropriate positions.
6. Press Channei A SLOPE key for positive (LED OFF), or negative (LED ON) pulse measurements.
return to pulse width measurement mode. Refer to GATE TIME/DELAY, paragraph 3-107.
NOTE
deiay has elapsed. r
JJ

Lockout conditions during PULSE
Preset conditions on initial selection of PULSE WIDTH A:
WIDTH mode:
MODE SETIING SETTING HP-IB COMMAND
HP-IB COMMAND
I SINGLE CYCLE OFF GSO no lockout
i 100-GATE AVERAGE
EXT ARM SELECT
OFF
OFF
GVO
XA2, X02
no lockout
no lockout
MATH DISABLE ON MDl no lockout
AUTO'TRIG ON I AUl OFF AUO
Xl0 ATTN controlled by AUTO TRIG ON AX1, BXl
OFF AXO, BXO
SENS OFF SEO ON SEl
DACS (S334A only) OFF [ TRO ON TRl
II
Figure 3-54. Pulse Width Measurements
3-60
HP 5334A1B
: ~5334A UNIVERSAL COUNTER fl£WLE T1. P,lCKARO
-, _. _.
,
m_
- ~,-
~©S= ]f =Z©~t
.•... rG-, G,,- a fa fa fa- fa-, ,---8 m
... iG rG G
"'. ,"'af'
. . '3: • >s ,- fa
m., ~.- =,-
• /"'""'
-
-, ..- . . -- --
-
...11'1 .... , •
IldI fa .-- ,- - -
fa fa fa fa iG G fa fa fa fa ~ [:]
u_
rG
IldI
. -.~
-
-, '/lIdll' -~
.-
- ~";~. ~. t-:~.
~
.~,
OIKHn.l.
'm'
fa fa aID ofa=G
~
- - ...
.~
• •
I NOTE
I For specifications concerning bandwidth, accuracy, and

3. Press RISE/FALL TIME A function key, AUTO TRIG and COM A will automatically turn on.
4. Press CHANNEL A AC/(DC), and SOil Z/(lMill keys to appropriate positions.
5. Press Channel A SLOPE key: positive (LED OFF) for rise time measurements; negative (LED ONI for fall time
measurements.
return to rise/fall time measurement mode. Refer to GATE TIME/DELAY, paragraph 3-107.
NOTE
I delay has elapsed.
lockout conditions during RISE/fAll
Preset conditions on inital selection of RISE/FAll TIME A:
TIME mode:
HP-IB COMMAND HP-IB COMMAND
lOa-GATE AVERAGE OFF. GVO no lockout
AUTO TRIG ON AUl OFF AUO
I X10 ATTN controlled by AUTO TRIG ON AXO, BXl
OFF AXO, BXO
SENS OFF SEa ON SEl
DACS (S334A only) OFF TRO ON TR1
COM A ON Cal OFF coo
FILTER A OFF FlO ON FI1
Figure 3-55. Rise/Fall Time Measurements
3-61
HP 5334A!B
~5334A UNIVERSAL COUNTER ~["'L
.: EffiE8E8
_. _. _.-
r; l . P A C~ ARD r--
- _. -- ~.-
·•-51"7/ ~©S= (t:)) .- ~©'L ~8

• ...... -".;.' rGG~ --- -- ,~
_.- -_. (t:)) Ib:i1_. (t:)) (t:))- (t:)). ••(t:))

"'" AT>lI "~_A
,~
~.~
.-- •
8 ~ ,-.
~ M_
llO~lO _"'II
~ Ib:i1 (t:)) Ib:i1 (t:)) 8

"'-
.IQJ
~
-
!Ql
~.
1
'tlIOff - .-8 (t:))(t:))- (t:))(t:))- EffiEffiBSJ

~
-_. .. - _.4>_~.
.-
..
~
-~
...-.. ~. &>G
'
""'"
. - -- E8G8~ - - ~~ .I.
HP 5334A ONLY
I"-"DVM_
!
'1=
+©J'
©~, ,j,
NOTE
I, For specifications concerning bandwidth, accuracy, and
HP 5334A ONLY

2. Connect signal to DVM INPUT jacks.
3. Press DVM function key, AUTO TRIG will automatically turn off.
4. GATE TIME is internally set at 50 ms, and cannot be set via the front panel.
Preset conditions on initial selection of DVM: Lockout conditions during DVM mode:
MODE SETTING
EQUIVALENT
HP-IB COMMAND
SETTING I EQUIVALENT
HP-IB COMMAND
iSINGLE CYCLE OFF GSO no lockout
EXT ARM SELECT disabled in DVM mode ON XA1-XA3,
MATH DISABLE ON MDl

OFF I
no lockout
X01-X03
AUTO TRIG
GATE TIME ENTRY
ON I AUO
(50 ms) controlled by DVM
ON
ON
AU1
GA<n>
1
I
Figure 3-56. (DVM) Voltage Measurements (5334A Only)
3-62
HP S334A!B
! ~5334A UNIVERSAL COUNTER I<E"I.E""!,. P .l.CIC",RO
.~
_. _. _. - -
lfJ3Bf IllIll!] G GG ~©S= dll1ff
,- _. =Z©'L
•••
E~Je~
,-
. _. . 8 8... 8 =-
~~-
,-
><10 ATnl
--8 8
~
_
.
.... ~T11I
"" 'iT> 8
-
)"" ."
• " -~ _~
m m
~_
• •
.~-
IQl
-""'" -,-
IQl 8 8 8 8 8 G GG 8 8 8 8 8 ~
'tid!l' - ,--
~
-- -
.- 8- 8- ri§ [Ji§~ _.~"'.. ~. ~
-~
~-
.. ,'f:.- ~.
~
. - ... :..":.."'~ ....

-
NOTE
2, Press COM A key to (SEPARATE) position (LED OFF),
3, Connect signal to INPUT A and/or INPUT B jack.
4. Press desired function key.
5. Press AC/(DC), SOD Z/(lMD), and SLOPE keys to appropriate positions.
6. Adjust TRIGGER LEVELISENS control within range over which trigger light flashes, if desired. NOTE, when
AUTO TRIG is off, appropriate attenuation must be selected manually.
7. Adjust GATE TIME setting, if required. Gate time is dispiayed by pressing GATE TIME key. Setting selection is
entered from the keyboard, by pressing appropriate FUNCTION/DATA keys, while GATE TIME key is enabled
I B.
(LED ON). Be sure to press GATE TIME key again to store selected setting in memory, and return to frequency
measurement mode. Refer to GATE TIME/DELAY, paragraph 3-107.
Press READ LEVELS key. Readjust TRIGGER LEVEL/SENS control to specific voltage level, according to
I measurement application.
LocKout conditions during TRIGGER
Preset conditions on initial selection of TRIGGER LEVELS:
LEVELS mode:
HP-IB COMMAND HP-IB COMMAND
SiNGLE CYCLE OFF GSO no lockout
EXT ARM SELECT disabled in TRIG LEVELS ON XA1-XA3
OFF X01-X03
MATH DISABLE ON MDl ON MDO
AUTO TRIG OFF I AUO ON AUl
GATE TIME ENTRY disabled in TRIG LEVELS ON GA<n>
Figure 3-57, Trigger Level Measurements
3-63
HP 5334A1B
_. -. _.-
I
: iAiJl5334A UNIVERSAL COUNTER IH:Wt.t:TT." ACK"RO
..~ GGG ~'
-
O(@!:
,- m-m --
,-
,- ~©!O-
.... ••"".. ,""'" ¥ <'lr•• .' _.- -
~~~ Sl Sl Sl
.~- '10."'" nl.0DI" '
a- --m Sl-, ••" ..TTII
..!bl-
, ~-
-,©l-
"'10 ......
mm
.~. N' -~. ~
Sl m Sl
-- - SlSl- SlSl- GGG S Sl Sl Sl
I-
I -. 'Ilill'l' -~
.- ~
~~. -~
'M.
-
I .- ~
Gom~
II I~~· - ~.... -
.~
•
4>~
~"i': .l.
NOTE
amplitude on input signals, refer to Table 1-1,
I 2- Press COM A key to (SEPARATE) position (LED OFF),
, 3,
4,
Connect signal to INPUT A jack,
Press FREQ A function key,
i S, Press AC/(DC). SOD Z/(1MO), and SLOPE A key to appropriate positions,
I
I 6, Adjust GATE TIME setting, if required, Gate time is displayed by pressing the GATETIME key, Setting selection is
(LED ON), Be sure to press GATE TIME key again to store selected setting in memory, and return to frequency
I 7,
measurement mode, Refer to GATE TIME/DELAY, paragraph 3-107.
Press READ LEVELS key two times, Upper and lower peak levels will be displayed.
I Preset conditions on initial selection of PEAK LEVELS:

Lockout conditions during PEAK
LEVELS mode:
I MODE SETTING
EQUIVALENT
HP-IB COMMAND
SETTING
EQUIVALENT
HP-IB COMMAND
100-GATE AVERAGE Off GVO ON GV1
EXT ARM SELECT disabled in PEAK LEVELS ON XA1-XA3
OFF X01-X03
MATH DISABLE
AUTO TRIG
X10 ATTN
ON
ON I MD1
AU1
controlled by AUTO TRIG
ON
OFF
ON
MDO
AUO
AX1, BX1
OFF AXO, BXO
SENS Off SEO ON SE1
DACS (S334A only)
GATE TIME ENTRY
OFF I TRO
disabled in PEAK LEVELS
ON
ON
TR1
GA<n>
I
I
1.
•
Figure 3-58. Channel A, Peak Voltage Measurements
3-64
HP 5334A1B
I ~5334A UNIVERSAL COUNTER _. _. _. - "8 =Z©'t

_
H£WL£'rT·".CU,RO
tkili .: ~ .~ ~©F: Gl
,- ~
~- ~-
._-l!dI
•
1i': . .';j'/
~
.' E8E8_. ~-_. ---Gl Gl.. --Gl- (§=-- --Gl .,Gl
,,~
~ ~
no onto rll._.
•
".., _'tTl<
Gl Gl ~ ~ re S Gl Gl Gl Gl Gl
..no..,.
i - -,-
l!dI Gl Gl Gl
'rlIdfi' .~
~
.-
,-~
== "- ~ ~1_0l.l.
Gl Gl ~D8~ .~~~ =' ~~

,,- -
~
..."
•" • ...
:x~~. -- -
NOTE
For ,specifications concerning bandwidth, accuracy, and
I 1.
Press POWER switch to ON position.
3. Connect signal to INPUT B jack.
4. Press FREQ B function key.
5. Press AC/(DC), SOil Z/(1Mil), and SLOPE B key to appropriate positions.
6. Adjust GATE TIME setting, if required. Gate time is displayed by pressing the GATE TIME key. Setting selection is
(LED ON). Be sure to press GATE TIME key again to store selected setting in memory, and return to frequency
measurement mode. Reier to GATE TIME/DELAY, paragraph 3-107.
7. Press READ LEVELS key three times. Upper and lower peak levels will be displayed.
Lockout conditions during PEAK
Preset conditions on initial selection of PEAK LEVELS:
LEVELS mode:
MODE SEITING SEITING
HP-Ill COMMAND HP-IB COMMAND
EXT ARM SELECT disabled in PEAK LEVELS ON XA1-XA3
OFF X01-X03
MATH DISABLE ON MD1 OFF MDO
AUTO TRIG ON I AU1 OFF AUO
X10 AnN controlled by AUTO TRIG ON AX1, BX1
OFF AXO, BXO
SENS OFF SEO ON SE1
DACS (5334A only) OFF I TRO ON TR1
GATE TIME ENTRY disabled in PEAK LEVELS ON GA<n>
Figure 3-59. Channel B, Peak Voltage Measurements
3-65
HP 53341'./8
~5334A UNIVERSAL COUNTER H[\IILETT.f'.CW.Jt.RO
,
-,
_. _. -.- - ,.- ~
5!l?7lfl?7l!i
... .
•••••
f';
fGll@)l@) ,-~©5: m8'
- ~©'t
,---
_.- - ~G~ ro ro_. ro.. 8 ro _.ro 'n._"
........ _ ">OJ,n",
"0 ''mI
""J' ."",
-
~ '
A._• -~ ._.
_. ro ro- ro
Ibil ,_. - 8 ro ro ro ro ro
ro- ro- fGll@)l@) .~- ....... " ~-
"
Ibil
.
-...... - 'Ie
= ~
._~
-- l@) BroWS ._.-"'-~. .-. ~. ~~.

.ro- ro
~ .~.
• ""
/IIIII GAT£ "'1
NOTE
For specifications concerning range, and accuracy, on gate time
settings, refer to Table 1-7.
2. Press GATE TIME/DELAY key to ON position; current gate time setting will be displayed, as shown above; ENTRY light
will flash, indicating counter is in data entry mode.
3. Press appropriate fUNCTION/DATA keys Idigits and special functions are labeled to the left of each key).
NOTE
Entry may be made in decimal form, scientific, or engineering
notation.
4. Press GATE TIME/DELAY key to OfF position; selected setting will be stored.
Figure 3-60. Gate Time/Delay Setting t
3-66
HP 5334A1B
3-260. REMOTE PROGRAMMING VIA HP-IB

3-261. The HP 5334A/B Universal Counter is compatible with the Hewlett-Packard Interface Bus
(HP-IB). Remote programming is installed as standard equipment and allows the instrument to
respond to remote control instructions and output measurement data via the HP-IB. At the
simpiest level, the HP 5334A/B can output data in the taik only mode to other devices such as a
controller or printer. In more sophisticated systems, a computing or other type of controller can
remotely program the HP 5334A/B to perform a specific type of measurement, trigger the
measurement, and collect the results.
NOTE
HP-IB is Hewlett-Packard's implementation of IEEE Std. 488-1978,

Standard Digital Interface for Programming Instrumentation,
and ANSI Standard MC 1.1.
3-262. To remotely program the counter efficiently, the operator must be familiar with the
selected controller, the configured interface, and the local operation and functional capabilities
of the HP 5334A1B. Typical controllers for the HP-IB are the HP 9825A/B, HP 9835A, HP 9816A,
HP9845A, HP 9000 series 200 and 300, HP 1000, or HP 85A1B. The following HP manuals should
provide useful background information:
Hewlett-Packard 85 Owner's Manual and Programming Guide

Hewlett-Packard 9825A Operating and Programming Reference Manual
Hewlett-Packard 9825A I/O Control Reference Manual
Hewlett-Packard 9825B Manual Kit
Hewlett-Packard 9826A BASIC Manual
Hewlett-Packard 9835A/B Operating and Programming Manual
Hewlett-Packard 9845A Operating and Programming Guide
Condensed Description of the Hewlett-Packard Interface Bus
Tutorial Description of the Hewlett-Packard Interface Bus
Hewlett-Packard Series 200 Basic InterfaCing Techniques
3-263. HP-IB Description

3-264. The Hewlett-Packard Interface Bus (HP-IB) is a high speed parallel interface bus. All
devices on the bus are capable of being addressed at one time. However, only one device may
respond at a time. The controller is used to command a specific device to respond, and maintain
the flow of data and interface functions.
3-265. The HP-IB system uses a party-line structure (devices share signal lines). A maximu m of 15
devices may be connected in an HP-IB system, in virtually any configuration desired. There must
be an uninterrupted path to every device operating on the bus.
3-266. INTERFACE SYSTEM TERMS
3-267. The following paragraphs define the terms and concepts used to describe HP-IB system
operations.
a. Address: Each device on the interface is assigned an address. The address is used to
specify which device will receive information or send information.
3-67
HP 5334A!B
b. Byte: A byte is a unit of information consisting of eight binary digits called bits.
c. Device: Any instrument or unit that is HP-IB compatible is called a device.

I
0·'·
d. Device Independent Command: A command predefined by the interface standard to

have a specified bit pattern and resuiting action.
e. Device Dependent Command: A command that is specific to a particuiar instrument or

. I
family of instruments, which is not predefined by the interface standard. Device

dependent commands are usually sent as ASCII strings of characters.
f. Polling: Polling is a process typically used by a controller to locate a device that has
requested service from the controller. There are two types of polling, Serial Poll and
Parallel Poll:
1. Serial Poll. When the controller executes a serial poll, the addressed device sends
one byte of operational information called a status byte. If more than one device
in the interface is capable of requesting service, each device on the interface
must be serial polled until the device that requested service is located.
2. Parallel Poll. The HP 5334A/B does not have parallel poll capability.
~I
;
3-268. MAIOR INTERfACE fUNCTIONS
3-269. Each device on the interface may have one or more of the following major device
capabilities: Controller, Talker, or Listener. The controller has the responsibility of controlling
interface activity, and must be equipped with the proper interface module. Controllers transmit
all device independent commands to other devices in the interface and usually have Talker and
Listener capabilities. Only one device on the interface may be the active controller at anyone
time. The HP 5334A/B Universal Counter had no controller capabilities.
3-270. Talkers are devices that have the ability to send data or device dependent commands
through the interface. Note that a Talker will not actually send data or information until the
appropriate command is sent by the controller. The HP 5334A/B Universal Counter has Talker
capabilities. When the HP 5334A/B is talking on the interface, or is addressed to talk, the TLK
annunciator will turn on. In speciai situations, a device may be classified as a Talk-Only device,
and send information to Listen-Only devices. Such a system would have no controller. For
example, the counter can be configured to TALK ONLY and send measurement results toa printer
(TALK ONLY Address is 50).
3-271. Listeners are devices with the capability to receive information over the interface. When
the HP 5334A/B is "listening", or addressed to listen, the LSN annunciatorturns on. Listeners must
also be enabled by the controller to receive data or information.
3-272. Interface Capabilities

3-273. The capability of a device connected to the bus is specified by its interface functions.
These functions provide the means for a device to receive, process, and send messages over the
bus. Table 3-5 lists the HP 5334A/B interface functions using the terminology of the IEEE 488-1978
standard.
3-274. Device independent commands are standardized and are the same in all instruments.
Therefore, the functions these commands perform can be listed on the instrument in a
3-68
HP 5334A1B
Table 3-5. HP 5334A/B HP-IB Interface Functions
INTERFACE FUNCTION
INTERFACE FUNCTION OESCRIPTION
SUBSET IDENTIFIER
SH1 Complete source handshake capability.

AH1 Complete acceptor handshake capability.
T5 Talker ,basic talker, serial poll, has talk only mode, will
unaddress talk if addressed listenl.
TEO No extended talker capability.
L4 listener (basic listener, no listen only mode, will unaddress
listen if addressed to talk).
LEO No extended listener capability.
SR1 FuJI service request capability.
RL1 Complete remote/local capability.
PPO No parallel poll capability.
DC1 Full device clear capability.
DT1 Full device trigger capability.
CO No controller capability.
E2 Tri-state Drivers.
standardized manner. This is known as the capability label. The label is located above the rear
panel HP-IB connector, and lists the functions as follows:
sH1, AH1, T5, (TEO), L4, (LEO), sR1, RL1, PPO, DC1, DT1, CO, E2
3-275. The number following the interface function code in Table 3-5 indicates the particular
capability of that function as listed in Appendix C of IEEE Standard 488-1978, and is described
briefly in Table 3-6, HP 5334A/B Interface Capabilities.
3-276. Nearly all controls on the HP 5334A/B can be programmed remotely, and data from the
measurements can be sent to other devices through the HP-IB. The HP 5334A/B operates as both a
talker and a listener, as listed in Table 3-7. The HP 5334A/B output format is the same regardless of
the mode (talk only/addressable). The following paragraphs describe the basic programming
capability of the HP 5334A/B Universal Counter.
TALK: The HP 5334A/B can be addressed to Talk by a controller or by

entering the TALK ONLY address, 50. When addressed as a Talker, the
HP 5334A/B will send data to other devices on the bus. This data is the
result of the measurement, or the next measurement, depending on
the fu nction selected. Also sends calibration data, error messages, etc.
LISTEN: When addressed as a Listener, the instrument will accept any number
of commands from a controller on the bus. These commands are used
to program the instrument operation.
SERVICE REQUEST: sRQ will be generated on the interface whenever an enabled status bit
is set. The HP 5334A/B has the capability to request service
asynchronously from the controller in charge of the bus. See "sM"
command described in Service Request Mask, paragraph 3-304.
REMOTE/LOCAL: Normally the HP 5334A/B is under front panel (local) control. To

program the HP 5334A/B, it must be placed in Remote. Once in
Remote, programmable functions can not be affected by the front
panel controls. The RESET key may be used to manually return to local
control only if the Local Lockout (LLO) is off. If Local Lockout is on, the
RESET key is ignored, and the bus command LOCAL must be sent to
disable LLO.
3-69
HP 5334A/B
PARALLEL POLL: The HP 5334A/B does not respond to a parallei poll.
DEVICE CLEAR: When a universal or seiected device clear is received, the HP 5334A/B
clears most errors (if present), except errors 5.0 through 5.2; clears all
input buffers and resets the hardware for a new measurement. The
display LED's will flash momentarily. Failure messages are not cleared.
DEVICE TRIGGER: When a device trigger is received, the HP 5334A/B will start a new
measurement.
CONTROLLER: The HP 5334A/B cannot be used as a controller.
Table 3-6. HP 5334A/B Interface Capabilities
HP-18 DESCRIPTION
5Hl The instrument can generate messages.
AHl The instrument can interpret received messages.

T5 The instrument can function as a talker. In addition, it can operate as a Talker
Only instrument and can respond to serial poll. It will unlisten if addressed
as a talker.
TEO The instrument cannot function as an extended talker.
L4 I The instrument can function as a listener. In addition, it will untalk itself if

I addressed as a listener.
LEO The instrument cannot function as an extended listener.
5Rl The instrument can generate a service request.
I
I RLl The instrument can operate in both remote and local modes. In addition, it
can respond to local lockout.
I PPO The instrument does not support parallel poll.
OCl The instrument supports both the device clear (Del) and seleded device clear
I (SDC) commands.
OTl The instrument can be remotely triggered.
CO The instrument cannot function as a controller.
3-277. FRONT PANEL INTERFACE STATUS LED'S
3-278. The four Interface Status LED's, on the front panel, indicate the remote status of the HP
5334A/B. The REM LED lights to indicate the HP 5334A/B is under remote control. The TLK LED
lights to indicate the HP 5334A/B is addressed to talk (send datai. The LSN LED lights to indicate the .
Ii
HP 5334A/B is addressed to listen (receive commands). The SRQ LED lights to indicate a service
request condition exists (as determined by a set service request mask bit).
3-279. ADDRESS SELECTION
3-280. To use the HP 5334A/B in an HP-IB system, set the instrument to the desired address, as
listed in Table 3-7. The ADDRESSABLE mode is used whenever a calculator or other controller is
used with the system, and the HP 5334A/B functions as a talker and listener. The TALK ONLY mode l.
I
is used when the HP 5334A/B is operating under its own control (no controller on bus) and
outputting results to another device on the bus, such as a planer or a printer. In the TALK ONLY
mode the HP 5334A/B functions only in an output condition, and the receiving device must have
LISTEN ONLY capability.
3-70
HP 5334A1B
3-281. Refer to Table 3-7 for all possible address settings and the corresponding ASCII codes for
talk and listen, in the ADDRESSABLE mode and in the TALK ONLY mode. The HP 5334A1B is
factory set to address 03. To set or change the HP 5334A/B address proceed as follows.
3-282. SETTING THE HP 5334A HP-IB ADDRESS. To set the address, press the instrument front
panel keys in the order shown:
Press I RECALL! key. The 5334A will display "SEL r---':', the ENTRY light will flash,
(MATH/MEMORY group) and the RECALL key indicator will light. Referto paragraph 3-130
for further details on the RECALL key.
Press decimal point 1.1 key The current address will be displayed (e.g., Addr 03, shown in
(FUNCTION/DATA group) Figure 3-61.
Enter decimal address. Press appropriate digits (e.g., to select Address OS, press 15 [).
(FUNCTION/DATA group) The display will reflect the entry (i.e., Addr 05).
Press [STORE I key The address will be stored in memory, and the 5334A will return
(MATH/MEMORY group) to the previous mode of operation.
v
Hz
•
Figure 3-61. HP 5334A/B Address Entry Display
3-283. After selecting the HP 5334A address, be sure to press the front panel STORE key. The
address setting will then be read by the microprocessor and stored in memory. This action is
required whenever the address setting is changed.
3-284. SETTING THE HP 5334B HP-IB ADDRESS. Theaddress must be selected from the HP 5334B
HP-IB Address switch located on the rear panel, in the extreme lower right corner. To set the
address, e.g. to 07, press switches A1 through A3 in their "1" (up) position and leave switches A4
and A5 in their "0" (down) position. To verify that the address did change to 07, reinitialize the
5334B, by switching the instrument to STANDBY and then to ON. The display will reflectthe entry
(i.e., Addr 07).
3-285. The examples used in this section assume an address setting of 03. This number is
important when using a controller such as an HP 9826A, HP 9836A, HP 9845A, or HP 85 calculator
(since the calculator addresses the HP 5334A/B to talk or listen by using code 7031the03 being the
HP 5334A/B addressj). The ASCII characters forth is same address setting are "C" for a tal k address
and U#" for a listen address. These characters are used when the controller is an HP 9830A
calculator.
3-71
HP 5334A/B
Table 3-7. Address Selection

ASCII CODE CHARACTER
ADDRESS
SELECTED ADDRESS
USAGE MODE
LISTEN TALK
00 SP @ ADDRESSABLE
01 ! A ADDRESSABLE
02 " B ADDRESSABLE
03 # C ADDRESSABLE
04 $ D ADDRESSABLE
OS
06
I %
&
E
F
ADDRESSABLE
ADDRESSABLE
,
07 G ADDRESSABLE
08 ( ! H ADDRESSABLE
09 I ADDRESSABLE
10
,i ) ADDRESSABLE
11 + K , ADDRESSABLE
12 , L ADDRESSABLE
13 - M ADDRESSABLE
14 N ADDRESSABLE
1S / 0 ADDRESSABLE
16 B P ADDRESSABLE
17 1 Q ADDRESSABLE
18 2 R ADDRESSABLE
19 3 S ADDRESSABLE
20 4 T ADDRESSABLE
21 5 U ADDRESSABLE
22 6 V ADDRESSABLE
23 7 W ADDRESSABLE
24 8 X ADDRESSABLE
2S 9 Y ADDRESSABLE
26 : Z ADDRESSABLE
27 ; i ADDRESSABLE
28 < \ ADDRESSABLE
29 = ] ADDRESSABLE
30 > - ADDRESSABLE
50 N/A N/A TALK ONLY
3-286. INTERfACE COMMANDS

3-287. The commands the counter recognizes can be separated into two classes: device
dependent commands and device independent commands. Device independent commands are
defined by the interface standard document and are the same in all instruments. These commands
are identified by a three letter mnemonic such as GTL, which represents Go To Local. Device
independent commands are sent as encoded bytes on the interface and not as ASCII strings. Thus,
these commands cannot be sent using the OUTPUT statement on the HP 85. However, many
controllers do incorporate a command of the form SEND7;CMDnnn, where nnn is the decimal
equivalent to the bit pattern corresponding to a particular device independent command. A
detailed description of Device Independent Commands is given in paragraph 3-289.
3-288. Device dependent commands are unique to the instrument and are defined by the
instrument designer. They are normally sent to an instrument as ASCII strings. A detailed
description of Device Dependent Commands begins in paragraph 3-306.
3-289. Device Independent Commands

3-290. A list of supported device independent command mnemonics and the full name of each
command is provided in Table 3-8. The following paragraph include a description of the function
of each command.
3-72
HP 5334A/B
Table 3-8. Device Jndependent Commands
MNEMONICS COMMAND NAME

ATN Attention
DCl Device Clear
I EOI End or Identify
GET Group Execute Trigger
GTL Go To local
IFC Interface Clear
lADn listen Address n
lLO local Lockout
MlA My Listen Address
MTA My Talk Address
NRE Not Remote Enable
NUll Null
REN Remote Enable
SDC Selected Device Clear
SPD Serial Poll Disable
SPE Serial Poll Enable
TADn Talk Address n
UNl Unlisten
UNT Untalk
3-291. The instrument response to the device independent commands is listed below:
ATN Alerts the instrument that a device independent message is being sent, so the
instrument is ready to accept data on the data lines, and interpret it as commands.
DCl This command aborts the current measurement, aborts all pending send data
commands, resets the gate, and clears the display. It is similar to the front panel
RESET/LOCAL key, except that it only clears errors 1.0 through 4.4.
EOI If Attention is false and the instrument is a listener, EOI acts as a message delimiter,
and indicates the last data byte of a multibyte sequence.
GET If the instrument is addressed to listen, GET aborts the current measurement, and
triggers the next measurement immediately. It is equivalent to pressing the RESET
key or another function key.
GTL If the instrument is addressed to listen, GTl returns the instrument to (local) front
panel operation. local lockout is not cleared.
IFe The instru ment untalks and u niistens, initializes to an idle state. (No activity on the
bus.)
lADn If n matches the instrument address, the instrument becomes a listener.
LlO The front panel RESET/LOCAL key is disabled, if the instrument is in remote.
MLA MlA is the LADn, that matches the instrument address.
MTA MTA is the TADn, that matches the instrument address.
NRE The instrument returns to (local) front panel operation; local lockout is cleared.
NUL No effect when received by the instrument.
3-73
HP 5334A/B
REN The instrument enters the remote state, and is enabled to respond to interface
commands when addressed as a listener.
SOC If the instrument is a listener, will cause the same response as DCL.
SPD Terminates serial polling, and returns the instrument to a normal taiker state, to
output device dependent data rather than status information.
SPE Establishes serial polling, and enables the instrument to send the serial poll status
byte, when addressed to talk.
TADn If n matches the instrument address, the instrument becomes a talker.
UNL The instrument is unaddressed, and terminates listening. A single device cannot be
unaddressed without unaddressing all listeners.
UNT Unaddresses the instrument, if currently a taiker, and terminates talking. Addressing
another talker on the interface automatically unaddresses any current talker.
Table 3-9. Meta Messages

MESSAGE DESCRIPTION/RESPONSE
DATA A means to send device dependent command and receive
measurement data.
, IUNL, "'ITA, LADn, datal
TRIGGER I Will cause a new measurement to be triggered.
I IUNL, "'ITA, LADn, GETI
ClEAR Will clear the dispiay, starts new measurement, and clears errors 1.0
through 4.4.
I IUNL, "'ITA, LADn, SDCI
REMOTE Disables front panel keys (except for Reset/Local).
IREN, UNL, MTA, LADnl
LOCAL Enables the front panel keys.
IUNL, MTA, LADn, GTLI
LOCAL AND Enables the front panel keys and clears local lockout.
CLEAR
LOCKOUT
I LOCAL Disables the Reset/Local key when in remote.
LOCKOUT ILWI
SERVICE This command is ignored when received by the instrument. It will be sent
REQUEST by the instrument when an enabled service condition is present.
I STATUS Presents status information.
BYTE IUNL, MLA, TADn, SPE, data, SPD, UNTI
STATUS Not supported.
BIT
PASS CONTROL Not supported.
ABORT Terminates bus communications by unlistening and untalking all
instruments.
IIFCI
3-74
HP 5334A!B
3-292. Meta Messages

3-293. To simply the use of the HP-IB interface, Hewlett-Packard has developed what is called
the Meta Message concept. Rather than requiring the user to remember all the device
independent messages and their interactions, useful sequences of these commands have been
integrated into a single command on many of HP's controllers. For example, to clear the
instrument at address 03 using the device independent commands, it is necessary to send the
sequence ATN, UNL, MTA, LAD 03, SDC. The HP-85 command, CLEAR703, sends the same
sequence with no further user interaction. This greatly simplifies the use of the interface.
3-294. Many of the meta messages implemented on the HP-85 may be sent in either of two
forms, with addressing or without addressing. The form with addressing will normally address a
particular device to listen. For example, the command REMOTE7 will send a REN without making
any device a listener; while the command REMOTE703 will send REN, and then make device at
address 03 a listener. In the following tables, the form with addressing is shown.
3-295. Meta messages, their results in the HP 5334A/B, and the typical interface message
sequences corresponding to them, are listed in Table 3-9. The sequence are typical in that
different controllers may send different sequences, while still producing the same results.
3-296. Meta messages and the HP 9825, and HP-85 commands that correspond to them are listed
in Table 3-70. (Only the addressed form is shown for the commands that support both the
unaddressed and addressed forms.) The table assumes the instrument is set at address 03 and the
interface is set at select code 7.
Table 3-10. Meta Messages and Controller Commands

MESSAGE HP 9825 HP-85
DATA wrt 703; A$ OUTPUT 703; A$
red 703; A$ ENTER 703; A$
TRIGGER trg 703 TRIGGER 703
CLEAR elr 703 CLEAR 703
REMOTE rem 703 REMOTE 703
LOCAL lei 703 LOCAL 703
LOCAL/CLEAR lei 7 LOCAL 7
LOCKOUT
i LOCKOUT 110 7 LOCAL LOCKOUT 7
SERVICE rds (7)-A STATUS 7, 2; A
STATUS BYTE rds (703)-A A=SPOLL (703)
:t 3-297. Through meta messages, devices on the bus can exchange control and measurement
information. A detailed description of these messages, and the HP 5334A/B response to each
message, are prOVided in the following paragraphs.
3-298. Meta Message Response

DATA: The HP 5334A/B sends measurement data as defined by the device
dependent command received from the controller.
TRIGGER: Clears the HP 5334A/B display, and starts a new measurement.
CLEAR: Clears the HP 5334A/B display, and starts a new measurement. Clears
errors numbered 1.0 through 4.4, but does not clear errors 5.0X through
5.2 nor any failures.
3-75
HP 5334A1B
REMOTE: The HP 5334A/B goes into remote when it receives the REMOTE message
on the HP-IB. All front panel controls except the RESET/LOCAL key are
ignored. In REMOTE operation, the HP 5334A/B is programmed by the
controller via messages sent over the bus. Until changed via the bus, the
state of the HP 5334A/B remains as it was prior to receipt of the REMOTE
message.
LOCAL: Returns the HP 5334A/B to front panel control; retains state prior to
receipt of the LOCAL message.
Non
The HP 5334A/B does not respond to any device dependent
commands when in LOCAL operation.
LOCAL/CLEAR
LOCAL LOCKOUT: Returns the HP 5334A/B to front panel control following a LOCAL
LOCKOUT message. Otherwise, the state of the HP 5334A/B remains as it
was prior to receipt of the LCLL message.
LOCKOUT: Disables the HP 5334A1B RESET/LOCAL key. The HP 5334A1B remains in

remote operation until a LOCAL message is received on the bus. The
LOCAL LOCKOUT message can be used to maintain "absolute"
programmatic control of the instrument.
SERVICE REQUEST: This message is ignored when received by the instrument. The HP
5334A/B can send a SERVICE REQUEST message (SRQ) to the controller
under any or all of the following conditions, as defined by the Service
Request Mask. The Service Request Mask must be set prior to the
condition. All SRQ conditions can be masked off (disabled) by setting
SMO. (See SM Command, paragraph 3-304.)
1. Data Ready. A measurement has been completed and is available

for collection.
2. Error. An error condition exists and is displayed.
3. Local. The instrument is in local operation.
STATUS BYTE: The controller can read the HP 5334A/B STATUS BYTE at any time to
check selected operating conditions. The assignment of the bits of the HP
5334A1B STATUS BYTE are shown in Table 3-11.
ABORT: Terminates any HP-IB activity and returns control to the system
controller. Terminates all bus communications by unlistening and
. untalking all devices. Parameters remain as they were before the ABORT
message. Any partially entered HP-IB data message is aborted.
3-299. SRQ and Status Byte

3-300. The counter can send a service request (SRQ) to the controller to indicate the need for
attention, and can interrupt the current sequence of events. The Service Request Mask (SM
command) must be set prior to the condition. All SRQ conditions can be masked off (disabled) by
setting "SMO". If all SRQ conditions are masked off, none of the following conditions will
3-76
HP 5334A1B
generate an SRQ. Typically, SRQ indicates data is ready to transmit and/or an error condition
exists. The counter can send an SRQ to the controller under any, or all of the following conditions,
as defined by the Service Request Mask.
Data Ready. A measurement has been completed and is available for collection.
Error. An Error or Failure condition exists and is displayed.
Local. The instrument is in local operation.
3-301. In general, the controller can read the counter Status Byte at any time to check selected
operating conditions. During remote operation, you may selectively program the Service Request
Mask (SMn) to identify the conditions which you feel may require service or data collection.
3-302. Once SRQ has been sent, the controller can identify which condition or conditions
caused the Service Request. When the Status Byte is read, conditions that exist will be set to 1,
whether or not they were enabled as a condition to generate SRQ. For example; with the HP-85,
"A=SPOLL (703)" requests the eight-bit binary Status Byte, and sets the variable "A" equal to the
value of the Status Byte. Then, if the statement "DISP A" is executed the HP-8S will display the
Status Byte. The number returned will be a decimal equivalent to the sum of the different status
bits that have been set, as shown in Table 3-11. With the HP 9825A/B, "rds(703)-A" requests the
Status Byte, and "dsp A" sends the status to the HP 9825A/B display.
3-303. For example, the instrument sends a request for service (SRQ), and reading the Status
Byte returned a value of "81". This (64+16+1=81) signifies: the RQS FLAG is set, the instrument is
in local operation, and data is ready. The bits of the Status Byte are set regardless of the Service
Request Mask. However, if a bit is masked off, it will not generate an SRQ.
Table 3-11. HP 5334A/B5tatus Byte
07 D6 05 04 03 02 01 00
ALWAYS RQS NO LOCAL fAILURE ERROR ALWAYS DATA
0 FLAG OSC 0 READY
128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
3-3114. Service Request Mask

3-305. Upon receipt of the Service Request Mask Command (SMn Command), the instrument
will load the binary value of "n" into the service request mask register. The SRQ line/RQS bit will
be set true ONLY if a bit in the status byte becomes true, and the corresponding bit set in the
service request mask. Setting bit 6 (RQS) by itself (SM64), is equivalent to "SMO". Sending the
command "SMO" masks off (or disables) all SRQ conditions. To specify the service request mask,
send the SM command followed by a decimal number, representative of the binary sum of the bits
you want enabled. You may send any number between 0 and 255, although only five bits indicated
by (*) are actually used. The binary value of "n" is interpreted as follows:
BIT DEfiNITION WEIGHT

Bit 7 Always 0 128
Bit 6 RQS 64
Bit 5* No Oscillator 32
Bit 4* Instrument in Local 16
Bit 3* Failure Condition 8
Bit 2* Error Condition ,. 4
Bit 1 Always 0 2
Bit 0* Data Ready (see note below) 1
3-77
HP 5334A/B
For example, sending the command "SMB" will generate a service request ISRQ), and set Bit 6
(RQS), after an error or faiiure condition is generated, or when data is ready 18+4+1). The
condition or conditions that caused the service request may be determined by reading the Status
Byte. r
"
NOTE
To guarantee SRQ at the end of a measurement, use the WA1

command. Bit 0, Data Ready, may not be set at the completion of
a measurement, if the instrument is not addressed to talk, unless
the instrument is in the Wait to be Addressed mode (WA1).
3-306. Device Dependent Commands
3-307. The counter will accept command strings in either upper or lower case. Spaces, commas
and semicolons between commands are interpreted as command terminators. in addition, parity
bits are ignored. Depending upon the controller, this can help to speed up programming. The
following free format command statements will produce identical results:
OUTPUT 703; "FN1,AT1,FI1,GA2"

OUTPUT 703; "fn +1at1.00fi1;ga.2E1"
3-308. DEVICE COMMAND DEFINITIONS
3-309. A device command is a sequence of two or more ASCII-coded bytes, sent to the HP
5334A/B over the HP-I Bthat causes the counter to perform a specific function. Before discussing
the individual commands, they will be defined according to type in the following paragraphs:
a. NUMERIC commands: Type N; a sequence of two ASCII-coded bytes followed by a

sequence of bytes representing a free format decimal number and a terminator (see
paragraph 3-307). A termination may also be implied with the start of the next command.
Numeric entry is discussed in detailed in paragraph 3-310.
Equivalent numeric command examples:
OUTPUT 703; "MN12.3456"

OUTPUT 703; "MN+1.23456E+01"
OUTPUT 703; "MN1.23456E1"

Normalize = 12.3456
b. BINARY command: Type B; a sequence of two ASCII-coded bytes followed by either a 0

or a 1. The 0 indicates the selected functions is "OFF" or "FALSE", and the 1 indicates
"ON" or ((TRUE!!, The numeric input is processed in the same format as numeric
commands, except that the range of values accepted is only 0 and 1. i
•
Binary command examples:
OUTPUT 703;"WA1"
OUTPUT 703; "WA1.23"
True = 1
OUTPUT 703; "WAO"

OUTPUT 703;"WAO.1"
False = 0
3-78
HP 5334A1B
c. INTEGER commands: Type I; a sequence oi two ASCII-coded bytes iollowed by a

sequence oi bytes representing a decimal number and a terminator. For integer
commands, the range depends on the speciiic command. The number is accepted in iree
iormat and converted to an integer. An error is generated ii the number is negative, out oi
range, or if there is no number.
'; Equivalent integer command examples:
OUTPUT 703;"XA2"
OUTPUT 703;"XA2.89"
OUTPUT 703;"XAO.2E+1"
d. TERSE commands: Type T; a sequence oi two ASCII-coded bytes with no numeric

character iollowing them. These commands are executed immediately aiter the second
character is received, and do not require a terminator. For example, the characters iflN"
will cause the counter to INitialize all controi settings to the deiault status.
e. SPECIAL commands: Type I/O; a sequence oitwo ASCII-coded bytes that mayor may not
be iollowed by a sequence oi bytes representing a deiined value. For example; "SMn"
will set the Service Request Mask to number representing the sum oi the bits you want
enabled; the counter will respond to "ID" by sending the string "HP 5334A/B", iollowed
by CR/LF.
3-310. NUMERIC ENTRY
3-311. Numeric entry iollows the code and iormat guidelines oi the IEEE-728 standard ior type
NR3 numbers. It applies to the numeric portion oi any command that requires the entry oi a
number. This is a "iree iormat" input, with spaces allowed beiore a numeric character is entered,
however, spaces iollowing a numeric character are interpreted as command terminators. A
decimal point and an exponent are allowed, but not required. "Free iormat" entries may be made
'I in decimal, engineering or scientiiic notation. The maximum number oi digits is 12. Ii a decimal
point is entered and more than 12 digits are entered, the excess characters are ignored. Ii no
decimal point is entered, trying to enter more than 12 digits will produce an error. Numeric entry
is input in the following iormat:
<n spaces>lsign ]<j digits>I.<K digits>IEI sign ]<L digits>
where:
n = 0 to any number
j = 1 to '12
K = 0 to any number
L = 1 or 2 (with any number oi leading zeroes)
The iollowing command strings are permitted, and are equivalent:
OUTPUT 703; "IN,GA1.5,BS1,XA3"

OUTPUT 703; "lNGA+0015E-01BS1.0XAOO.0345E+2"
3-312. PROGRAMMING COMMANDS

3-313. All local iunctions are programmable with individual command codes via the interiace. In
general, all iunctions operate the same in remote as in local. The HP 5334A/B device commands
are described in the iollowing paragraphs, and listed in Table 3-12, HP 5334A/B Programming
Command Set. The individual commands are organized into groups ior ease oi description and
use.
3-79
HP 5334MB
3-314. Most of the alpha characters, used to represent each function in the command set, are
underlined on the front panel of the counter. For example, in the MATH/MEMORY group the
•
"M" for the group label, and the "D" for DISABLE are underlined; the alpha character set for
Math Disable is MD.
3-315. Command Group Descriptions

3-316. INPUT GROUP. Most commands in the input group are equivalent to pressing a key, or a
sequence of keys on the HP 5334A/B front panel, when the counter is in the local mode of
operation. The binary commands is in this group are equivalent to a single key stroke, and setthe
corresponding parameter to "ON" (1), or "OFF" (01. The numeric commands, AT and BT, require
a numeric entry that sets the corresponding trigger level to a specific voltage. The integer
commands, XA and XO, are equivalent to the local EXT ARM SELECT key sequence.
3-317. FUNCTION/DATA GROUP. All commands in the function/data group represent a

corresponding HP 5334A/B front panel key. All function (FNn or FUn) commands are integer
commands that require a numeric entry after the alpha characters. The "n" represents the
number equivalent to the function selected, as listed in Table 3-12. When a function command is
received it enables the corresponding measurement mode. To disable a measurement mode,
another function command must be sent.
3-318. GATE GROUP. Commands in the gate group are equivalent to pressing a key or a
sequence of keys, on the HP 5334A/B front panel, when the instrument is in the local mode. The
GS and GV commands, equivalent to a single key stroke, are binary commands that set the
corresponding parameter liON" (1)) or ((OFF" (0). Numeric commands} GA, require a numeric
entry that sets the gate time to a specified value.
3-319. MATH/MEMORY GROUP. Commands in the math/memory group are equivalent to

pressing a key or a sequence of keys, on the HP 5334 A/B front panel, in the local mode of
operation. The MD command, equivalent to a single keystroke, is a binary command that sets the
corresponding parameter "ON" (1), or "OFF" (0). Numeric commands, MN and MO, require a
numeric entry that sets the corresponding math operation to a specific value. Integer commands,
MR and MS, are equivalent to the local STORE and RECALL key sequences. (The MR and MS
commands are not valid for the HP 5334B.)
3-320. Miscellaneous and Special Functions

3-321. HS1: High Speed Output Mode On; high speed mode sends the HP 5334A1B
measurement data to the cou nter in binary form. The data is sent in 8 bytes, terminated by an EO I
with the last byte. In this mode the counter is capable of sending measurement data atthe rate of
150 measurements per second. When the HS1 command is sent, it places the HP 5334A/B in the
high speed output mode. The counter displays the message "FASt dAtA" while high speed
measurements are being taken. The high speed output format is discussed in detail in paragraph
3-344.
3-322. HSO (High Speed Output Mode Off): the HSO command takes the counter out of the high
speed output mode allows it to function in the normal remote state.
3-323. 10 (Device Identification): When the ID command is sent, the counter will identify itself
to the controller the next time the counter is addressed to talk. The string "HP 5334A/B" will be
sent, followed by a carriage return and a line feed. The counter will wait until the device ID is read
by the controller, then resume taking measurements.
3-324. IN (Initialize): The IN command causes the instrument to exit its current state and go to
the power-on initialized state. If the instrument is in error state, error conditions 1.0 thru 4.4 will
be cleared by the "IN" command, however, errors 5.0X through 5.2 and failures will not be
cleared.
3-80
HP 5334A/B
3-325. The initialized states are set as follows: All gate, math/memory, and input signal
conditioning will be OFF; the function will be FREQ A (FN1j, with AUTO TRIG (AU1) and
autoattenuation ON; gate time will be set at 300 milliseconds; math offset value will be set at +0,
normalize value at +1; the input A (AT) and input B(BT) trigger levels will be setat Ovolts, and the
internal trigger/sensitivity levels will be OFF (daCS OFF).
3-326. RE (Reset): The reset command clears the current measurement and restarts a new
measurement. However, unlike the RESETILOCAL key, the RE command does NOT clear errors
5.0X through 5.2, nor any failures.
3-327. SMn (Service Request Mask): Upon receipt of the Service Request Mask Command
(SM nj, the instrument will load the binary value of" nn into the service request mask register. The
"n" represents the binary sum of the bits (conditions) you want enabled. The SM command is
discussed in further detail in paragraph 3-304.
3-328. SMO (Service Request Mask Off): Sending the command "SMO" masks off (or disables) all
SRQ conditions. When this command is sent no condition will enable a service request.
'1 3-329. TC (Transmit Calibration Data): When the controller sends the TC command, the counter
sends a string of calibration data, preceded by a "C", and followed by a carriage return and a line
feed. The counter will wait until the calibration data is read, then resume taking measurements.
j'l
The output format, and the use of calibration data is discussed in paragraph 3-349.
3-330. TE (Transmit Error): When the transmit error command is received, the instrument will
send the number of the detected error to the controller. The TE command clears the Error bit (bit
2) in the counter's serial poll byte. It is recommended that "TE" be sent in a string by itself, not at
the end of another string. The counter will discontinue normal operation until the error message
is read. Note that reading the error code will not clear the error.
3-331. WA1 (Wait To Be Addressed Mode On): WA1 places the instrument in the Wait To Be
Addressed Mode. The wait to be addressed mode forces the instrument to suspend subsequent
measurements, and wait for the current measurement to be read by the controller. This mode is
especially useful when used with the service request. The instrument will make a measurement,
then alert the controller that data is ready by asserting SRQ when the measurement is completed.
This frees the controller to perform other functions while the measurement is being processed,
and ensures that the controller will know when the measurement is available.
3-332. WAO (Wait To Be Addressed Mode Off): WAG takes the instrument out of the wait to be
addressed mode, and allows it to function in the normal remote state. In the normal state,
-I measurements are made continuously, whether or not they are read by the controller.
3-81
HP 5334A!B
Table 3-12. HP 5334A/B Programming Command Set
COMMAND EQUIVALENT
MNEMONIC DESCRIPTION
GROUP KEY/CONTROL
INPUT AC AAO Set Input A Coupling to DC
AAl Set I nput A Coupli ng to AC
SLOPE ASO Set Input A Slope to positive
I ASl Set 1nput A Slope to negative
TRIGGER AT<num> Set Channel A Trigger Level <value>

LEVEL/SENS
AUTO TRIG AUO Set AUTO TRIG Off
AUl Set A UTa TRIG On
Xl0 ATTN AXO Set Input A Attenuation to Xl
AXl Set Input A Attenuation to X10
SOD. Z AZO Set Input A Impedance to 1M-ohm

AZl Set Input A Impedance to 50-ohm
AC BAO Set Input B Coupling to DC
BAl Set Input B Coupling to AC
SLOPE BSO Set Input B Slope to positive
BSl Set Input B Slope to negative
TRIGGER BT<num> Set Channel B Trigger level <value>
LEVELISENS
Xl0 ATTN BXO Set Input B Attenuation to Xl
BXl Set Input B Attenuation to Xl0
I SOD. Z BZO
BZl
Set Input B Impedance to 1M-ohm
Set Input B Impedance to 50-ohm
COM A COO Set COMMON inputs off
COl Set COMMON inputs on
I
100 kHz FlO Set Input A Filter off
FILTER A ! Fll Set Input A Filter on
SENS SEO Set Sensitivity Mode Off
SEl Set Sensitivity Mode On
dACS OFF iS334A) TRO Set Remote Trigger/Sensitivity Levels Off
dACS On iS334A) TRl Set Remote Trigger/Sensitivity Levels On
START ARM XAl Set External Start Arm Slope to positive

XA2 Set External Start Arm Off
XA3 Set External Start Arm Slope to negative
STOP ARM XOl Set External Stop Arm Slope to positive

X02 Set External Stop Arm Off
X03 Set External Stop Arm Slope to negative
FUNCTIONI FREQ A FNl Frequency A

DATA
FREQ B FN2 Frequency B
, FREQ C FN3 Frequency C
PERIOD A FN4 Period A
T.!. A-B FNS Time Interval A to B
T.!. A-B FN6 Time Interval A to B with delay

[DELAY]
RATIO AlB FN7 Ratio AlB
3-82
'It HP 5334A!B
'I Table 3-12, HP 5334A/B Programming Command Set (Continued)

COMMAND EQUIVALENT
MNEMONIC DESCRIPTION
GROUP I
KEY/CONTROL
FUNCTION/ TOT STOP A FN8 Totalize Stop A
DATA I
TOT START A i FN9 Totalize Start A
PULSE FN10 Pulse Width A

i WIDTH A
I
RISE/FALL FNll Rise/Fall Time A

TlMEA
I DVM
READ TRIG
FN12
FN13
Voltage Mode
Read A and B Channel Trigger Levels
II LEVElS
READ PEAKS A FN14 Read Channel A ± Peaks
'I
READ PEAKS B FN1S Read Channel B ± Peaks
FU1-FU15 SAME AS FNl through FN15
GATE GATE TIME GA<num> Set Gate Time <value>
[DELAY] Gate time range 15 0,001 to 99,9995,
.
:J I, SINGLE
CYCLE
GSO
GSl
Set Single Gate Cycle Off
Set Si ngle Gate Cycle On
I
100-GATE GVO Set 100-Gate Average Off
AVERAGE GVl Set 100-Gate Average On
MATH/ DISABLE MDO Set Math Disable Off
I, MEMORY
(5334A)
MOl Set Math Disable On
I
I NORMALIZE MN<num> Set Normalize <value>
i
I Value Range is ±1 E-l0 to ±9,999-999E+9
I (zero is disallowed)
OFFSET MO<num> Set Offset <value>

I Value Range is ±lE-l0 to ±9,999-999E+9
I (zero is allowed)
RECALL (5334A) MRO-MR9 Recall Setup from Register <0-9>
STORE (5334A) MSO-MS9 Store Setup into Register <0-9>
MISC AND none HSO High Speed Output Mode Off

SPECIAL HSl High Speed Output Mode On
I, FUNCTION
none 10 Device Identification
POWER-ON IN Initialize
none RE Reset
none SM<num> Set SRQ Mask (Refer to Status Byte)
none TC Transmit Calibration Data
none TE Transmit Error (Refer to Error Handing)
none WAO Wait To Be Addressed Mode Off

WAl Wait To Be Addressed Mode On
3-83
HP 5334A!B
]-333. Output Formats

3-334. Most HP 5334A/B measurements are output to the HP-IB in scientific notation, while the
HP 5334A/B display is given in engineering notation. The output data contains 19 characters which
are arranged in the following format:
Alpha character
Variable number of spaces iN spaces)
± sign
One digit
Decimal point
Variable number of digits (K digits)
E ± sign
Two exponent digits
Carriage return
Line feed
l i J % / o G % / o l % l o [ D J D J D J DIE I ± ~ CR/LF
/" /
I"
ALPHA
I
MEASUREMENT
I
EXPONENT
CHARACTER DATA FIELD 4 CHARACTERS
1 CHARACTER 14 CHARACTERS
I
<N SPACES>±<ONE oIGIT>'<K DIGITS>
The decimal point is omitted if it is the last character preceding the exponent "En in the output
string. The first digit will be zero only if the data output is zero. At times, the display may contain a
number which is equivalent to zero (such as OE-9). If this is the case, the HP-IB output will be:
X OE+OO<CR/LF>
where X is the alpha character for the type of measurement.
3-335. ALPHA CHARACTER. One of 12 single characters which generally specify the type of
measurement. It usually indicates the type of units. The alpha characters are:
F precedes Frequency measurements; units are Hz (Hertz)
S precedes Time measurements; units are S (Seconds)
V precedes Voltage measurements; units are V (Volts)
R precedes Ratio measurements; no units
T* precedes Totalize Stop measurements; no units
t* precedes Totalize Start measurements; no units
A precedes Channel A trigger level; units are V (Volts)
B precedes Channel B trigger level; units are V (Volts)
H precedes Channel A and B upper peak levels
3-84
HP 5334A1B
L precedes Channel A and B lower peak levels
o precedes measurements that overflow
C precedes calibration data; no units

-,
"
'See paragraph 3-342 for Totalize output.
3-336. MEASUREMENT DATA FIELD. The data field consists of a 14-character string. The number
begins with the sign, followed by the digits in descending order of significance. The number is
right-justified within the data field. To keep the number of characters consistent within the total
string, spaces are inserted preceding the sign (±).
••
3-337. EXPONENT. Preceded by an "E" and the sign (±), the exponent will always be two digits.
The format of the HP-IB output and the display may differ, since the HP-IB output is in scientific
notation and the display is in engineering notation.
I 3-338. TYPICAL OUTPUT STRINGS. The following string illustrates the typical output for a FREQ
A measurement of 458.341265 kHz. The output data is always followed by a (CR) carriage return,
and a (LF) line feed.
F(sp) (sp) (sp)+4.58341265E+05<CR/LF>
3-339. If there is an overflow (the measurement is incorrect), the following output is sent over
the HP-IB (unless the counter is in the High Speed Output mode, orthe measurements is in oneof
the "split display" modes):
0+9.99999999999E+99<CR/LF>
3-340. Three measurement modes have a "split display", and have a different output format that
is best illustrated by an example:
Trigger Levels A +2.30,B -2.00<CR/LF>

Peaks A, Peaks B H +40.4,L +2.1<CR/LF>
3-341. In the case of an overflow in Peaks A, or Peaks B (Trigger Levels cannot havean overflow),
the format will be:
O+9999999,0+9999999<CR/LF>
3-342. TOTALIZE OUTPUT. When data is output in the Totalize mode, the 'T' and the "t"
usually represent TOT Stop and TOT Start, respectively. The "t" indicates an interim count or
subtotal, and "T" indicates a final count. When totalizing is stopped (FN8),a final count is output.
Additional events in the input signal will not continue the count, unless totalizing is restarted with
the TOT Start command (FN9). An illustration of the totalize output is given in programming
examples, paragraph 3-359. Note, in the talk-only mode only the final count, 'T', is output.
3-343. If external arming is enabled, it is possible to stop counting in the TOT Start mode. or to
continue counting in the TOT Stop mode. When external arming is used. the TOT Stop command
may not stop the cou nt. The stop arm signal will generate the "T" count. Therefore. a final count
''T'' may be output while the cou nter is still in the TOT Start mode, and interim counts "t" may be
output in the TOT Stop mode.
3-85
HP 5334A/B
3-344. High Speed Output Data

3-345. When the HP 5334A/B makes frequency measurement during normal operation, the
counter's main gate opens synchronously with the input signal allowing the two internai MRC
registers to begin accumulating counts. The MRC Event and Time Registers count pulses from the
input signal and the internal time base (clock), respectively, during the time intervai thatthe gate
is open. During this same time interval, the interpolator circuitry determines where in relation to
the 100-nanosecond time base pulses the counter's gate actually opens and closes. For instance, if
the gate opens precisely between two 100-nanosecond pulses, the start interpolator will
determine that a 50-nanosecond adjustment is needed. A similar adjustment is made by the stop
interpolator for the gate closi ng.
3-346. At the end of the complete measurement, the data from both interpolators is combined
with the count in the MRC Time Register to calculate the precise gate time interval. The counter's
built-in microprocessor multiplies the number of accumulated clock pulses by the clock period
combined with the interpolator adjustments to get (TIME). Then, computes frequency by dividing
EVENTS/TIME, or computes period by dividing TIME/EVENTS. This computation is done
automatically by the arithmetic u nit of the microprocessor and the results are sent directly to the
counter's display.
3-347. Since none of these calculations are done by the counter in the High Speed Output
mode, raw data may be output at rates of up to 140 measurements per second. This allows the
operator to manipulate or process the raw data with an external calculator to the appropriate
form for the desired application. Note, long gate times will slow down the output rate. Data is sent
directly to the HP-IB, in eight binary bytes, terminated by an EOI with the last byte. The eight bytes
contain the following data:
Byte 1 E5 E4 Contents of the MRC E-register

Byte 2 E3 E2 in BCD (binary coded decimal).
Byte 3 E1 EO
Byte 4 T5 T4 Contents of the MRC T-register
Byte 5 T3 T2 in BCD.
Byte 6 T1 TO
Byte 7 ST Interpolator Start count (binary)
Byte 8 SP Interpolator Stop count (binary)
Overflow is indicated by E5 = 1111 (binary), or T5 = 1111 (binary).
3-348. The High Speed Output mode is recommended for the experience operator, since after
the data is received by the controller it must be translated for the measurement information to be
useful. High Speed Output is only applicable in frequency, period, time interval, and ratio
measurements.
3-349. The High Speed Output data must be combined with the calibration data to calculate the
desired measurement. It is recommended that the calibration data be output first, in the same
measurement mode as the high speed data is to be output. Note, interpolation is not required in
the ratio mode, therefore, the interpoiator counts and the calibration data are not applicable for
ratio measurements. Calibration data is output in response to the "TC" command, as follows:
C aaa,bbb,ccc,ddd<CR/lF>
where aaa, bbb, ccc, and ddd each contain three ASCII digits.
3-86
HP 5334A/B
3-350. Once the calibration data has been output it may be used for several measurements in the
same mode. Calibration data is combined with the high speed data in the following equation to
calculate T corrected (TIME):
T corrected = T + ST - ccc _ SP - aaa

ddd bbb
where ST and SP are the Interpolator Start count and Stop count, respectively, and T is the
contents of the MRC T-register from the High Speed Output data.
NOTE
Add an offset of 256 to negative numerators between -5 and -256.
Then, T corrected is used to calculate the desired measurement. For example:
Time Interval = T corrected X 100 ns
Frequency (F) = ~T-c-o-rr-e-c-te-=~~X-1-0-0-n-s-

where E is the contents of the MRC E-register from the High Speed Output data.
NOTE
Refer to Programming Examples, paragraph 3-359, for a sample

program to translate the high speed output and the calibration
data into frequency measurements.
-
IT
3-351. Ratio measurements are calculated by determining E/T or TIE from the High Speed
Output data; where the MRC E-register contains the count from Input B, and the MRC T-register
contains the count from Input A.
NOTE
Since FREQ C measurements are prescaled by 20, the E-register

count must be multiplied by 20 to calculate the actual frequency.
3-352. Error Handling
3-353. Certain conditions will produce an error or failure state in the HP 5334A/B. Fail messages
typically occur during the power-up cycle, and generally indicate a hardware related problem.
Error messages generally indicate that the user has attempted a disallowed operation. Refer to
paragraphs 3-88, Initial Power-up Checks and Self-Diagnostics, and 3-252, Error Indications, for
further details on error and failure messages.
3-354. When the HP 5334A/B is operating in remote, all errors and failures produce a static error
condition. Normal operation is suspended until the error is cleared. In an error state, the
instrument ignores all HP-IB commands, except "IN", liTE", and (I!D". Errors 1.0 through 4.4 are
cleared by a Device Clear, Selected Device Clear, the "IN" command, and the RESETILOCAL key.
3-87
HP 5334A1B
J •
(Pressing the RESETILOCAL key will also return the counter to local operation.) Errors 5.0X
through 5.2. and Failures are cleared only by the RESETILOCAL key. Error messages are listed in
Table 3-3, and Fail messages are listed in Table 3-4.
3-355. Error and Failure numbers can be read via the bus by sending the "TE" command. When
the "TE" command is received, the instrument will send the error or failure message to the
J
controller, but the instrument will remain in the error or failure number to the HP-8S display:
OUTPUT 703;"TE"
ENTER 703;X$
DISP X$
3-356. The Status Byte. refer paragraph 3-295, contains an error bit and a failure bit to flag an
error condition. When an error condition occurs, the flag that is sent reflects the message
displayed by the HP 5334A/B. The error flag is cleared when the error is cleared as described
previously, or when the "TE" command is received. Note that the "TE" command clears the error
flag in the Status Byte, but does not clear the error state. The failure flag is cleared only by pressing
the RESETILOCAL key.
3-357. Preset and Disallowed Conditions

3-358. As each HP 5334A/B function is selected, various parameter settings are controlled
internally. These are referred to as PRESET and DISALLOWED conditions. The PRESET conditions
are the parameter settings that are enabled on initial selection of each function. The
DISALLOWED conditions are the parameter settings that are incompatible after initial selection of
each function. Attempting to enable a disallowed parameter, in a given mode of operation, will
produce an error condition. Error messages are listed in Table 3-3. PRESET and DISALLOWED
conditions are listed in Table 3-13, including the equivalent HP-IB commands.
3-88
HP 5334A1B
Table 3-13 HP-IB Preset and Disallowed Conditions

MODE PRESET CONDITIONS DISALLOWED CONDITIONS
PARAMETER SmlNG HP-IB SETTING HP-IB
COMMAND COMMAND
FREQ A SINGLE CYCLE OFF GSO none
, (FN1) 100-GATE AVERAGE Off GVO none
EXT ARMING OFF XA2, X02 none
INITIALIZED MATH DISABLE ON I MD1 none
AT POWER-UP GATE TIME (set at 300 ms at power-up only) none
FREQ B SINGLE CYCLE OFF GSO none
(FN2) 100-GATE AVERAGE OFF GVO none
I MATH DISABLE ON MD1 none
I, FREQ C SINGLE CYCLE OFF GSO none

I (FN3) 100-GATE AVERAGE OFF GVO none
EXT ARMING OFF I XA2, X02 none
MATH DISABLE ON MD1 none
AUTO TRIG OFF AUO ON AU1
I(FN4)
PERIOD A SINGLE CYCLE
100-GATE AVERAGE
Off
OFF
GSO
GVO
none
none
I MATH DISABLE ON MD1 none
UA-B SINGLE CYCLE OFF GSO none

(FN5) 100-GATE AVERAGE OFF GVO none
I MATH DISABLE ON i MD1 none
UA-B SINGLE CYCLE OFF GSO ,

none
[DELAY] 1OQ-GATE AVERAGE Off GVO none
(FN6) EXT ARMING OFF XA2, X02 none
RATIO AlB SINGLE CYCLE OFF GSO none

I (FN7) 100-GATE AVERAGE
EXT ARMING
OFF
Off
GVO
XA2, X02
none
none
MATH DI SA BLE ON MD1 none
Calibration Data disallowed in Ratio mode TC
TOT STOP A SINGLE CYCLE OFF GSO ON GS1
(FNB) 100-GATE AVERAGE OFF GVO ON GV1
II TOT START A
MATH DISABLE ON MD1 OFF MDO
(FN9) AUTO TRIG OFF AUO ON AU1
GATE TIME ENTRY controlled by TOT STOP A ON GA<n>
High Speed Mode OFF HSO ON HS1
Wait to he I OFF WAO ON WA1
Addressed Mode I I
Calibration Data disallowed in Totalize mode TC
PULSE SI NGLE CYCLE OFF GSO , none
WIDTH A 100-GATE AVERAGE OFF GVO none
I
(FN10) EXT ARMING SLOPES OFF XA2, X02 none
AUTO TRIG ON AU1 OFF AUO
X10 ATTN controlled by AUTO TRIG ONI AX1,BX1
,I OFF AXO,BXO
SENS OFF SEO ON SE1
I DACS (S334A only) OFF
II TRO ON TR1
I High Speed Mode OFF

Calibration Data disallowed in Pulse Width mode
HSO ON HS1
TC
3-89
HP 5334A1B
Table 3-13. HP-IB Preset and Disallowed Conditions (Continued)

PARAMETER SETTING HP-IB SETTING HP-18
I
COMMAND COMMAND
RISE/FALL SINGLE CYCLE OFF GSO none
TIME A l00-GATE AVERAGE
r
OFF GVO none
(FN11) EXT ARMING SLOPES OFf XA2, X02 none
MATH DISABLE ON MOl none
AUTO TRIG ON AUl Off ,
AUO Ii,
Xl0 ATTN controlled by AUTO TRIG ON/ AX1,BXl
I SENS Off SEO
Off
ON
AXO,BXO
SEl
DACS (S334A only) Off TRO ON TRl
COM A * ON Cal Off COO
INPUT B SLOPE controlled by INPUT A +SLOPE/ BSl
-SLOPE BSO
INPUT B COUPLING controlled by INPUT A AC/
n
BAl
(DC) BAO
"
INPUT B IMPEDANCE controlled by INPUT A 500 Z/ BZl
(lMOZ) BZO
fiLTER A
High Speed Mode I Off
Off I flO
HSO
Calibration Data disallowed In Rise/fall Time mode
ON
ON
fll
HSl
TC
'NOTE
INPUT B SLOPE, COUPLING, and IMPEDANCE are set to corresponding
INPUT A settings via COM A.
DVM (S334A) SINGLE CYCLE Off GSO ON GSl
(fN12) 100-GATE AVERAGE Off GVO ON GVl
I EXT ARMING SLOPES Off XA2,X02 ON+

Off
ON-
XA1,XOl
XA2,X02
XA3,X03
MATH DISABLE ON MOl none
AUTO TRIG Off AUO ON AUl
GATE TIME ENTRY (100 ms) controlled by DVM ON GA<n>
High Speed Mode I Off I HSO ON HSl
Calibration Data disallowed In Voltage mode TC
•
;1
READ SINGLE CYCLE OFF GSO none
TRIGGER l00-GATE AVERAGE Off GVO ON GVl
LEVELS EXT ARMING SLOPES Off XA2,X02 ON+ XA1,X01
(fN13) Off XA2,X02
ON- XA3,X03
MATH DISABLE ON MOl Off MOO
AUTO TRIG Off AUO ON AUl
GATE TIME ENTRY disallowed in TRIG LEVEL ON GA<n>
High Speed Mode I Off I HSO ON HSl
Calibration Data disallowed in Trigger Levels mode TC
READ SINGLE CYCLE Off GSO none
PEAKS A 100-GATE AVERAGE Off GVO ON GVl
(fN14) EXT ARMING SLOPES Off XA2,X02 ON+ XA1,XOl
Off XA2,X02
ON- XA3,X03
PEAKS B MATH DISABLE ON MOl Off MOO
iFN1S) AUTO TRIG ON AUl Off AUO
X10 ATTN controlled by AUTO TRIG ON/ AX1,BXl
Off AXO,BXO
SENS
DACS (5334A on Iy) I
Off
Off I
GA TE TIME ENTRY disallowed in PEAK LEVEL
SEO
TRO
ON
ON
ON
SEl
TRl
GA<n>
Hig h Speed Mode I Off I HSO ON HSl
Calibration Data disallowed in Peak Levels mode TC
3-90
HP 5334A1B
Table 3-13. HP-IB Preset and Disallowed Conditions (Continued)

"., EQUIVALENT EQUIVALENT
PARAMETER SETTING HP-IB SETTING HP-IB
COMMAND COMMAND
AUTO TRIG Xl0 ATTN controlled by AUTO TRIG ONI AX1,BXl
ON = (AU1) OFF AXO,BXO
SENS OFF SEO none
Note, if SENS is turned ON, AUTO TRIG is turned OFF.
OACS (5334A only) OFF TRO
Note, if OACS are turned ON, AUTO TRIG is turned OFF,
none
I
TRIGGER levels set internally controls disabled
1.
LEVELISENS
i COM A IONI AU INPUT B coupling controlled by INPUT A ONI BAl
I (COl) , (DC) OFF BAO
5011 ZI INPUT B impedance controlled by INPUT A ONI Bll
(lMI1 l) OFF BlO
SENS ION] AUTO TRIG OFF AUO none
(SE1) Note, if AUTO TRIG is turned ON, SENS is turned OFF.
OACS ION] AUTO TRIG OFF AUO none
(TR1) Note, if AUTO TRIG is turned ON, OACS are turned OFF.
(5334A only) TRIGGER levels set with AT<num> and BT<num>
LEVEL/SENS commands.
3-359. PROGRAMMING EXAMPLES
3-360. The following examples demonstrate the programming capabilities of the HP 5334A1B
Universal Counter. The examples are written for the HP-85 controller. A summary of the program
operation and a line-by-iine description are provided for each example.
3-361. The examples listed in this section assume an HP 5334A/B address setting "03". The
counter is addressed to either talk or listen by using the code "703", where "7" is the interface
select code, and "03" is the HP 5334A/B address. The command sent with the address determines
whether the counter will talk or listen; such as, with the HP-85 "OUTPUT 703" addresses the
counter to listen, and "ENTER 703" addresses the counter to talk. The ASCII characters for the
same address settings are "C" for a talk address and "#" for a listen address. The ASCII characters
are used if the controller is a HP 9830A calculator ( or when the "cmd" statement is used with the
9825A1B).
NOTE
HP 5334B WITH OPTION 700 (MATE) ONLY
SELECTING THE PROGRAMMING MODE. Option700 allows the

HP 5334B to respond to an additional control language called
Control Interface Intermediate Language (ClIL). The instrument
will still respond to its native (HP-I B) programming code, butthis
would only normally be used for troubleshooting and HP-IB
operational verification.
The default instruction set for the HP 5334B Option 700 at power-
up is determined by the setting of a jumper (1701) in the Option
700 MATE Processor Block Assembly. At j701, short together pins
2 (ClIL) and 3 (Common) for the default ClIL programming
3-91
HP 5334A!B
mode, or short together pins 3 (Common) and 4 (NAT) for the

native (HP-I B) mode. No matter what the jumper setting is, either
native Or ClIL language can be selected via programming
commands. Switching the Counter off and then on restores the
language selected by the jumper.
When in C!lL mode, sending the ClIL operation code "GAL",

(Go to Alternate Language), switches the HP 5334B to its native
(HP-IB) language. When in native language, sending the com-
mand "CIIL" to the Counter will cause it to switch to the CIIL
programming mode.
For complete ClIL programming information and Error Messages

refer the HP 53348, OPTION 700 INTERNAL ClIL INTERFACE
OPERATING AND PROGRAMMING MANUAL, HP Part Number
05334-90034.
EXAMPLE 1. IDENTIFYING AND INITIALIZING THE HP 5334A1B
The following example demonstrates how to identify the device at address 03, and how to initialize the
counter. The program clears the HP-85 screen, clears the HP 5334A/B, then requests the instrument
identification. THe response is read into "A$", then displayed and printed by the controller. The program
then sends the "IN" command, which initializes the counter.
The counter responds by setting the initialized states as follows: all gate, math/memory and input signal
" '
conditioning will be OFF; the function will be FREQ A, with AUTO TRIG and auto-attenuation ON; gate time
will be set at 300 milliseconds; math offset value will be set at +0, normalize value at +1; the input A and input
B trigger levels will be set at 0 volts, and the internal trigger/sensitivity levels will be OFF (dACS OFF - 5334A
oniy).
LINE 10: Clear the HP-85 display.

LINE 20: Clear device at address 03.
LINE 30: Send "ID" command to device at address
03. The "ID" command requests the "
instrument to return its identification;
the 5334A/B will return the string, HP
5334A<CR/LF>".
LINE 40: Read 5334A/B "ID" response into A$.
LINE 50: Send contents of A$ to HP-85 screen.
LINE 60: Send contents of A$ to HP-85 printer.
LINE 70: Set 5334A1B to initialized state.
LINE 80: End program execution.
L
3-92
HP 5334A1B
EXAMPLE 2. SENDING MEASUREMENTS TO THE CONTROLLER
This program displays each measurement sent to the controller. The program clears the HP-85 screen,
initializes the HP 5334A/B to a known state, sets the inputs to common, and selects the Time Interval Delay
mode of operation. The variable, X$, is dimensioned to 19 characters to accommodate the measurement
output string. The next triggered measurement is read into "X$", then displayed on the HP-85 screen. The
program then repeats reading and displaying measurements.
LINE 10: Clear the HP-85 screen.

LINE 20: Send "IN, C01, FN6" commands to the
5334A/B. The command "IN" sets
counter to a known state; uC01" sets
counter to Time Interval Delay mode.
LINE 30: Dimension "X$" to 19 characters.
LINE 40: Read 5334A/B measurement into
LINE 50: Send contents of X$ to HP-85
LINE 60: Return to LINE 40.
I
EXAMPLE 3. MEASUREMENT AVERAGING

1
This example displays each measurement average sent to the HP-85 controller. The program clears the HP-85
screen, initializes the HP 5334A/B to a known state, selects the Pulse Width measurement mode, and selects
100-Gate Average mode. The variable, X$, is dimensioned to 19 characters to accommodate the
measurement output string. The next measurement average is read into "X$", then displayed on the HP-85
screen. The program then repeats averaging, reading and displaying measurements.
LINE 10: Clear the HP-85 screen.

LINE 20: Send "IN, FN10, GV1" commands to the
5334A/B. The command "IN" sets
counter to a known state; IlFN10" sets
counter to Pulse Width mode; "GV1"
sets counter to 100-Gate Average mode.
LINE 40: Read 5334A/B measurement into X$.
LINE 50: Send contents of X$ to HP-85 screen.
3-93
HP 5334A1B
EXAMPLE 4. DISPLAYING THE STATUS BYTE
The foilowing example reads the status byte of the 5334A/B by conducting a serial poll at address 03. The
value returned is read into variable" A". The program then displays the definition of each bit and the I'
corresponding bit value returned by the serial poll.
LINE 10: Conduct a serial poll of the 5334A1B, and

read the status byte into" AU.
LINE 20: Dispiay "REQUEST SERVICE =" followed
by the value of bit 6 of the status. byte. i:
LINE 30: Display "NO OSCILLATOR =" followed •
by the value of bit 5 of the status byte.
LINE 40: Display "INSTRUMENT IN LOCAL ="
followed by the value of bit 4 of the
status byte.
LINE 50: Display "FAILURE OCCURRED =" fol-
lowed by the value of bit 3 of the status
byte.
LINE 60: Display "ERROR OCCURRED =" fol-
lowed by value of bit 2 of the status byte.
LINE 70: Display "DATA READY =" followed by
the value of bit 0 of the status byte.
Running the program produces displays similar to the following:
EXAMPLE 5. A) TYPICAL MEASUREMENT FORMAT
This program first dimensions string variable" A$", in the HP-85 controller, to 19 characters to accommodate
the measurement output string. Then sets the counter to its initialized state with a gate time of 500 ms (0;5
seconds). The counter will make a simple Frequency A measurement. The controller will then read the next
measurement and cycle is repeated.
LINE 10: Dimension"A$" to 19 characters.

LINE 20: Send "IN, GA.5" commands to the
5334A/B. The command "IN" initializes
counter to known state (FREQ A mode
on); "GA.5" sets gate time to 500 ms.
LINE 30: Read 5334A/B measurement into A$.
3-94
HP 5334A1B
EXAMPLE 5. B) TYPICAL MEASUREMENT FORMAT
This example demonstrates how the controller can be used to display a measurement every 5 seconds. After
a measurement is accepted, the counter waits for the next read command to be executed. During the wait
statement although the counter is addressed to talk, it will check to make sure the listening device is ready for
data. If the controller is not ready to accept data, the counter will stop trying to output the data and start a
new measurement. In this example the HP 5334A/B will continue to make measurements without sending
data, until 5 seconds have elapsed. After 5 seconds, the next measurement is read and sent to the HP-85
screen.
Note, the check is done only for the first character of a measurement data string. Subsequent characters are
automatically sent if the listening device is ready for data.
LINE 10: Dimension "A$" to 19 characters.

LINE 20: Send "IN" command to the 5334A1B.
n
The command I<!N initializes the
counter to a known state (FREQ A mode
on).
LINE 50: Wait 5 seconds (5000 ms).
EXAMPLE 5. C) TYPICAL MEASUREMENT WITH WAIT MODE ON
The "WA1" command tells the HP 5334A/B to wait at the end of each measurement to output the data.
During the 5-second wait period the counter will wait until the controller reads the measurement data,
before starting the next measurement.
Note, with the short gate time (10 ms), the data displayed in this example is about 5 seconds old.
LINE 10: Dimension" A$" to 19 characters.

LINE 20: Send "IN, WA1, GA.Ol" commands to
the 5334A/B. Command "IN" initializes
counter to known state (FREQ A mode
on); uWA1" places counter in Wait To
Be Addressed mode; "GA.Ol" sets gate
time to 10 ms.
LINE 50: Wait 5 seconds (5000 ms).
3-95
HP 5334A/B
EXAMPLE 6. SEND SRQ WHEN DATA IS READY
This example demonstrates the use of the Wait mode to ensure SRQ when data is ready. The program
initializes the counter, sets the gate time to ls, and enables the Period A measurement mode. TheSRQ Mask
is set to assert SRQ when data is ready, and the Wait mode is set so that the counter will Wait To Be Addressed
to send measurement data. Additionally, if the counter does not have a measurement ready in a few seconds,
the controller will alert the user to check the signal. If a measurement is ready, it is read and displayed and the
process is then repeated.
In this example the HP-85 checks the HP-IB controller interface for the status of the SRQ line, without
disturbing the counter during measurements.

LINE 20: Send "IN, GAl, FN4, SM1, WA1" com-
mands to the 5334A/B. Command" IN"
initializes cou nter, (lGA 1" sets gate ti me
to 1 second, "FN4" places counter in
Period A mode, "SM1" sets SRQ mask to
assert SRQ when data is ready, "WA1"
sets counter in Wait To Be Addressed
mode.
LINE 30: Sets up loop for timeout if counter has
no data ready.
LINE 40: Check controller interface Status Regis-
JI
ter, and read byte into If A •
LINE 50: If data is ready to transmit go to line 90.

LINE 60: If counter has no data ready wait 50 ms,
then go back to LI NE 30 and check status
byte again.
LINE 70: Display "TIMEOUT'CHECK SIGNAL" if no data is ready when timeout has elapsed.
LINE 80: Alert the user that there is no data, and stop program execution.
LINE 90: Read 5334A/B measurement into X$.
LINE 100: Send contents of X$ to HP-85 screen.
LINE 110: Return to LINE 30 and repeat the process.
LINE 120: Endprogram execution.
Running the program produces a display similar to the follOWing; removing the signal from the Input after
several measurements have been displayed, will timeout and stop the program as shown:
S +1.0138131381300£-137
:3 +9. 99999999E-138
"0' + 1 . 000339901 E-07
S + 1 . 0130e913300E -37
S +1.3000e3130eE-e7
TIMEOUT
:j:: CHECK SIGNAL
EXAMPLE 7. TOTALIZE MEASUREMENTS
This program demonstrates the difference between "t" and uT" outputs during the Totalize mode. The
program totalizes counts for approximately 10 seconds. During this time four intermediate counts are
printed out at 2, 4, 6, and 8 seconds. A final count is printed after the Totalize Stop command is executed at
~10 seconds, then the process is repeated.
3-96
HP 5334A1B
1(, DIM A$I:19::J LINE 10: Dimension II A$/I to 19 characters.

20 OUTPUT 7133 .;" IN, TR 1 " LINE 20: Send "IN, TR1" commands to 5334A/B.
313 OUTPUT 7133 .," RE.. FN9" "IN!I initializes the counter and sets the
~13 FOR J.= 1 TO ~ internal trigger levels to 0 volts; "TR1"
513 WAIT 2131313 sets the internal trigger level controls on
613· EtHER 7~33 ; A$f! PR I NT (dACS On - 5334A only) and turns
70 NEXT .J
S.e w.fH T 21309 AUTO TRIG off.
~le'< 7@'13":' '),/"FFH'8· LINE 30: Send "RE, FN9" commands to 5334A/B.
! €Ie 133 ; A$'@ PRINT "RE" resets the the counter and starts a
1111 f! PRINT new measurement, "FN9" sets counter
1213 GOTO 39 in Totalize Start mode.
130 END LINE 40: Sets up loop to read and print-out four
measurements.
LINE SO: Wait 2 seconds (2000 ms).
LINE 60: Read 5334A/B measurement into "A$",
and print the value of "A$".
LINE 70: Go back to LINE 40 and repeat the process until the fourth measurement has been read.
LINE 80: Wait 2 seconds.
LINE 90: Send "FN8" command to the 5334A/B. "FN8" sets the counter in the Totalize Stop mode.
LINE 100: Read 5334A/B measurement into X$, and execute <CR/LF>.
LINE 110: Print contents of X$, followed by another <CR/LF>.
LINE 130: End Program execution.
Running the program produces a printout similar to the following:
f +6. 8724047EH3T
,t< >+9'-':" 4\B:B"~9,' t'·3.
t +1 E
+1
T +1 23894921E+'38
3·97
HP 5334A1B
EXAMPLE 8. ENTERING MATH CONSTANTS
This program demonstrates one method of using Math constants to manipulate measurement data. The
program clears the HP-85 screen and asks for the offset value, and the normalize value to be entered on the
screen. The entered values are sent to the cou nter with the math commands, and the resultant measurement
is then read and printed out by the HP-85. The process is then repeated.
t0 DIM :,,$1:19] LINE 10:

Dimension "X$" to 19 characters.
~0 CL.ERR LINE 20:
Clear the HP-85 screen.
30 DISP "FREQUENCY OFFSET" LINE 30:
Ask for the "OFFSET VALUE".
40 INPUT 0 LINE Read the entered value into "0".
40:
50 UISP "NORMALIZE VALUE" LINE 50:
Ask for the "NORMALIZE VALUE".
60 INPUT N
LINE 60:
Read the entered value into "N".
7.3 OUTPUT 7133 .;" I rb MO" .' 0; "l'lN· .; H
80 EtHER 703 .; X$ LINE 70:
Send "IN; MO,O;MN,N" commands to
90 PRINT "OFFSET =";0 the 5334A/B. "IN" initializes the counter
100 PRINT "NORMALIZE =";!'l (FREQ A mode); "MO";O sets math
1110\ PRINT offset to the value entered for "0";
PRINT "RESULT = ";)<;$ "MN";N sets math normalize to the
NT value entered for UN",
;;::1,;"- JJl ZJj> LINE 80: Read the response into "X$".
END LINE 90: Print "OFFSET =", followed by the value
of uOJ},
LINE 100: Print "NORMALIZE =", followed by the value of "N".

LINE 110: Execute <CR/LF>.
LINE 120: Print "RESULT =", followed by the contents of "X$".
LINE 130: Execute <CR/LF>.
LINE 140: Return to LINE 20, and repeat the process.
Running the program will produce a printout similar to the following:
OFFSET = L23456
HORMflLIZ£ = 0e0efl89
RESULT =F +1.11111112£+13
OFFSET = 111111111
HORl'lALIZE = 222222222
RESULT F+1.11111111044E+0:3
CJF-P;-SE:I: ,-='. 3:;3'333'3':3"3

N:ORMALI ZE = 44444444
RESULT = F+3. 3'333:3332250E+@7
3-98
HP 5334A!B
-F
EXAMPLE 9. CALCULATING SLEW RATE MEASUREMENTS
This program is an example of how 5334BA/B can be used to make Slew Rate measurements. The program
makes a Rise Time measurement. foilowed by a Channel A Peak Voltage levels measurement, and uses the
data to calculate the Slew Rate of the leading edge of the input signal. Then the Rise Time, Peak-to-Peak
Voltage, and Slew Rate are displayed, and the process is repeated. For this example the positive slope of the
signal is measured, but the program can be modified to measure the negative slope (Fall Time).
LINE 10: Dimension string variable "T$" to 19

characters.
LINE 20: Send "IN" command to 5334A/B. "IN"
initializes the counter (places counter
into known state).
LINE 30: Execute <CR/LF> and send "FNll" com-
mand to enable Rise Time mode.
LINE 40: Read rise time measurement into UT$".
LINE SO: Send "FN14" command to enable Chan-
nel A Peak Voltage mode.
LINE 60: Read upper peak level into "H" and
lower peak level into "L".
H LINE 70: Calculate the pop voltage (P) by sub-
tracting the lower peak value (L) from
the upper peak value (H).
LINE 80: Transfer the numeric value of T$ (rise
time) into numeric variable liT",
LINE 90: Calculate the slew rate (S) by finding 80%
of the pop voltage (P), and dividing by
the rise time (T).
LI NE 100: Display "RISE TIME =" followed by the value ofT$ (characters 11 through 19), "SEC.", and execute
<CR/LF>.
LINE 110: Display "P-P SIGNAL =" followed by the value of P, "V", and execute <CR/LF>.
LINE 120: Display the value of S, using the format "DD.DDe" in LINE 130, and execute <CR/LF>.
LINE 130: Output "SLEW RATE =" followed by the value of Sand "V/S".
Running the program will produce a display similar to the following:
p-
SLEi·j RATE =
3-99
HP 5334A1B
EXAMPLE 10. TRANSLATING HIGH SPEED DATA OUTPUTS
This program will take 140 readings in the High Speed Output mode, read the calibration data in the same
measurement mode, then combine and manipulate the data to determine the frequency and print the
resuits. The HP-85 will alert the user (beep' before the data transfer begins and after the data transfer is
complete. This gives the user an idea of how quickly the 5334A1B makes 140 frequency readings in the High
Speed Output mode. If either the E or T register overflows, the program will enter a value of +9.99E+99 for
the frequency reading. Note that this is oniy one example for reading, manipulating and displaying High
Speed measurement data. The operator may adapt the process to suit the application. Refer to paragraph 3-
344 for further details on the High Speed Output data.
lCI OF'TIOt,~ 8ASE" (1 LINE 10: Begin numbering all subscripts of arrays
21;3 DIM ;:-::( 1'4'13> with O. IThis is the default array counting
DIM" ,;:<$1211283
sf]' system and is noted here for documen-
40 IOBUFFER X$ tation only.)
59
60
70
OUTPUT 703 .;"INTR1GA.13B1HS1"
OUTPUT 7133 ;"TC"
ENTER 7133 .; Cl, C2, C3, C4
LINE 20: Reserve space in the HP-85 memory to
accommodate 140 frequency readings.
.'ii
LINE 30: Dimensions X$ to contain 140 eight-byte
80 BEEP
%"1TRANSFER 7133 TO X$ FHS units of data (1128 characters). Eight
1013BEEP characters are reserved for control of
110 FOR J=13 TO 139 buffer activity.
115 BEEP 41313,.3 @ OISP @ OISP "S LINE 40: Declares string variable "X$" as an I/O
I TS FIT WORK ... 00 NOT 0 I STURS buffer.
" LINE 50: Send "IN,TR1,GA.OO1,HS1" commands
1213 IF Il'4T<: NUM (X$C8:f1;.J+1 ,8::tJ+1])/ to the 5334A1B. "IN" initializes the
16»9 THEN :oi(.J)=9".99E99 @ GO counter (FREQ A) and sets the internal
TO 300
trigger levels to 0 volts; "TR1" sets the
13;3 IF INT<:NlJMO{$[8:l:J+4,8:j:.J+4])/
16»9 THEN X<:J)=9. 99E99 @ GO internal trigger level controls on (dACS
TO 3139 On) and turns AUTO TRIG off; "GA.001"
1413 FOR 1=1 TO 3 sets the gate time to 1 ms (for fastest
150 A$I::2H-1., 2:l:I-1]=CHR$-( INTo-lUM output rate); "HS1" places the counter
(X$CI+8:1:J,I+8:f1;J])/16)+48) into the High Speed Output mode.
1613 /'1$C2:tI,2::tI]=CHR$(SINflHO(NU1't( LINE 60: Send "TC" command to the 5334A!B.
X$I:I +8*J, I +8*JJ) , 1~)) +48) "TC" requests calibration data.
170 NEXT 1 LINE 70: Read calibration data into variables C1,
180 E=·VAUfI$)
0, 0, and C4.
1%"1 FOR 1=4 TO 6:
LINE 80: Signal operator at start of data transfer.
21313 8$1:2:1: I -7 .' 2* 1 -7:l=CHR$ ( 1 tn (NUl'!
O<$l:I+8*J,1+8::tJ:J)/16)+48) LINE 90: Place data bytes from the 5334A/B into
210 B$C2* I -6., 2~n -6]=CHR$"(BINflNO( I/O Buffer (X$) in fast-handshake mode.
NU!'l(X$CI+8*J, I+8::t-J:J), 15)+48) LI NE 100: Signal operator data transfer complete. "I,
220 NEXT r LINE 110: Sets up loop to manipulate 140 measure-
230 B=VAU B$) ments.
240 C=NUl'!(X$Ca:l:J+7,a*J+7]) LINE 115: (Optional) produces an audible tone
258 0=NUM-(X$E:8*J+8,8*J+8:]) and a display to alert the operator that -
2613 IF C-C3<-4 THEN C=C+256- the controller is processing data.
27H IF 0-C1 <-4 THEN, 0=0+25"6-
LINE 120: If E-register overflows set the measure- I
28H T=B+(C-C::n/C4-(0-CU/C2 i ,1
2913 X (.J) =E>'T+ 1813013088 ment equal to 9.99E99 and go to LINE 300.
3013 NE:oiTJ LINE 130: If T-register overflows set the measure-
3113 FOR J:8 TO 139 ment equal to 9.99E99 and go to LINE 300.
320 PRINT USING 3313 ; ·J+1, XCJ) LINE 140: Sets up loop to manipulatethefirstthree
3'313 IMAGE 30., 2X, "FREQUENCY = .. bytes of every eight-byte unit of data to
000000.,." "Hz" calculate the number of counts in the
3413 NEXT J events register.
3513 END LINE 150: Manipulates the four most significant
bits (upper bits) of each byte in the loop
(set up in LINE 140). Take each eight-
3-100
.
1 HP 5334A1B
byte unit of data from "X$", derives the decimal value of the first character in the string,
determines the integer value of the upper bits (divide by 16 is equivalent to shifting the original
binary number four places to the right to drop the lower four bitsl, converts the numeric
expression to the appropriate character, and places the character in the first position of each 2-
character unit read into IIA$".
LINE 160: Manipulates the four least significant bits (lower bits) of each byte in the loop set up in LINE 140).
Takes each eight-byte unit of data from "X$", drives the decimal value of the first character in the
string, performs a bit-by-bit binary AND using 15 and the evaluated integer (to cancel out the
upper four bits), returns the integer result, converts the numeric expression to the appropriate
I character, and places the character in the second position of each 2-character unit read into" A$".
LINE 170: Returns to LINE 140 and repeats the process until the third byte has been read into "A$".
LINE 180: Sets variable "E" equal to the numeric value of "A$" (the data from the E-register).
LINE 190: Sets up loop to manipulate the second three bytes of every eight-byte unit of data to calculate the
number of counts in the time register.
LINE 200: Manipulates the upper four bits of each byte in the loop (setup in LINE 190), using the same
process performed in LlNE150, and places the character in the first position of each 2-character
unit read into ('B$JI.
LINE 210: Manipulates the lower four bits of each byte in the loop (setup in LINE 190), using the same
process performed in LINE 160, and places the character in the second position of each 2-
character unit read into I(B$".
LINE 220: Returns to LINE 190 and repeats process until the sixth byte has been read into "B$".
LINE 230: Sets variable "B" equal to the numeric value of "B$" (data from the T-register).
LINE 240: Derives the decimal value of the seventh byte of every eight-bit unit of data to determine the
number of counts in the start interpolator, and reads value into "C'.
LINE 250: Derives the decimal value of the eighth byte of every eight-byte unit of data to determine the
number of counts in the stop interpolator, and reads the value into "D".
LINE 260: Adds an offset of 256 if "C-C3" (ST - ccc) is a negative number between -5 and -256.
. LINE 270: Adds an offset of 256 if "D-Cl" (SP - aaa) is a negative number between -5 and -256.
I
LINE 280: Calculates T corrected using the equation shown in paragraph 3-262, and reads the value into "T".
LINE 290: Calculates Frequency using the equation shown in paragraph 3-262, and reads the value into "X
subscript J".
LINE 300: Return to LINE 110 and repeat the entire process until the last measurement has been calculated.
LINE 310: Sets up loop to printout 140 frequency measurements.
LINE 320: Print the number ")+1" and the value of each measurement "XIJ)" using the format
"D.DDDDDe" in LINE 330.
LINE 330: Output the measurement number followed by 2 spaces, "FREQUENCY =" followed by the value
of X(J) and "Hz".
LINE 340: Return to LINE 310 and repeat process until the last measurement has been printed out.
Running the program produces a printout similar to the following:
1 FREQUEHCY - 999999E+01Hz
2 FREOUEHCY = 999999E+131Hz
:3 FREQUEHCY = 99999BE+l31Hz
4 FREOUEHCY = 999999E+131Hz
5 FREGUEHCY = le00/3eE+/3ZHz
55 FREQUENCY = 999999E+91Hz
56 FREQUENCY = 999998E+0tliz
57 FREQUENCY = 999999E+0tHz
58 FREQUENCY = 999999E+01Hz
59 FREQUENCY = 999999E+0tHz
3-101
HP 5334A1B
i
•
3-102
HP 5334A/B
Performance Tests
SECTION IV
PERfORMANCE TESTS
4-1. INTRODUCTION
4-2. The procedures in this section provide three groups of tests to check for proper operation
of the HP 5334A/B Universal Counter. The first is a quick method of verifying the basicfunctioning
of the counter when its normal operation is in question. The second is a complete test of the
instrument's electrical performance using the specifications of Table 1-1 as the performance
standards. And third is an HP-IB verification test using the HP 85A computer as a controller. All
1
tests can be performed without access to the interior of the instrument.
4-3. EQUIPMENT REQUIRED

4-4. Equipment required for the performance tests is listed in Table 1-4, Recommended Test
Equipment. Any equipment that satisfies the criticai specifications given in the table may be
substituted for the recommended model(s).
4-5. OPERATIONAL VERIFICATION/PERFORMANCE TEST RECORD

4-6. Results of the operation verification tests may be recorded on a copy of the Operational
Verification Test Record which follows the verification tests, Table 4-1. The results of the complete
performance tests may be recorded on a copy of the Performance Test Record which follows the
performance tests, Table 4-2.
4-7. CALIBRATION CYCLE

4-8. To maintain the HP 5334A/B in optimum operating condition, depending on the use and
environmental conditions, it is suggested that the instrument be checked using the performance
tests at least once each year. The Counter's reference oscillator must be checked and adjusted, if
necessary, to a house frequency standard before beginning the performance tests. Refer to
Adjustment Procedure 5-15 in Section V of the Service Manual. Follow the preliminary
instructions given in the INTRODUCTION and SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS paragraphs in Section
V.
4-9. Additionally, to maintain peak instrument performance between yearly checks, the
instruments containing the standard time base crystal oscillator, I.e., all non-Option 010 units,
should be adjusted every 3 months to a house frequency standard using Adjustment Procedure 5-
15, Reference Oscillator Adjustment in Section V of this manual. Again, refer to the preliminary
instructions before beginning the adjustment procedure.
4-10. TEST PROCEDURES

4-11. It is assumed that the person performing the followi ng tests understands how to operate
the specified test equipment. Equipment settings, otherthan those forthe Universal Counter, are
stated in general terms. It is also assumed that the person performing the tests will supply
whatever cables, connectors, and adapters that are necessary.
4-12. OPERATIONAL VERIFICATION TESTS

4-13. The tests included here are not as thorough and exhaustive as the performance tests. This
group of tests is intended only to serve as a method for giving the operator a high degree of
confidence that the instrument is performing properly. No attempt is made to check the
specifications of the instrument.
4-1
HI' 5334A1B
Performance Tests
4-14. These tests are useful for incoming QA or as a first check on an instrument suspected of
having a problem.
4-15. Preliminary Procedure
Before the Universal Counter is switched on, it must be set to the

same line voltage as the power source or damage to the
instrument may result. for details, see Power Requirements, Line
Voltage Selection, Power Cable, and associated warnings and
cautions in Section II of this manual.
i,
NOTE
To avoid confusion, each test procedure begins with a RE-

INITIALIZATION of the instrument. This simply means switching
the HI' 5334A1B to STANDBY and then to ON.
f
~,
Procedure:
1. Set the HI' 5334A/B as follows:
POWER .. STANDBY
TIME BASE INT (rear panel)
2. Connect the HI' 5334A/B as follows:
HI' 5334A/B Power Cable to Line Voltage
Observe: STANDBY LED is ON.
3. Do not connect an input signal to the HI' 5334A/B.
4-16. POWER-UP SELf-TEST/DIAGNOSTIC MODE

Description: During the power-up sequence, the HI' 5334A/B performs a fairly thorough check
of major components.
Procedure:
1. Set the HI' 5334A!B as follows:
POWER ON
Observe: STANDBY LED goes out.
2. All front panel LEDs light momentarily (except STANDBY LED which does not light and
ARM and GATE annunciators which flash alternately).
3. The instrument's model number, "HI' 5334A" (or "HI' 5334b"), is displayed.
4-2
HP 5334A1B
Performance Tests
4. The instrument's HP-IB address is displayed. (Address "03" is set at the factory but can be
set by the user to addresses 1(00" to ({3D").
5. If the instrument successfully executes the power-up self-test routine, the front panel
displays "PASS" and then defaults to preset conditions.
Front Panel Preset Conditions:
9 Digit Display all dashes

Hz annunciator ON
PRESET annunciator ON
FREQ A ON
AUTO TRIG ON
Channel A and B TRIGGER LEVEL LEDs Flash Alternately
All Other Indicators OFF
Test Record: Mark Pass or Fail on the Operational Verification Test Record Card, line 1.
What Checked:
1. The three microcomputers perform a ROM and RAM check.
2. The alternately flashing ARM and GATE annunciators indicate that the Measurement
microcomputer passes the ROM/RAM test.
3. The Executive microcomputer runs the front panel display check.
4. The Executive and Measurement microcomputers perform a limited Input/Output port

check.
5. The Measurement microcomputer checks for the presence of a time base oscillator.
6. A test of the Multiple-Register Counter (MRC) is made to check for basic operation.
7. A handshake communication test is performed between the Executive and Measurement

and the Executive and HP-IB microcomputers.
8. The Executive microcomputer reads the HP-IB address from the CMOS RAM and displays
it to the front panel.
For Failures: Any failures during the power-up cycle will disable the counter and produce a
dispiay of a numbered Error or Fail message. For a description of failure messages, refer to Error
Indications in Section III of this manual.
Additional Comments: The HP 5334A/B can be put into a diagnostic mode where it repeatedly
cycles through the power-u p self tests. This is accomplished by pressing the RESET/LOCAL key
while switching the power ON. The tests are repeated until the power is switched to STANDBY.
NOTE
In the diagnostic mode, neither the instrument model number

nor the HP-IB address is displayed.
4-3
HP 5334A/B
Performance Tests
4-17. READ LEVElS
Description: Checking the operation of the READ LEVELS function can indicate the health of
several circuits critical to the operation of the counter.
Procedure:
1. Set the HP 5334A/B as follows:
Reinitialize the s334A1B.
No Input Signal.
READ LEVELS Trigger Levels
(Press once to display trigger level settings, indicated on the

display by an "L" in the place of the exponent value.)
2. Rotate each front panel TRIGGER LEVEL/sENs control fully counterclockwise, then fully
clockwise.
Observe: The voltage extremes displayed should be < -5V and> +5V, respectively.
3. From the fully clockwise position, slowly rotate each control counterclockwise, then
clockwise past the midpoint position where the displayed voltage is approximately OV.
Observe: Each trigger light should turn on then off as the polarity level changes between
+100 mV and -100 mY.
4. Adjust each control for a setting of +2.s4V, and then -2.54V.
Observe: These exact settings should be possible with the voltage reading increasing or
decreasing in 0.02V steps.
5. Set the HP 5334A1B as follows:
SENs ON
Observe: Both trigger level settings should display O.OOV.
lest Record: Mark Pass or Fail on the Operational Verification Test Record Card, line 2.
What checked:
1. In the READ LEVELS mode, the Digital-to-Analog circuitry and the Measurement
microcomputer are operating while the Input Amplifier and Multiple-Register Counter
circuitry are inactive.
2. The DAC circuitry and the Measurement Data Bus are operating properly if the ± 2.54V
settings can be obtained.
3. If all tests are passed, the likelihood is high thatthe DACs, operational amplifier loops, the
Read Level comparators, the analog switches (all are DAC circuitry components), and the
front panel pots are operating properly.
4-4
HP 5334A1B
Performance Tests
for Failures: If any failures are encountered in this test, refer to Section VIII of the Service
Manual. The Digital-to-Analog Block is a likely candidate as a starting point for troubleshooting.
Other circuit blocks involved are the Measurement, Executive, and Front Panel blocks.
4-18. RATIO AlB
Description: This test uses the time base oscillator to drive the A and B input amplifier in a test of
the Multiple-Register Counter (MRC).
Procedure:
1. Connect the rear panel TIME BASE oscillator signal to the Channel A Input.
Reinitialize the 5334A/B.
COM A ON
AUTO TRIG OFF
TRIGGER LEVEL controls. . . . . .. .. .. midpoint setting
CHAN A and B son ON
GATE TIME 1 Second
FUNCTION RATIO AlB
Observe: The HP 5334A/B front panel displays 1.000 000 a ± .0000002 and both trigger
lights are flashing,
What Checked:
1. The operation of the MRC is checked using the ratio function.
2. The 10 MHz oscillator signal at the rear panel BNC connector is verified.
for failure: Refer to Section VIII of the Service Manual. The Measurement Block contains the
MRC (Multiple-Register Counter) and other blocks involved are the Input Amplifier, Executive,
Front Panel, and Time Base/Power Supply blocks.
4-19. FREQUENCY
Description: Using this test, a frequency is measured which will exercise the interpolators.
Procedure:
Observe: The HP 5334A/B front panel displays 10.000 000 0 MHz ± 0.2 Hz.
4-5
HP 5334MB
Performance Tests
What Checked: The interpolators which provide the accuracy of the frequency count are tested.
Defective interpolators may cause the reading to vary up to ± 100 Hz.
for failure: Refer to Section VIII of the Service Manual. The interpolators are part of the
Measurement Block. Other blocks involved here are the Input Amplifier, DAC, Executive, Front
Panel, and Time Base/Power Supply blocks.
4-20. INPUT SIGNAL CONDITIONING CHECK
Description: This series of checks performs a functional test of the front panel relays and circuitry
associated with those relays.
Procedure:
2. Set the HP S334A/B as follows:
Reinitialize the 5334MB.
AUTO TRIG OFF

COM A ON
CHAN A and B son ON
GATE TIME 1 Second
3. Adjust both TRIGGER LEVEL/SENS controls clockwise until trigger lights just go off.
COM A OFF
CHAN A and B son OFF
Observe: The HP S334A/B front panel displays 10.000 000 0 MHz ± 0.2 Hz. Channel A
trigger light flashing and Channel B light not flashing.
CHAN A son ON
Observe: The HP S334A/B front panel displays all dashes and Channel A trigger light
stops flashing.
6. Set:
CHAN A son OFF
Observe: Condition prior to switching in son impedance.

7. Set:
CHAN A X10 ATTN ON
Observe: The HP S334A/B front panel displays all dashes and Channel A trigger light
stops flashing.
4-6
HP 5334A/B
Performance Tests
8. Set:
CHAN A X10 ATTN OFF
Observe: Condition prior to switching in X10 attenuator.
9. Set:
100 kHz FILTER A ON
Observe: The HP 5334A/B front panei displays all dashes and Channel A
trigger light stops flashing.
10. Set:
100 kHz FILTER A OFF
Observe: Condition prior to switching in 100 kHz Filter.
11. Set:
COM A ........•.........•.•.•...................... ON
FUNCTION FREQ B
Connect the rear panel TIME BASE oscillator signal to the Channel B Input.
Observe: The HP S334A/B front panel stops updating and the trigger lightsstopflashing.
trigger lights stop flashing.
12. Set:
1
COM A OFF
.
(
Observe: The HP 5334A/B front panel displays 10.000 000 0 MHz ± 0.2 Hz. Channel B
trigger light flashing and Channei A trigger light not flashing.
-. 13. Set:
CHAN B son ON
Observe: The HP 5334A/B front panel displays all dashes and Channel B trigger light
stops flashing.
14. Set:
CHAN B son OFF
Observe: Condition prior to switching in son impedance.

15. Set:
1 CHAN B X10 ATTN ON
Observe: The HP S334A/B front panel displays all dashes and Channel B trigger light
stops flashing.
4-7
HP 5334A1B
Performance Tests
16. Set:
CHAN B X10 ATTN OFF
Observe: Condition prior to switching in X10 ATTN.
What Checked: Relays and circuitry.
for failures: Refer to Section VIII of the Service Manual. The Input Amplifier and Executive
Blocks are the main components of this test. Other blocks involved are DAC, Measurement, and
Front Panel blocks.
4-21. T.I. A -B
Description: Slope switch verification.
Procedure:
Reinitialize the 5334A1B.
COM A ON
TRIGGER LEVEL controls ......•............ set to OV ± O.2V
using READ LEVELS "L" mode
AUTO TRIG OFF
CHAN A and B 50n ON
GATE TIME 1 Second
FUNCTION T.1. A - B
Observe: The HP 5334A/B front panel displays 0 ns ± 6 ns.
3. Set both:
Channel A and B to Negative SLOPE ON

(Counter now triggers on negative slope.)
4. Set:
Channel A to Negative SLOPE OFF

Channel B to Negative SLOPE ON

S. Set:
Channel A to Negative SLOPE ON

Channel B to Negative SLOPE OFF
4-8
HP 5334A1B
Performance Tests
What Checked: Time interval measurement and slope switch operation.
For Failures: Refer to Section VIII of the Service Manual. In this case, the Input Amplifier, DAC,
Measurement, Executive, Front Panel, and Time Base/Power Supply blocks are involved.
4-22. AUTO TRIGGER
Description: The Measurement microcomputer sends a signal tothe DAC block and disables the
front panel trigger level controls.
Procedure:
GAIE TIME 1 Second
Observe: The HP 5334A/B front panel displays 10.000 000 0 MHz ± 0.2 Hz and both
Channel A and B trigger lights are flashing.
3. Rotate Channel A trigger level control.
Observe: There is no effect on the Counter's operation.
4. Set AUTO TRIG to OFF. Rotate Channel A trigger level control.
Observe: Extreme clockwise and counterclockwise control settings will stop the gating
and update of the Counter. Trigger light stops flashing.
5. Set AUTO TRIG to ON. Connect the rear panel TIME BASE oscillator signal to Input B. Set
FUNCTION to FREQ B.
Observe: The HP 5334A/B front panel displays 10.0000000 MHz ± 0.2 Hz and Channel A
and B trigger lights are flashing.
6. Rotate Channel B trigger level control.
Observe: There is no effect on the Counter's operation.
7. Set AUTO TRIG to OFF. Rotate Channel B trigger level control.
Observe: Extreme clockwise and counterclockwise control settings will stop the gating
and update of the Counter. Trigger light stops flashing.
What Checked: Control lines and DAC circuitry.
For Failures: Refer to Section VIII of the Service Manual. The test involves all of the .functional
blocks: the input Amplifier, DAC, Measurement, Executive, Front Panel, and Time Base/Power
Supply blocks.
4-9
HP 5334MB
Performance Tests
4-23. CMOS RAM (HI' 5334A Only)

Des(ript;on: The CMOS RAM device and support circuitry are checked in a limited way.
Pw(edure:
1. Reinitialize the HP 5334A.
2. Store a different front panel setup by first selecting the configuration, then pressing the
STORE key and finally, "1 ". Switch the HP 5334A!B to STANDBY and then ON. Press the
RECALL key and then "1".
Observe: The front panel setup is exactly as stored in location 1.
3. Repeat the procedure with various front panel setups using storage locations 0-9.
Test Re(ord: Mark Pass or Fail on the Operational Verification Test Record Card, line B.
What Che(ked: CMOS RAM and support circuitry.
For Failures: Refer to Section VIII of the Service Manual. The Executive and Front Panel Blocks are
the main components of the test.
4-24. DVM (Options 020 and 050 - HI' 5334A Only)

Des(ription: Two functional checks are made of the DVM option for the HP 5334A.
Pro(edure:
1. Place a jumper across the inputs of the DVM to short them together.
2. Set the HP 5334A as follows:
Reinitialize the 5334A.
FUNCTION DVM
Observe: The HP 5334A front panel displays OV ± B mV.
3. Connect the rear panel GATE OUT signal to the HP 5334A DVM inputs.
Observe: The HP 5334A front panel displays a measurement >50 mV.
Test Rewrd: Mark Pass or Fail on the Operational Verification Test Record Card, line 9.
What Che(ked: DVM zero and basic measurement capability.
For Failures: Refer to Section VIII of the Service Manual. The DVM, Measurement, Executive, and
Front Panel blocks are involved here.
4-25. CHANNEL C (Options 030 and 050 - HI' 5334A)

This operational check is for HP 5334A's containing Options 030 and 050.
Des(riplion: The Channel C option is checked by simply measuring a frequency within its range
of 90 MHz to 1300 MHz.
4-10
HI' 5334A1B
Performance Tests
Equipment: A signal source capable of outputting some frequency from 90 MHz to 1300 MHz.
Procedure:
1. Set the signal source as follows:
Frequency 90 to 1300 MHz

Amplitude 300 mV rms (+2.5 dBm)
2. Set the HI' 5334A as follows:
FUNCTION , . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . . . . .. FREQ C
3. Connect the signal source to the HI' 5334A Input C.
4. Adjust the Channel C Sensitivity control as needed to cause the Counter to gate and
display a stable reading.
Observe: The HI' 5334A front panel displays the generated frequency.
What Checked: Basic operation of the Channel C option.
for failures: Refer to Section VIII of the Service Manual. The Channel C, Measurement,
Executive, and Front Panel blocks are involved here.
4-26. CHANNEL C (Options 030 - HP 53348)

This operational check is for HI' 5334B's containing Option 030.
Description: The Channel C option is checked by simply measuring a frequency within its range
of 90 MHz to 1300 MHz.
Equipment: A signal source capable of outputting some frequency from 90 MHz to 1300 MHz.
Procedure:
1. Set the signal source as follows:
Frequency 90 to 1300 MHz

Amplitude 300 mV rms (+2.5 dBm)
2. Set the HI' 5334B as follows:

.,, Reinitialize the 5334B.
FUNCTION FREQ C
3. Connect the signal source to the HI' 5334B Input C.

• Observe: The HI' 5334B front panel displays the generated frequency.
Tesl Record: Mark Pass or Fail on the Operational Verification Test Record Card, line 11.
4-11
HP 5334A/B
Performance Tests
What Checked: Basic operation of the Channel Caption.
for failures: Refer to Section VIII of the Service Manual. The Channel C, Measurement,
Executive, and Front Panel blocks are involved here.
Table 4-1. HP 5334A/B Operation Verification Test Record Card
Hewlett-Packard Company Tested By

Model 5334A/B Universal Counter
Serial Number Date
PARAGRAPH RESULTS
TEST
NUMBER PASS FAil
4-16. POWER-UP SELF-TEST/DIAGNOSTIC MODE 1. ___
4-17. READ LEVELS 2. _ _
4-18. RATIO AlB 3. _ _
4-19. FREQUENCY 4. ---

4-20. INPUT SIGNAL CONDITIONING CHECK 5. ---
4-21. I T.1. A-B 6. _ _

----
4-22. AUTO TRIGGER 7. _ _
4-23. CMOS RAM 8. _ _
4-24. DVM (Options 020 and 050 - HP S334A only) 9. _ _
4-25. CHANNEL C (Options 030 and 050 HP 5334A) 10. ___
4-26. CHANNEL C (Option 030 - HP 5334B) 11. ___
4-12
HP 5334A/B
Performance Tests
4-27. PERfORMANCE TESTS
4-28. The following procedures test the electrical performance of the HP 5334A and 5334B
Universal Counters using the specifications in Table 1-1 as the performance standards. The tests
included here are much more specific and rigorous than the operational verification procedures.
Use these procedures to ensure that the instrument in question is operating at its highest level at
incoming QA, the annual calibration cycle check, or following any of the adjustment procedures.
4-29. The procedures were designed to be performed sequentially in order to fully test the HP
5334A/B.
NOH
If the performance tests are to be considered valid, the the

following conditions must be met:
a. The Universal Counter must have a 3D-minute warmup.
b. The reference oscillator must be set to a frequency

standard. Perform the Reference Oscillator Frequency
Adjustment before beginning these tests. This is adjust-
ment 5-15 in Section V, ADJUSTMENTS, of the Service
Manual.
NOH
The ± resolution limits specified in the following procedures

assume that the test equipment being used is calibrated and
operating at its performance limits. When this is not the case,
problems can occur. For example, noise on an input signal to the
Counter will result in the display of what seems to be an
inaccurate measurement. This condition must be considered
when observed measurements do not agree with the per-
formance test limits.
4-30. Preliminary Procedure
Before the Universal Counter is switched on, it must be set to the

same line voltage as the power source or damage to the
instrument may result. for details, see Power Requirements, line
Voltage Selection, Power Cable, and associated warnings and
cautions in Section II of this manual.
NOH
To avoid confusion, each test procedure begins with a RE-

INITIALIZATION of the instrument. This simply means switching
the HP 5334A/B to STANDBY and then to ON.
4-13
HP 5334A!B
Performance Tests
Procedure:
POWER STANDBY
TIME BASE INT (rear panel)
2. Connect the HP S334A/B as follows:
S334A/B Power Cable to Line Voltage
Observe: STANDBY LED is ON.
3. The HP 5334A/B Time Base oscillator is used as the reference for the other instruments in
these tests.
Connect the HP 5334A/B rear panel TIME BASE signal to both the function generator and
the signal generator. Set these instruments to operate on the external time base from the
HP 5334A!B Figure 4-1.
EXT REF
EXT REF IN
IN TIME
BASE OUT
3325A
0
5334A1B
~ree e°ler ~GJ
[J 000000
0looOIl~O 00 o OCDDao •
0000 0 @ 0 @ 0 0
0
8660A/C
FUNCTION GENERATOR UNIVERSAL COUNTER SIGNAL GENERATOR
Figure 4-1. Time Base Reference Setup
4-31. CHANNEL A FREQUENCY RESPONSE AND SENSITIVITY TEST,

10 Hz-20 MHz
Specification: Refer to Table 1-1, HP Model 5334A/B Specifications, for Frequency Response and
Sensitivity specifications.
Description: The frequency measuring range of the Counter is tested at minimum sensitivity
specifications and four different frequency settings.
frequencies and conditions tested:
10 Hz and 20 MHz, dc coupled, 1 Megohm

30 Hz and 20 MHz, ac coupled, 1 Megohm
1 MHz and 20 MHz, ac coupled, 50 Ohm
4-14
HP 5334A!B
Performance Tests
REF IN
3325A
50n FEEDTHROUGH FUNCTION GENERATOR
Figure 4-2. Channel A Frequency and Sensitivity Setup. 10 Hz-20 MHz
Equipment:
Function Generator HP 3325A
Procedure:
1. Set the function generator as follows:
Frequency 10 Hz
Amplitude 15 mV rms
Function Sine Wave
Reinitialize the 5334A!B.
FUNCTION FREQ A
SENS ON
CHAN A TRIG/SENS control fully cw
3. Connect the function generator signal to the HP 5334A/B Input A using a 50 Ohm
feedthrough connector as shown in Figure 4-2.
VERIFY: The Counter displays 10 Hz ± 0.03 Hz.
4. Record the measurement on the Performance Test Record Card, line 1.
Frequency 20 MHz
VERIFY: The Counter displays 20 MHz ± 0.3 Hz.
Frequency 30 Hz
4-15
HP 5334A!B
Performance Tests
8. Set the HP 5334A/B as follows: r
AC ON
VERIFY: The Counter displays 30 Hz ± 0.03 Hz.
9. Record the measurement on the Performance Test Record Card, iine 3.
Frequency 20 MHz
VERIFY: The Counter displays 20 MHz ± 0.3 Hz
Frequency.. .. .. .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . ... .. 1 MHz
NOTE
Remove the 50 Ohm feedthrough connector.
SOD. ......•.....................•....•...•.....•..... ON
14. Record 'the measurement on the Performance Test Record Card, line 5.
Frequency 20 MHz
Failure: If any of these tests fail, refer to Section V, Adjustments, paragraphs 5-16 and 5-18 as a first
step in troubleshooting.
4-32. CHANNEl B FREQUENCY RESPONSE AND SENSITIVITY TEST,

10 Hz-20 MHz
specifications and four different frequency settings.
4-16
HP 5334A!B
Performance Tests
10 Hz and 20 MHz, de coupled, 1 Megohm

1 30 Hz and 20 MHz, ac coupled, 1 Megohm
l
REF IN
~ 0
o:~F O~~:I ~
o oooll~gll~oD
0
ODD 000000
0010000 • 0
ooooo@@ @o
5334A1B 8 3325A
UNIVERSAL ~50n FEEDTHROUGH FUNCTION GENERATOR
COUNTER
Figure 4-3. Channel B Frequency and Sensitivity Setup, 10 Hz-20 MHz
Equipment:
Procedure:
Frequency 10 Hz
Amplitude 15 mY rms
Function Sine Wave
Reinitialize the 5334A!B.
FUNCTION FREQ B
SENS ON
CHAN B TRIG/SENS control fully cw
3. Connect the function generator signal to the HP 5334A/B Input B using a 50 Ohm
4. Repeat the tests of paragraph 4-31 for Channel B and record the measurements on the
Performance Test Record Card, lines 7 through 12. Begin the tests at the verification of 10
Hz in paragraph 4-31, step 4.
failure: If any of these tests fail. refer to Section Y, Adjustments, paragraphs 5-17 and 5-19 as a first
4-17
HP 5334A/B
Performance Tests
4-33. CHANNEl. A FREQUENCY RESPONSE AND SENSITIVITY TEST,

80 MHz-100 MHz (For Non-Option 060 instruments)
This test is for instruments that do not contain the Option 060 Rear Panel Inputs, Le., instruments
with Front Inputs only.
Specification: Refer to Table 1-1, HI' Model 5334A/B Specifications, for Frequency Response and
specifications and two different frequency settings.
80 MHz and 100 MHz, dc coupled, 1 Megohm

80 MHz and 100 MHz, ac coupled, 1 Megohm
REF IN
5334A1B A 8660A/C
UNIVERSAL 500 FEEDTHROUGH SIGNAL GENERATOR
COUNTER
Figure 4-4. Channel A Frequency and Sensitivity Setup, 80 MHz-100 MHz
Equipment:
Signal Generator HI' 8660A/C
Procedure:
1. Set the signal generator as follows:
Frequency , .. " 80 MHz

Amplitude , '" 35 mV rms
Reinitialize the S334A/B.
FUNCTION FREQ A
SENS ON
4-18
HP 5334A1B
Performance Tests
3. Connect the signal generator to the HP 5334A/B Input A using a 50 Ohm feedthrough
connector as shown in Figure 4-4.
VERIfY: The Counter displays 80 MHz ± 2 Hz.
Frequency , 100 MHz

Amplitude 35 mV rms
VERIFY: The Counter displays 100 MHz ± 2 Hz.
Frequency 80 MHz
Amplitude " 35 mV rms
AC ON
Frequency 100 MHz

Amplitude 35 mV rms
Frequency 80 MHz
Amplitude " , 35 mV rms
NOTE
Remove the 50 Ohm feedthrough connector.
son ON
4-19
HP 5334MB
Performance Tests
Frequency 100 MHz

Amplitude 35 mV rms
failure: If any of these tests fail, refer to Section V, Adjustments, paragraphs 5-16 and 5-18 as a first
4-34. CHANNEL B FREQUENCY RESPONSE AND SENSITIVITY TEST,

ao MHz-l00 MHz (For
Non-Option 060 Instruments)
This test is for instruments that do not contain Option 060 Rear Panel Inputs, I.e., instrument with
Front Inputs only.
80 MHz and 100 MHz, dc coupled, 1 Megohm

REF IN
5334A/B 8 8660A/C
UNIVERSAL ~50ll FEEOTHROUGH SIGNAL GENERA TOR
COUNTER
Figure 4-5. Channel 8 Frequency and Sensitivity Setup, 80 MHz-lOO MHz
Equipment:
Signal Generator HP 8660AlC
Procedure:
Frequency " , 80 MHz

Amplitude 35 mV rms
4-20
HP 5334A1B
Performance Tests
FUNCTION FREQ B
SENS ON
3. Connect the signal generator to the HP 5334A/B Input B using a 50 Ohm feedthrough
connector as shown in Figure 4-5.
"'1Hz in paragraph 4-33, step 4.
Failure: If any of these tests fail, referto Section V, Adjustments, paragraphs 5-17 and 5-19 as a first
4-35. CHANNEl. A FREQUENCY RESPONSE AND SENSITIVITY HST,

80 MHz-lOll MHz (For Option 060 Instruments)
This test is for instrument that contain the Option 060 Rear Panel Inputs, i.e., instruments with
both Front and Rear Inputs.
Spedficalion: Refer to Table 1-1, HP Model 5334A/B Specifications, for Option 060 Frequency
Response and Sensitivity specifications.
80 "'1Hz and 100 "'1Hz, de coupled, 1 Megohm

80 "'1Hz and 100 "'1Hz, ac coupled, 1 Megohm
REAR REF IN
A 8
n n REF OUT
I
Igg
10 Q!DoollPo
00000
DODlggIDOD~
DOOEOOODO •
0 0@
0
0
JI
5334A/B A 8660A/C
UNIVERSAL SIGNAL GENERATOR
COUNTER
Figure 4-6. Channel A Frequency and Sensitivity Setup for Option 060
4-21
HP 5334A1B
Performance Tests
Equipment:
Signal Generator HP 8660A/C
Procedure:
Frequency 80 MHz
Amplitude '" 50 mY rms
FUNCTION , , .. " , , " ., . .. . .. FREQ A

SENS ON
3. Connect 50 Ohm feedthroughs or terminations on the rear panel A and B Inputs.
4. Connect the signal generator to the HP 5334A/B front panel Input A as shown in Figure 4-
6.
Frequency 100 MHz

Amplitude " ," '" 50 mY rms
Frequency " , 80 MHz

Amplitude " " 50 mY rms
AC ON
Frequency " .. .. 100 MHz

Amplitude '.' " '" 50 mY rms
4-22
HI' 5334A1B
Performance Tests
failure: If any of these tests fail, referto Section V, Adjustments, paragraphs S-16 and 5-18 as a first
4-36. CHANNEL B FREQUENCY RESPONSE AND SENSiTIVITY TEST,

80 MHz-100 MHz (For Option 060 Instruments)
This test is for instruments that contain the Option 060, i.e., instruments with both Front and Rear
Inputs.
Spedfication: Refer to Table 1-1, HI' Model S334A/B Specifications, for Option 060 Frequency
Response and Sensitivity specifications.
specifications and two different frequency sellings.
80 MHz and 100 MHz, de coupled, 1 Megohm

REF IN
5334A1B B 8660A/C
UNIVERSAL SIGNAL GENERATOR
COUNTER
Figure 4-7. Channel B Frequency and Sensitivity Setup for Option 060
Equipment:
Signal Generator HI' 8660A/C
Procedure:
Frequency 80 MHz
Amplitude 50 mV rms
FUNCTION , .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. FREQ B
SENS ON
4-23
HP 5334A/B
Performance Tests
3. Connect 50 Ohm feedthroughs or terminations on the rear panel A and B Inputs.
4. Connect the signal generator to the HP 5334A/B front panel Input Bas shown in Figure 4-
7.
MHz in paragraph 4-35, step 5.
failures: If any of these tests fail, refer to Section V, Adjustments, paragraph 5-17 and 5-19 as a first
4-37. PERIOD A TEST
Specification: Refer to Table 1-1, HP Model 5334A/B Specifications, for Period A specifications.
Description: The minimum specified period measurement of 10 ns is verified using a 100 MHz
input signal.
REF IN
REF OUT
I a 0looollfO~nr
5334A1B
00000
A
~O
nOgl~GJI
ClOD 000000
000 000000. • 0
0
8660A/C
UNIVERSAL
COUNTER
~50n FEEDTHROUGH SIGNAL GENERATOR
Figure 4-8. Period A Test Setup
Equipment:
Procedure:
Frequency 100 MHz

Amplitude , 50 mV rms
NOTE
OPTION 060
If the HP 5334A/B has Option 060 (rear panel inputs), terminate

the unused Channel A input (front or rear) with a 50 Ohm load.
4-24
HP 5334A/B
Performance Tests
2. Set the HP 5334A/B as follows;
FUNCTION PERIOD A
GATE TIME 1 Second
SENS ON
3. Connect the signal generator output to the HP 5334A/B Input A using a 50 Ohm
NOTE
Do not use a 50 Ohm feedthrough connector at the Input for

Counters with Option 060.
VERIFY, The Counter displays 10 ns ± .0000001 ns.
4. Record the Period A measurement on the Performance Test Record Card, line 33.
Failure' If the instrument under test does not meet the test specification, consider performing
the adjustments in Section V of the Service Manual as a first step in correcting the problem.
4-38. PULSE WIDTH A TEST
Spedfication, Refer to Table 1-1, HP Model 5334A/B Specifications, for Pulse Width A
specifications.
Description' A pulse width is generated and then measured with the HP S334A1B to verify the
Counter's performance.
REF IN
REF OUT
I'
~Iio~r0°1°iool o~[~r
000000000
O\OIJOllJO 000
·00 DOD
0
W
I i
,00 •
@I@ 13 01
5334A1B A 8660A/C
UNIVERSAL ~50n FEEDTHRQUGH SIGNAL GENERATOR
COUNTER
Figure 4-9. Pulse Width A Test Setup
4-25
HP 5334A1B
Performance Tests
Equipment:
Procedure:
Frequency " 100 MHz

Amplitude 200 mV rms
FUNCTION PULSE WIDTH A
NOTE
OPTION 060
If the HP 5334A/B has Option 060 (rear panel inputs), terminate

the unused Channel A input (front or rear) with a 50 Ohm load.
3. Connect the signal generator output to the HP 5334A/B Input A using a 50 Ohm
NOTE
Do not use a 50 Ohm feedthrough connector at the Input for

Counters with Option 060.
VERIFY: The Counter displays 5 ns ± 4 ns.
4. Record the pulse width measurement on the Performance Test Record Card, line 34.
Failure: If the instrument under test does not meet the test specification, consider performing
the adjustments in Section V of the Service manual as a first step in correcting the problem.
4-39. TIME INTERVAL A TO B TEST
Specification: Refer to Table 1-1, HP Model 5334A/B Specifications, for Time Interval A to B
specification.
Description: Time Interval measuring accuracy is verified using a known generated signal.
4-26
HI" 5334MB
Performance Tests
REF I.N
REF OUT
1° 010
5334A1B
0 0ll~
cool
00000 °n° ~n·W
0001 0 0'0000
~jl~ 0 oi 0 o
A
DO CD
@,," @ 0
3325A
!
~
UNIVERSAL FUNCTION GENERATOR
COUNTER
Figure 4-10. Time Interval A to B Test Setup

Equipment:
Function Generator , HI" 3325A
Procedure:
Frequency 5 MHz
Amplitude 200 mV p-p
, Function Square Wave
•
2. Set the HI" 5334A/B as follows:
Relnltlallze the 5334MB.
FUNCTION T.1. A - B
COM A ON
100 GATE AVERAGE ON
SENS ON
I A & B TRIG/SENS controls fully cw
CHAN A and B son ON
CHAN B Negative SLOPE ON (falling edge)
I
3. Connect the function generator output to the HI" 5334A/B Input A.
VERIFY: The Counter displays 100 ns ± 6 ns.
4. Record the Time Interval measurement on the Performance Test Record, line 35.
Failure: If the Instrument under test does not meet the test specification, consider performing
the adjustments In Section V of the Service Manual as a first step In correcting the problem.
4-40. TIME INTERVAL A TO B DElAY TEST

Specification: Refer to Table 1-1, HI" Model 5334A/B Specifications, for T.1. A to B Delay
specification.
Description: Operation of the time Interval delay circuitry Is verified by Introducing a delay into a
frequency measurement.
1 4-27
HP 5334A!B
Performance Tests
REF IN
REF OUT
~nllio 1o~I~GJI
1
100
000000000
1 0 •
DICHJOlIg~ ggg~O!O@ClOOD ~
5334A/B A 3325A
COUNTER
Figure 4-11. Time Interval A to B Delay Test Setup
Equipment:
Procedure:
Frequency 100 Hz
Amplitude 200 mV pop
Function Square Wave
Reinitialize the HP 5334A!B.
FUNCTION T.!. A - B DELAY

GATE TIME DELAy 9 ms
SENS ON
A & B TRIG/SENS control fully cw
COM A ON
CHAN A & B 50n ON
CHAN B Negative SLOPE ON (falling edgei
3. Connect the fu nction generator output to the HP 5334A/B Input A.
4. Press SINGLE CYCLE on the HP 5334A!B.
VERIFY: The Counter displays 15 ms ± 1001's.
5. Record the Time Interval Delay measurement on the Performance Test Record, line 36.
Failure: If the instrument under test does not meet the test specification, consider performing
4-41. RATIO AlB TEST
Specification: Refer to Table 1-1, HP Model 5334A/B Specifications, for RatioA/B specification.
4-28
HP 5334A1B
Performance Tests
Description: Two different frequencies are applied to the A and B inputs. The ratio of the A and B
inputs will be displayed.
REF IN
REF OUT
~lr 1[;]
oo
0
Jloo
5334A1B
IrDOD DOOOO
Cl~OOlffiCl DOD DDQOD
ODD
"
A
g ;J!.~
B
o
3325A
COUNTER
Figure 4-12. Ratio A/B Test Setup
Equipment:
Procell",e:
Frequency. . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. .. . . . . . . . . . .. 5 MHz
I Amplitude 100 m V rms
Function Sine Wave
Reinitialize the HP 5334A1B.
FUNCTION RATIO AlB

SENS ON
A & B TRIG/SENS control.. . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. fully cW
CHAN A & B son ON
3. Connect HP 5334A/B TIME BASE signal to Input A and connect the function generator
signal to Input B.
VERIFY: The Counter displays 2.000000 ± 000 001.
4. Record the Ratio A/B measurement on the Test Record Card, line 37.
failure: If the instrument under test does not meet the test specification, consider performing
4-42. RISE/fAU. TIME A TEST

Specification: Refer to Table 1-1, HP Model 5334A/B Specifications, for the Rise/Fall
,I specifications.
4-29
HP 5334A/B
Performance Tests
Description: The Rise/Fall time function of the HP 5334A/B is exercised at several different
frequencies and slope settings.
REF 1N
REF OUT
5334A1B
~ g~llgOolg gloo~l~w
0loo!Jil~o 0001000000
00 0001
A
0.0CD
• 0
0
I3325A
]
COUNTER
Figure 4-13. Rise/Fall Time A Test Setup

Equipment:
Procedure:
Frequency , .. 10 MHz
Amplitude 500 mV p-p
Function Sine Wave
FUNCTION RISE/FALL A
CHANNEL A son ON
3. Connect the function generator signal to the HP 5334A/B Input A.
VERIFY: The Counter displays 30 ns ± 10 ns (Rise Time).

4. Record the rise measurement on the Performance Test Record Card, line 38.
CHAN A Negative SLOPE ON (falling edge)
VERIFY: The Counter displays 30 ns ± 10 ns (Fall Time).
6. Record the fall measurement on the Performance Test Record Card, line 39.
Frequency 100 Hz
Amplitude 1V p-p
Function Negative Ramp
4-30
HP 5334A1B
Performance Tests
VERifY: The Counter displays 8 ms ± 0.6 ms (Fall Time).
8. Record the fall measurement on the Performance Test Record Card, line 40.
I Function Positive Ramp
CHAN A Negative SLOPE OFF (rising edge)
VERIFY: The Counter displays 8 ms ± 0.6 ms (Rise Time).
11. Record the rise measurement on the Performance Test Record Card, line 41.
failure: If the instrument under test does not meet the test specification, consider performing
4-43. DVM ACCURACY TEST (Options 020 and 050 - HP 5334A only)
Specification: Refer to Table 1-1, HP Model 5334A/B Specifications, for DVM specifications.
Description: Accuracy measurements are made on the DVM option of the HP 5334A.
FLUKE 343A
5334A DC STANDARD
UNIVERSAL COUNTER
1° I t n ~[;]
00000
D
coo 000000
cloooll~o 000 000000
111 0
0 •
@ @ to 0
DVM
]
Figure 4-14. DVM Accuracy Test Setup

Equipment:
DC Voltage Standard FLUKE 343A
Procedure:
1. Set the DC Standard as follows:
Voltage 4.0000V
2. Set the HP 5334A as follows:
FUNCTION DVM
4-31
HP 5334A1B
Performance Tests
3. Place a jumper across the inputs of the DVM to short them them together.
VERIFY: The Counter displays OV ± 8 mV.
4. Record the DVM measurement on the Performance Test Record Card, line 42.
5. Remove jumper from DVM inputs and connect the DC Standard to the HP 5334A DVM
inputs.
VERIFY: The Counter displays 4.000V ± O.OlOV.
7. Switch the polarity of the DC input signal.
VERIFY: The Counter displays - 4.000V ± O.OlOV.
Voltage 40.000V
VERIFY: The Counter displays 40.00V ± O.lOV.
VERIFY: The Counter displays - 40.00V ± O.lOV.
I WARNING J
THE FOLLOWING STEP REQUIRES HIGH VOLTAGE. EXTREME
CARE SHOULD BE EXERCISED.
Voltage 400.00V
VERIFY: The Counter displays 400.0V ± OAV.
14. Record the DVM me"surement on the Performance Test Record Card, line 47.
VERIFY: The Counter displays -400.0V ± OAV.
17. Reset the DC Standard to 4.0000V.
4-32
HP 5334A1B
Performan ce Tests
failure: Perform Section V, Adjustments, paragraphs 5-23, 5-24, and 5-25.
4-44. CHANNEL C FREQUENCY RESPONSE AND

SENSITIVITY TEST - HP 5334A
This test is for HP 5334As containing Options 030 and 050.
Specification: Refer to Table 1-1, HP Model 5334A/B Specifications, for the Channel C
specifications.
Description: Channel C is tested at various frequencies and signal levels.
REF IN
REF OUT
Ie
5334A
~rnl~
coo
l'JIOOOIWo
0
000000
oooooo@o
UNIVERSAL COUNTER
1""1
oeo 000000
0
WW
C ~8NC(m) TO N(m) 8660A/C
SIGNAL GENERATOR 1"- N(m) TO BN(f}
~8481A
10 dB
OPTION 010
ATTENUATOR
N(f) TO BNC(f)
Figure 4-15. HP 5334A Channel C Frequency and Sensitivity Setup
Equipment:

10 dB Attenuator HP 8491A
Adapter N(m) to BNC(m) HP 1250-0082
Adapter N(f) to BNC(f) HP 1250-1474
Adapter N(m) to BNCif) HP 1250-0780
Procedure:
Frequency 90 MHz
Amplitude -13.5 dBm
NOTE
This amplitude provides 15 mV rms to the Channel C Inputwhen

using the 10 dB attenuator.
FUNCTION FREQ C
CHANNEL C SENSITIVITY control fully cw
4-33
HP 5334A1B
Performance Tests
3. Connect the signal generator output to the HP 5334A Input C through a 10 dBattenuator.
NOTE
The 10 dB attenuator is used here for impedance matching.
VERIFY: The Counter displays 90.0 MHz ± 2 Hz.
Frequency , , . . .. 200 MHz

Amplitude -13.5 dBm
NOTE
This amplitude provides 15 mV rms to the Channel C Input when

Frequency , . .. 1000 MHz

Amplitude +0.5 dBm
NOTE
This amplitude will provide 75 mV rms to the Channel C Input

when using the 10 dB attenuator.
Frequency " " . . . . . . .. 1300 MHz

Amplitude +0.5 dBm
NOTE

4-34
HP 5334A1B
Performance Tests
Failure: Perform Section V, Adjustments.
4-45. CHANNEL C FREQUENCY RESPONSE AND

SENSITIVITY TEST - HP 53348
This test is for HP 5334Bs containing Option 030.
Specification: Refer to Table 1-1, HP Model 5334A/B Specifications, for the Channel C
specifications.
Description: Channel C is tested at various frequencies and signal levels.
REF IN
C °ICCIO D
REF OUT
~6~gg
C cc
o ODoeoe
0000000
000
.
5334B
UNIVERSAL COUNTER
C ~8NC(m) TO N(m) 8660A/C
SlGNAL GENERA TOR "- N(m) TO BN(f')
~849IA
10 dB
OPTION ala
ATTENUATOR
N(f) TO BNC(f)
Figure 4-16. HP 53348 Channel C Frequency and Sensitivity Setup
Equipment:

10 dB Attenuator HP 8491A
Adapter Nlm) to BNCim) HP 1250-0082
Adapter Nlf) to BNClf) HP 1250-1474
Adapter N(m) to BNCif) HP 1250-0780
Procedure:
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 90 MHz
Amplitude -13.5 dBm
NOTE

4-35
HP 5334A!B
Performance Tests
2. Set the HP 5334B as follows:
Reinitialize the 5334B.
FUNCTION. . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . ...... FREQ C
3. Connect the signal generator output to the HP 5334B Input C through a 10 dB attenuator.
NOTE
The 10 dB attenuator is used here for impedance matching.
Frequency , 200 MHz

Amplitude -13.5 dBm
NOTE

Frequency 1000 MHz

Amplitude , +0.5 dBm
NOTE
This amplitude will provide 75 mV rms to the Channel C Input

when using the 10 dB attenuator.
Frequency 2000 MHz

Amplitude " +0.5 dBm
4-36
HP 5334A1B
Performance Tests
NOTE

using the 10 dB attenuatar.

1
Failure: Perform Section V, Adjustments.
4-37
HP 5334A/B
Performance Tests
4-3B
HP 5334A!B
Performance Tests
Table 4-2. HP 5334A/B Performance Test Record Card
PERFORMANCE TEST RECORD (Page 1 of 3)

HEWLETT-PACKARD MODEL 5334A1B
UNIVERSAL COUNTER Repair/Work Order No.
Serial Number: Temperature:
Test Performed By: Relative Humidity:

Date: Post Calibration Test: 0
Notes: Pre Calibration Test: 0
RESULTS
PARA.
NO. TEST DESCRIPTION LINE NO. MiNIMUM ACTUAL MAXIMUM
4-31. CHANNEL A FREQUENCY RESPONSE

AND SENSITIVITY TEST, 10 Hz-20 MHz
Input conditions:
15 mV rms 10 Hz 1. 9.07 10.03
DC coupled
1 Megohm 20 MHz 2. 19.97 20.03
15 mV rms 30 Hz 3. 29.97 30.03
AC coupled
1 Megohm 20 MHz 4. 19.97 20.03
15 mV rms 1 MHz 5. 999999.96 1000000.04
AC coupled
50 Ohm 20 MHz 6. 19.97 20.03
4-32. CHANNEL B FREQUENCY RESPONSE

AND SENSITIVITY TEST, 10 Hz-20 MHz
Input conditions:
15 mV rms 10 Hz 7. .07 10.03
DC coupled
1 Megohm 20 MHz 8. 19.97 20.03
I
( 15 mV rms
AC coupled
30 Hz 9. 29.97 30.03
l 1 Megohm 20 MHz 10. 19.97 20.03
t
!
15 mV rms
AC Coupled
50 Ohm
1 MHz
20 MHz
11.
12.
999999.96
19.97
1000000.04
20.03
!
f
r AND SENSITIVITY TEST. 80 MHz-100 MHz
I (For Non-Option 060 Instruments, i.e.,
Front Inputs only)
f
Input conditions:
35 mV rms 80 MHz 13. 79999998.00 80000002.00
DC coupled
1 Megohm 100 MHz 14. 99999998.00 100000002.00
35 mV rms 80 MHz 15. 79999998.00 80000002.00
AC coupled
1 Megohm 100 MHz 16. 99999998.00 100000002.00
35 mV rms 80 MHz 17. 79999998.00 80000002.00
AC coupled
50 Ohm 100 MHz 18. 99999998.00 100000002.00
4-39
HP 5334A/B
Performance Tests
Table 4-2. HP 5334A/B Performance Test Record Card (Continued)
HP 5334A/B PERFORMANCE TEST RECORD (Page 2 of 3)

RESULTS
PARA.
NO. TEST DESCRIPTION LINE NO. MINIMUM ACTUAL MAXIMUM

AND SENSITIVITY TEST,80 MHz-100 MHz
(For Non-Option 060 Instruments, i.e.,
Front inputs only)
Input conditions:
35 mV rms 80 MHz 19. 79999998.00 80000002.00
DC coupled
1 Megohm 100 MHz 20. 99999998.00 100000002.00
35 mV rms 80 MHz 21. 79999998.00 80000002.00
AC coupled
1 Megohm 100 MHz 22. 99999998.00 100000002.00
35 mV rms 80 MHz 23. 79999998.00 80000002.00
AC coupled
50 Ohm 100 MHz 24. 99999998.00 100000002.00

AND SENSITIVITY TEST, 80 MHz-1 00 MHz
(For Option 060 Instruments, i.e.,
Front and Rear Inputs)
Input conditions:
I,
50 mV rms 80 MHz 25. 79999998.00 80000002.00
DC coupled
I
1 Megohm 100 MHz 26. 99999998.00 100000002.00
50 mV rms 80 MHz 27. 79999998.00 80000002.00
AC coupled
1 Megohm 100 MHz 28. 99999998.00 100000002.00

AND SENSITIVITY TEST, 80 MHz-100 MHz
(For Option 060 Instruments, i;e.,
Front and Rear Inpuls)
Input conditions:
50 mV rms 80 MHz 29. 79999998.00 80000002.00
DC coupled
1 Megohm 100 MHz 30. 99999998.00 100000002.00
50 mV rms 80 MHz 31. 79999998.00 80000002.00
AC coupled
1 Megohm 100 MHz 32. 99999998.00 100000002.00
4-37. PERIOD A TEST

50 mV rms, 100 MHz, sine wave 33, 9.9999999 ns 10.0000001 ns
4-38. PULSE WIDTH A TEST

200 mV rms, 100 MHz, sine wave 34. 1 ns 9 ns
4-39. TIME INTERVAL A TO B TEST

200 mV pop, 5 MHz, square wave 35. 94 ns 106 ns
4-40. TIME INTERVAL A TO B DELAY TEST

200 mV pop, 100 Hz, square wave 36. 14.9 ms 15.1 ms
4-40
HP 5334A!B
Performance Tests
Table 4-2. HP 5334A/B Performance Test Record Card (Continued)
HP 5334A1B PERFORMANCE TEST RECORD (Page 3 of 3)
I
PARA.
NO. TEST DESCRIPTION LINE NO. MINIMUM
RESULTS
ACTUAL MAXIMUM
4-41. RATIO AlB

100 mV rms, 5 MHz, sine wave 37 1.999999 2.000001
4-42. RISE/FALL TIME A TEST

500 mV p-p, 100 MHz, sine wave
{rise) 38. 20 ns 40 ns
ifaUi 39. 20 ns 40 ns
(faU) 40. 7.4 ms 8.6 ms
ifall) 41. 7.4 ms 8.6 ms
4-43. DVM ACCURACY TEST (5334A only)

DC Voltage Standard, 4.0000V
42. -8 mV +8mV
43. +3.990V +4.010V
44. -3.990V -4.010V
45. +39.90V +40.10V
46. -39.90V -40.10V
47. +399.6V +400.4V
48. -399.6V -400.4V
4-44. CHANNEL C FREQUENCY RESPONSE

AND SENSITIVITY TEST (5334A)
-13.5 dBm, 90 MHz 49. 89999998 90000002
-13.5 dBm, 200 MHz 50. 199999997 200000003
1-0.5 dBm, 1000 MHz 51. 999999980 1000000020
+0.5 dBm, 1300 MHz 52. 1299999980 1300000020
4-45. CHANNEL C FREQUENCY RESPONSE

AND SENSITIVITY TEST (533413)
-13.5 dBm, 90 MHz 53. 89999998 90000002
-13.5 dBm, 200 MHz 54. 199999997 200000003
+0.5 dBm, 1000 MHz 55. 999999980 1000000020
to.5 dBm, 1300 MHz 56. 1299999980 1300000020
4-41
HP 5334A1B
Performance Tests
4-42
II
HP 5334A1B
Performance Tests
4-46. HP-IB VERIFICATION TEST

4-47. The following test checks the Counter's ability to process or send the HP-IB Messages
(Meta Messages) described in Table 3-9. During the test, all of the Counter's HP-IB data
input!output bus, control, and handshake lines are checked. Only the Counter, an HP 85A or 85B
I controller, an HP-IB interface with appropriate cabling, and an HP-IB Verification Cassette, HP
PIN 59300-10002, Revision G (or later) are needed for the test setup.
4-48. The validity of these checks is based on the following assumptions:
• The Counter operates correctly from the front panel. This can be verified by performing
the Operational Verification Tests beginning with paragraph 4-12.
• The controller properly executes HP-IB operations.
• The HP-IB interface properly transfers the controller's instructions.
4-49. If the Counter appears to fail any of the HP-IB checks, the validity of the above assumptions
should be confirmed before servicing the Counter.
4-50. The select code of the controller's 1/0 is assumed to be 7. The address of the controller is
assumed to be 21. This select code-address combination, (i.e., 721) is necessary for these checks to
be valid. The program lines presented here would have to be modified for any other combination.
The HP 5334A/B is shipped from factory with address set to 03.
4-51. If all of these checks are performed successfully, the Counter's HP-IB capability can be
considered to be performing properly. These procedures do not check whether or not all 01 the
Counter's program commands are being properly interpreted and and executed by the
instrument, however, i!the front panel operation is confirmed to be working properly and its HP-
IB capability operates correctly, then there is a high probability that the Counter will respond
properly to all of its program commands.
HP 85
DESKTOP
COMPUTER
HP 00085·15003
/110 ROM
,Q
• i : HP 82936A
HP 5334A1B ROM DRAWER
UNIVERSAL
COUNTER // ....... HP 82903A
16K MEMORY
//
MODULE
HP 82937A
INTERFACE
CARD/CABLE
Figure 4-17. HP-IB Verification Test Setup
4-43
HP 5334A1B
Performance Tests
Equipment:
Controller, , , , " , , , , , , , " " HP 85A or 85B

ROM Drawer , , , ",." HP 82936A
I/O ROM "" .. " "" "".,....... HP 00085-15003
16K Memory Module.(85A only) .,.,.".,.", HP 82903A
HP-IB Interface Card/Cable., .... ", ..... " " HP 82937A
Procedure:
The HP 85 program is listed in Table 4-4, It is an interactive program and almost completely self-
explanatory. The program may be keyed into the HP 85 or loaded from an HP-IB Verification
Cassette.
1, Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 4-17,
2, To run the program, insert the cassette in the HP 85 and power-up the controller. If the
controller is already ON, insert the cassette and type:
CHAIN"Autost"
then press END LINE.
3, Press the soft key corresponding to HP 5334A/B, and follow the instructions displayed on
the HP 85 screen.
4, The program automatically starts and displays the program title, then the folloWing
checkpoint summary:
"******1111 Ill! JE II ****************"11 Ill! Illl
CHECKPOINT SUMMARY
II II If JI II II ****************** 1I111l1[ Ill! J[ ***

1 Power-up Preset
2 Remote, Local, Local Lockout
3 Function Select
4 Input Conditioning - Channel A
5 Input Conditioning - Channel B
6 Trigger Levels
7 Gate Time
8 External Arming
9 Math Functions
10 Memory Recall (HP 5334A only)
11 Service Request
12 Status Byte
13 Send Error Code
14 High Speed Output
5, The next screen provides the option to receive a printed version of this summary,
6, Equipment set-up instructions are provided (with reference made to the manual), then
the HP 85 searches for the address of the HP 5334A/B, This search eliminates the need to
4-44
HP 5334A!B
Performance Tests
set the HP 5334A/B to a particular HP-IB address and thus, allows an arbitrary address
setting. If the address is not found, one or more of the following may be the cause:
HP 5334A/B - not powered-up

- in TALK ONLY mode (Addr 50)
Interface - not connected

- defective
Address of
HP 5334A/B - set to 721 (controiler address)
- set to 731-749 (not valid addresses)
7. After these initial steps, the program begins the checkpoint execution. The HP 85 display
provides the description and operator instructions as each checkpoint is performed.
8. At the end of most of the checkpoints, the HP 85 displays the following prompt:
Press the softkey corresponding

to the results of this
checkpoint
PASS - Press K1 to indicate that

the 5334A/B passed.
FAIL - Press K4 to indicate that

the 5334A/B failed.
PASS FAIL
9. As instructed, pressed the soft key corresponding to the checkpoint results.
10. For checkpoints 11, 12, and 13, one of the following messages will be displayed instead of
the above message:
The HP 85 has verified that the

5334A/B passed this checkpoint.
or
The HP 85 has verified that the

5334A/B failed this checkpoint.
As indicated, the HP 85 has been instructed to verify the results of the checkpoint and
display its decision.
4-45
r
,r
HP 5334MB
Performance Tests
11. The next screen displayed by the HP 85 is shown below:
Press a soft key to select the

desired checkpoint
NEXT - Press K1 to perform the

next checkpoint.
REPEAT - Press K3 to repeat this

checkpoint.
GOTO# - Press K4 to select an

arbitrary checkpoint.
NEXT REPEAT GOTO#
12. The format of the program allows the user to proceed in a sequential order to the next
checkpoint, repeat the present checkpoint, or go to an arbitrary checkpoint.
13. When "GO TO #" has been selected, the following prompt occurs:
Enter checkpoint number desired

(0 to 14), and press END LINE
(0 TERMINATES PROGRAM).
?
14. Entering a number other than 0 causes that checkpoint to be executed. If 0 is entered, the
program terminates by displaying the checkpoint results, and providing the option to
receive a printed version. An example of the printed checkpoint results is shown below:
U 1f1llfMUIIllIIlillII1l1l1l1I1I1IIIU 1I111lll Mil U+I*,***
CHECKPOINT RESULTS
FOR HP-IB ADDRESS 703
1111 II II II II II l( It II If 11111111 llil 11**************
CHECKPOINT 1 PASS
2 PASS
3 PASS
4 FAIL
5 NOT PERFORMED
6 PASS
7 PAss
8 NOT PERFORMED
9 PASS
10 FAIL
11 NOT PERFORMED
12 NOT PERFORMED
13 PASS
14 FAIL
4-46
HP 5334A1B
Performance Tests
Table 4-3. HP 5334A/B HP-IB Verification Test Record Card
Hewlett-Packard Company Tested By

Model 5334A/B Universal Counter
Serial Number Date
PARAGRAPH NO. TEST RESULTS
4-46. HP-IB Test Attach results here
1. Power~up Preset
2. Remote, Local, Local Lockout
3. Function Select
4. Input Conditioning - Channel A
5. Input Conditioning - Channel B
6. Trigger Levels
7. Gate Time
8. External Arming
9. Math Functions
10. Memory Recall (HP 5334A only)
11. Service Request
12. Status Byte
13. Send Error Code
14. High Speed Output
4-47
HP 5334A1B
Performance Tests
Table 4-4. HP-IB Operational Verification Program Listing
10 ! ****** HP 5334A/8 ******

20 HP-I B OPERA Tl ON
30 VERIFICATION PROGRAM
40
50 ! JD
60 DATE : 15 11ARCH 1387
70 REVISION B
80 I
SO ! This prograM exercises the 5334A/B through the Majority
100 I of its cOMMand code set via HP-IB. The prograM consists
110 I of 14 checkpoints, and provide5 the user with the abllIty
120 I to execute and repeat these tests in any order.
i30 Also provided are options to print the checkpoint
140 SUMMary and results. The prograM relies heaVIly on
150 5ubroutines in addition to arrays and siMple variables.
160 I
170 VARIABLE TABLE
180 A ( Addl-es 5 )
i 90 B (Byte InforMation)
200 I C (CRT statu5)
210 I o (DecIsion)
220 E (Error value)
230 F (OPT 700 FLAG)
240 {Loop variable)
250 ! J (Loop var'iable)
260 I L (TrIgger levels)
270 ) M (SRQ Byte inforMation)
280 i R (Result variable)
290 ! R( ) (Pesul t array)
2,00 S ( St ep nUMber~)
3i0 v (Value of byte I
X( ) (High Speed Data array)!
330
340 NORMAL
350 I DIMENSION AND INITIALIZE STRING VARIABLE ARRAYS
360 DIM A$[30] ,B$[30] ,C$[351 ,O$[35J ,E$[30J ,F$[30] ,G$[30] ,H$[35J
370 DIM R$[301 ,S$[301
380 0111 I$[35J,J$[IOJ,K$[101,l$[21],M$[2IJ,N$[10],R(141,XI51,X$[300]
390 A$-"Pre •• CONT to perforM test."
400 8$=j'Pres5 CONT when ready.'L
410 C$="Verify that 5334A/8 front panel"
420 O$="Verify that 5334A/B display"
430 E$-"After pre.SIng CONT, "
440 FS="Pres5 CONT for next display."
450 6$=" CHECKPOINT "
460 H$="********************************"
470
480 !~OR 1=1 TO 14
490 R( I )=0
500 NEXT I
510 CRT IS
4-48
HP 5334A1B
Performance Tests
Table 4-4. HP-IB Operational Verification Program Listing (Continued)
520 C=1
530 ENABLE K8D 1+32
540 I
550 DISPLAY TITLE, CHECKPOINT LIST AND SETUP INSTRUCTIONS
560 BEEP
570 CLEAR
580 OISP USING "5/"
580 OISP H$
600 OISP
6100ISP 5334A/B HP-IB OPERATION"
620 OISP VERIFICATION PROSRAM"
630 OISP
640 OISP H$
650 IJISP
660 "AIT 2500
670 OLEAR
680 OISP USINS "51"
690 OISP H$
700 OISP
710 IJISP CHECKPOINT SUMMARY"
720 OISP
730 OISP H$
740 OISP
750 IF C=2 THEN 780
760 "AIT 2000
770 CLEAR
780 OISP Power-up Preset"
7800lSP 2 ReMote, Local, Local Lockout"
800 DISP 3 Function Select"
810 OISP 4 Input Conditioning-Channel A"
820 OISP 5 Input Conditioning-Channel B"
830 OISP 6 TrIgger Levels"
840 OISP 7' Gate TIMe"
850 OISP 8 External ArMing"
860 OISP 8 Math Functions"
870 OISP "10 MeMory Recall (53341\ only)"
880 OISP "II Service Request"
880 OISP "12 Status 8yte"
900 OISP "13 Send Error Code"
810 OISP "14 High Speed Output"
920 IF C=2 THEN OISP USING "51," @ GOTO 1090
930 OISP usms "it,K,I," ; F$
940 PAUSE
950 CLEAR
960 DISP "Would you like a printed versionof the checkpoint sUMMary?"
970 OISP
980 DISP "YES - Press K1 to receive a printed version."
980 DISr
1000 OISP "NO - Press K4 to proceed."
1010 ON f:EYit 1,," YES" GO TO 1050
I020 ON KEY# 4" NO" GOTO 1110
4-49
HP 5334A1B
Performance Tests
1030 ,:Ef LABEL

1040 GOTO 1040
1050 CLEAR
1060 CRT IS 2
1070 C=2
1080 GOTO 690
1090 CRT lSI
1100 C=1
1110 CLEAR
1120 OISP "The HP 85 should have an I/O ROMln ,ts ROM Drawer, a 16K MeMory"
1130 DISP "Module, and an 82937A HP-IB Interface Card/Cable,"
11400ISP
1150 DISP 'Connect the HP-IB Interface to the rear panel of the HP 5334A/B'
1160 OISP "and power-up the ,nstruMent,"
11700ISP
1180 OISP 'Consult the HP 5334A/B Operatlngand PrograMM,ng Menual for"
1190 OISP "addlt'onal InforMat'on,"
12000ISP
1210 DISP B$
1220 PAUSE
1230 CLEAR
1240 I
1250 I TEST FOR OPTION 700
1260 DISP
1270 OISP "Does ,nstruMent have OPTION 700 'nstalled?"
1280 OISP
1290 OISP "YES - Pres. K1"
1300 DISP
1310 DISP "NO - Press K4"
1320 ON KEY# 1," YES" GOTO 1370
1330 ON KEY' 4,' NO" GOTO 1380
1340 KEY LABEL
1350 GOTO 1350
1360 CLEAR
1370 F=1 @ GOTO 1390
13B0 F=2
1390 I INPUT 5334A/B ADDRESS
1400 CLEAR
1410 N$='NOT5334A/B"
1420 DISP "Input 5334A/B address"
1430 OISP
1440 DISP "ExaMple: 703"
1450 OISP
1460 OISP "Pres. END LINE after entry"
1470 INPUT A
1480 CLEAR
14S0 SET TIMEOUT 7;300
1500 IF F=2 THEN 1530
1510 OUTPUT A I"GAL'
1520 WAIT 1000
1530 REMOTE A
1540 OUTPUT A ;'10"
4-50
HP 5334A1B
Performance Tests
1550 ENTER A ; N$
1560 IF N$-"HP5334A" THEN 1770
1570 IF N$-"HP5334B" THEN 1770
1580 CLEAR A
1590 ABORTIO 7
1600 BEEP
1610 WAIT 250
1620 BEEP
1630 DISP "No response at that address"
1640 OISP
1650 OISP "Verify HP-IB connection, option configuration, the 5334A/B is on
1660 OISP "and not ,n the TALK ONLY Mode."
1670 OISP
1680 OISP "An ERROR Message on the 5334A/B denotes an INCORRECT answer"
1690 OISP "to OPTION 700 question ... "
1700 OISP
1710 DISP "If an ERROR occurred:"
1720 OISP H. Recheck option configuration"
1730 OISP ". Cycle power switch on 5334A/B"
1740 OISP ". Pres5 RUN to restart prograM"
1750 PAUSE
1760 GOTO 1400
1770 DISP
1780 DISP "HP 5334A/B found at address",A
1790 WAIT 3000
1800 CLEAR
1810 OISP
1820 OISP H* NOTE *** "
1830 OISP
1840 DISP "An ERROR Message on the 5334A/B denotes an INCORRECT answer "
1850 DISP "to OPTION 700 question ...
1860 DISP
1870 DISP "If an ERROR occurred:"
1880 OISP * Recheck option configuration"
1890 OISP * Cycle power switch on 5334A/B"
1500 OISP * Press RUN to restart prograM
1910 DISP
1920 OISP "Otherwise, pres. CONT"
1530 OISP
1540 PAUSE
~
1550 SET TIMEOUT 7; 0
1960 I
, 1970 I CHECf:POINT 1
1980 1$-" Power-up Preset"
l, 1990
2000
S-1
GOSUB 7810
2010 DISP "Toggle the 5334A/B line switch frOM ON to OFF, then back to ON."
I 2020
2030
2040
OISP
OISP "Ver,fy that all laMps turn on"
DISP "MOMentarily, the display flashes"
2050 01 SP "' HP 5334A' or 'HP 5334b', the"
4-51
HP 5334A/B
Performance Tests
2060 DISP 'HP-IB address, and the word"

2070 OISP "'PASS'"
2080 OISP B$
2030 PAUSE
2100 CLEAR
2110 DISP "The counter goes through an e,,,-tenslve self test on pOCJer up.
2120 DISP Illf any faIlures are found, they are iMMediately indicated with aFAIL
Message. "
2130 DISP
2140 IF F-l THEN 2170 I Opt10n 700 ln5talled.
2150 OISP "PRESET, Hz, FREQ A and AUTO TRIGannunciators are llt.'
2160 GOTO 2180
2170 DISP "PRESET, Hz, FREQ A, AUTO TRIG and DISABLE annunclators are llt."
2180 OISP
2180 DISP DII".hoCJ5
2200 DISP
22Hj DISP
2220 DISP USH,G "# Y ,i," FI
2230 PAUSE
2240 IF F=2 THEN 2260
2250 0UTPUT A I' GAL"
2260 GOTO 7960
227,) I
2260 I CHECkPOINT C
22%~ 1$=" ReMote, Local, Local Lockout"
2300 5'=2
2310 BOSUB 7810
2320 LOCAI_ 7
2330 A80RTIO 7
2340 DISP EI;"the 5334AiB"
2350 DISP "will be placed under reMote contrbl."
2360 50SUB 84S0
2370 REl"10TE r1
2380 CLEAR.
2390 DISP "Verify that the REMOTE and LISTEN status LEOs are lit."
2400 DISP
2410 OISP FI
2420 PAUSE
2430 CLEAR
2440 DISP E$; ;'the 5334A/8"
2450 OISP "wlll be placed ln the LOCi'lL LOCKOUT Mode.'
2460 50SUB 8480
2470 REMOTE A
2480 LOCAL LOCkOUT 7
2450 CLEAR
2500 OISP "Press the front panel LOCAL key to verify that the 5334A/B is ln
2510 DISP "LOCAL LOCKOUT and reMaln5 in REMOTE."
2520 OISP
253Q) 0 I SP F$
;;540 PAUSE
;;550 CLEAR
4-52
HP 5334A!B
Performance Tests
2550 DISP E$;"the 5334A/B"

:570 DISP 'will be placed ,n the LOCAL fl'lode. "
:25f::@ ,iO'3UB 8480
:=S:'j0 _OC>'1L 7
:.:S0Q) ',LEAR
'5 i 0 DI (:P e$
:~S;~0 DEP "REMOTE status LEO is now unlit."
:::530 GOTO 7910
;'540
~~G50 CHECKPOINT :3
21:;60 1$'" " Function Select"
2570
2t3d0 bO:3UB 7810
2690 i~!I SP E$ i "ver i fy the t "
2700 OISP "the FUNCTION key button annunciators light in sequence
", 10 OISP "froM FREQ A to DUM and back to
')r;' FREQ A. A tone wlll 50und"
27~:0 DISP "to Mark each function change."
27::30 01 '=.p
2740 DLoP USING "#,K,I" ; A$
2750 PAUSE
2760 HEi10TE A
2770 OUTPUT A ;" IN"
27B0 10A IT 1000
2730 OUTPUT A ;" FN 1"
2800 GOSUB 8540
iii 28 10 CUTPUT A ;" FN2"
I 2820
28;;0
2840
GOSUB 8540
OUTPUT A ;"FN3"
r;OSUB 8540
t 2850
2860
OUTPUT A ;"FN4"
GOSUB 8540
2870 OUTPUT A ;" FN5"
2880 GOSUB 8540
2890 OUTPUT A ;"FN6"
2900 GOSUB B540
291 0 OUTPUT A ;" FN7"
2920 GOSUB 8540
2940 GOSU8 8540
2960 GOSUB 8540
2970 OUTPUT A ;"FNI0"
2980 BOSUS 8540
2990 OUTPUT A ;"FNII"
3000 GOSUB 8540
3010 OUTPUT A I"FNI2"
3020 GOSU8 8540
3030 OUTPUT A ;"FNI"
3040 GOTO 7960
3050 I
3060 I CHECKPOINT 4
4-53
HP 5334MB
Performance Tests
3070 11-' Input Condit,oning-Channel A'

3080 S-4
3090 BOSU8 7S10
3100 DISP EI,'ver,fy that'
3110 DISP 'the display annunc.ators SLOPE,'
3120 DISP 'X10, AC, 50 Z, FILTER A, and COMA l,ght lin that order) for'
3130 OISP 'INPUT A. A tone will sound to'
3140 OISP 'Mark each input change.'
3150 OISP
3180 OISP AI
3i70 PAUSE
3180 REMOTE A
3190 OUTPUT A ,'IN AU0'
3200 WAIT 1000
2210 OUTPUT A ,'ASI'
2220 BOSUS 8540
2230 OUTPUT A " AS0 AX I '
3240 GOSUS 8540
2250 OUTPUT A " AX0 AA 1'
3280 GOSUS 8540
3270 OUTPUT A 1'!\A0 AZ 1 '
3280 GOSUS 8540
2290 OUTPUT A ,'AZ0 FII'
2200 BOSUS 8540
2210 OUTPUT A I 'FI0 COl'
2220 BOSUS 8540
2230 OUTPUT A ,'C00
2340 CLEAR
3350 DISP 'The 5334A/S 's ,n the READ PEAKS AMode.'
3360 DISP
3370 OUTPUT A ,'IN FNI4
3380 DISP Oll'.hows '0.00 0.00 A'.'
3390 DISP
3400 DISP FI
2;410 PAUSE
3420 CLEAR
3430 OUTPUT A ,'IN AU0'
3440 GOTO 7960
3450 I
2460 I CHECK PO I NT 5
2470 11-' Input Cond,tioning-Channel S'
21480 S-5
34S0 GOSUS 7810
3500 DISP EI,'verify that'
3510 DISP 'the d,splay annunc,ators SLOPE,'
2520 DISP 'XI0, AC, and 50 Z light I,n thatorderl for INPUT S. A tone w,ll'
3530 OISP "sound to Mark each input change.'L
3540 DISP
3550 DISP USING "I,K,I' , AI
3560 PAUSE
3570 REMOTE A
2580 OUTPUT A ,'IN AUG
HP 5334A1B
Performance Tests
3550 I,A IT I 000

3600 OUTPUT A I"BS1"
3610 GOSUB 8540
3620 OUTPUT A ;"B50 BXI"
:3S30 GOSUB 8540
3540 OUTPUT A ;"8X0 SAl"
3650 G05UB 8540
3660 OUTPUT Ai" BA0 BZ 1 "
3670 G05US 8540
3680 OUTPUT A I"S20 IN AU0
3630 CLEAR
3700 DISP "The 5334A/S i5 in the READ PEAKS BMOde."
3710 DISP
3720 OUTPUT A ;" IN FN15 "
:3730 DISP D$I"shows '0.00 0.00 b'."
3740 DISP
3750 DISP F$
3760 PAUSE
3770 CLEAR
3780 OUTPUT A I"IN AU0"
3790 GO TO 7960
3800 I
3810 I CHECKPOINT 6
3820 1$=" Trigger Levels
3830 S=5
3840 BOSU8 7810
3850 DISP E$I"the 5334A/8"
3860 OISP "will be prograMMed to the trigger levels below."
3870 DISP
3880 DISP "-2.34 1.55 L"
3S90 DISP
3900 PAUSE
3910 REMOTE A
3920 OUTPUT A I"TR0 SE0"
3930 OUTPUT A I"AT-2.34 8T+l .58
3940 OUTPUT A I"TR1 FNI3"
3950 CLEAR
3980 DISP 0$
3970 OISP "reads 1-2.34 1.56 L ' ."
3S80 DISP
3990 DISP F$
4000 PAUSE
4010 CLEAR
4020 DISP "Press RESET/LOCAL."
4030 DISP "Press READ LEVELS 4 tIMes."
4040 DISP
4050 OISP "This sequenoe allows the triggerlevel control to return to the front
panel. It
4060 DISP
4070 DISP "Adjust the A and B LEVEL knob. for a different level reading."
4080 DISP E$I "check that"
4-55
HP 5334A1B
Performance Tests
4090 DISP 'the correct leve15 are read."

4100 PAUSE
4 I 10 WA IT I000
4120 CLEAR
4130 OUTPUT A ,"FNI3"
4140 ENTER A , L$
4150 OISP "Trigger level. read are,
4160 DISP L$
4170 DISP
4180 DISP F$
4130 P"USE
4200 'JAIT 1000
4210 OUTPUT A ,"IN"
4220 GOTO 7360
4230 !
4240 , CHECKPOmT 7
4250 1$=" GATE TIME"
4260 5=7
4270 GOSUB 7810
4280 OISP E$;"verify that"
4290 DISP "the SINGLE CYCLE and 100-SATE"
4300 DISP "AVERASE d,.play annunciator. light. A tone wlil .ound"
4310 DISP "to Mark the functlon change."
4320 PAUSE
4330 REMOTE A
4340 OUTPUT A ,"GS1"
4350 SOSUB 8540
4360 OUTPUT A ,"SS0 SV1"
4370 SOSUB 8540
4380 CLEAR
4390 OISP "Ver,fy that the GATE TIME i • • etto 1.230 .econds by presslng GATE
TIME. "
4400 OUTPUT A ,"GV0 GAl .23"
4410 LOCAL (\
4420 GOTO 7910
4430 I
4440 I CHECKPOINT 8
4450 1$=" External ArMing
4460 S=8
4470 GOSUB 7810
4480 R=I
4480 DISP
4500 DISP "Press EXT ARM SELECT on the 5334A/B. Verify that the front "
4510 DISP "panel ,-eads 'St - SP -' "
4520 OISP
4530 REMOTE A
4540 OUTPUT A ,"XA2 X02"
4550 LOCAL A
4560 OISP F$
4570 PAUSE
4580 CLEAR
4580 REMOTE A
4-56
HP 5334A1B
Performance Tests
4600 0 ~p "The 53J4A/B wIll now be pro- grsMMed for POSITIVE external"
45 0 DIS~ "start and stop arM."
AE; ::' 0 [T~',P
4 30 [ISP "Press EXT ARM SELECT to verify this. I,

4540 FJ-Et'1OTE A
4b'i0 'iUTPUT A ,"i,Al XOI"
4f3FJ0 I '-)C:C\l. A
4E'{"Q) T~:_;:'
4bt=:0 DT '~,F' 8$
4:::: ':10 PAUSe:'
4""(1) CL,,;i\P
4"'10 DTI::F "Lastly, the 5334A WIll be pro- graMMed for NEGATIVE external"
4'-'~~ 0 !) "start and stop arM slopes."
4/:;0 [I :1"
4740 Ulc;F "Press EXT AHf1 SELECT to verify thj,5."
4 7 50 REiiOTE A
4~'60 OU~FUT A ;"XA3 X03"
47';'0 LOCAL A
4--'1::'0 DI:~F
47 r,i@ [iII:JF 8$
4(;00 FAU~-'E
401(1 C_f.::AR
4(=;:',::0 GO~UB 7960
4F~~0 I
4840 I CHECKPOINT 9
41350 [$""" l"lath Funct ion Test"
4Eb0 ;::,=~3
4i3'";'0 (~OSU8 7810
4B:::0 OL:;P E$;"ff:ath offset"

4900 DISP "and norMalize constants will De
49110 DISP "entered In the S334A/B. The OFS"
4920 DISP "and NML indicators on the"
4930 DISP "5334A/8 front panel will light."
4940 GO,U8 8490
4%0 RE!10TE A
4960 OUTPUT A ;"IN
49 7 0 OUTPUT A ;"MD0 MN3.S5 MOS.0"
4 880 i0A IT 1(00)
4990 LOCAL A
50)0)0 CLEAR
5010 DISP "VerIfy OFS and NML indicators are lit.'
5020 [i I S,P
5030 OISP "To check that the constants are"
5040 OISP "entered, press the SELECT/ENTER"
5050 OISP "key. and verify that the 5334A/8"
5060 OIf\P "front panel reads '2.0 1 . "
512)70 DISP
!i080 OIEP "Press the EELECT /E~ITER key"
5090 OISP "again. The display should read"
5100 0 I S,P "1::3.55 I • "
51100rEP
4-57
HP 5334A/B
Performance Tests
Table 4-4. HP-/B Operational Verification Program listing (Continued)
5120 DISP F$
".1313 PAUS"
5 140 .'1E110TE A
5150 OUTPUT A I"IN"
5150 50SUE 7950
5170 I
5180 I CHECKPO INT 10
5190 1$=" MeMor'y Recall
5200 S=10
"210 SOSUE 7E10
5220 DISP N$
5230 DISP
5240 IF N$="HP5334A" THEN 5320
52513 DISP "The 5334B doe. not have"
5260 DISP "this function."
5270 DISP
5280 DISP B$
5290 PAUSE
5300 SDSUB 8170
5310 SOTO 8420
5320 REMOTE A
53413 DISP E$I"the 5334A"
5350 DISP "will be prograMMed to a certain MeasureMent setup which will then
be stored."
53613 PAUSE
5370 CLEAR
5380 DISP "Ver,fy that the TI A-B and SINGLE CYCLE annunciators are 1 it. "
5390 DISP
54013 OISP "Pressing CONT again Will cause the counter to do a power-up re5et
5410 OUTPUT A FN5 TR1 ATi.5 BT1.2 551 GA.4

5420 PAU5E
5430 OUTPUT A ; "M5S"
5440 OUTPUT A I "CK "
5450 6EEP
54Bm CLEAR
54713 OISP E$;"the counter"
5480 DISP Rwill recall its previous state."
5490 PAUSE
5500 CLEAR
5510 OUTPUT A ;" MRS"
5520 LOCAL A
5530 DISP "Verify that the counter is in the TIME INTERVAL Mode,"
5540 OISP "The SIN6LE CYCLE annunciator ,. l,t. Pre.s READ LEVELS"
55513 OI5P "and ver,fy that the d,splay read5 '1.50 1.20 L 1 • "
55B0 DISP
5570 DISP P$
5580 PAUSE
5580 50TO 7960
5B00 I
4-58
f HP 5334A1B
I Performance Tests
5610 I CHECKPOINT 11
5620 1$=" Service Request"
5630 5=11
5640 GOSUB 7810
5650 DISP 'For th.s test, connect the TIME"
5660 DISP 'BASE Output froM the back panel"
5670 DI5P "of the 6554A/B to INPUT CHANNEL A uSing a BNC cable'
5680 DISP
5630 C~SP B$
5700 PAUSE
5710 CLEAR
5720 DISP E$;"the counter"
5730 DISP "will count the tiMe base, and service request Mask will be"
5740 DISP ".et. The SRQ laMp w.ll fla.h"
5750 DISP "5 tiMes on the counter, and the"
57B0 DISP 'HP 65 screen will di.play the
5770 DISP "count 5 tiMes."
5780 DISP
5790 DISP USn,G "#,K,/" I A$
5800 PAUSE
5810 REMOTE A
5820 OUTPUT A I'IN FNI GAl SMI5 WAI'
5850 CLEAR
5840 1=0
5850 STATUS 7,1 I Z
5860 ON INTR 7 GOTO 5900
5870 ENABLE INTR 718
5880 IF 1=0 THEN OISP 'Is BNC cable connected?"
5890 GOTO 5890
5900 M=SPDLL< A)
5910 IF BITIM,2) THEN GOTO 6070
5320 IF BITIM,5) THEN GOTO G070
5930 ENTER A I M$
5940 IF 1=0 THEN CLEAR
5950 DISP ,1$
5960 1=1+ I
5370 IF 1/5 THEN GOTO 5870
5980 CLEAR
5990 OISP
6000 DISP 'Oisconnect BNC cable,"
6010 OISP
6020 DISP F$
6030 PAUSE
B040 GOTO 7960
6050 STATUS 7,1 Z
6060 CLEAR
8070 R=0
8080 GOSUB 8750
8090 OISP ·Oisconnect 8ND cable.'
6100 DISP
6110 DISP F$
8120 PAUSE
4-59
HP 5334A/B
Performance Tests
6130 GO TO 7970
6140 I
6150 I CHECKPOINT 12
6160 11-" 51atus Byle"
6170 S=12
6180 G05UB 7810
5190 R-I
6200 DI5P EI,"lhe 5334A/8"
6210 OISP "t!Jill be reset, and the statu5 byle wlll be read by the"
6220 OISP "controller."
6230 G05UB 8480
8240 REMOTE A
6250 OUTPUT A ,"CK"
6C60 G05UB 8600
6270 GOSUB 8750
8280 GO TO 7970
6290 I
6300 , CHECKPOINT 13
6310 11-" Send Error Code"
6320 5-13
6330 60SUB 7810
6340 R-1
6350 OISP EI,"an"
6360 DI5P "unrecognlzable COMMand code wlllbe sent 10 Ihe 5334A/B to gener
ate an error...... "
6370 605UB 84B0
6380 REI~OTE A
6390 OUTPUT A ,"ILLEGAL COMMANO"
6400 CLEAR
6410 DISP "Verify that Ihe 5334M8 di5play 5hows 'ERROR 4.0' ,"
6420 OISP
6430 DISP E$;"the error"
6440 DISP "for Ih15 illegal COMMand will be sent 10 the controller."
6450 60SU8 8480
6460 LOCAL 7
6470 WAIT 3000
6480 E-0
6490 CLEAR
6500 DISP ;'The e>~pected value for this error code is 4
6510 RE~IOTE A
6520 OUTPUT A ,"TE"
6530 ENTER A , E
6540 DISP
6550 OISP "The returned value for this error code is ";Ei"."
6560 IF E-4 THEN R-R*1
6570 IF E<>4 THEN R-R*0
6560 DISP
6590 DISP FI
6600 PAUSE
6610 CLEAR A
6620 G05UB 8750
6830 I
4-60
HP 5334A/B
Performance Tests
564.0 CHECI1P0lNT 14
!3650 1$=" High Speed Output"
5660 5=14-
6670 SO'iUB 7810
6680 REi"IOTE A
5700 TOBUFFER :<$
6718 OISP ,n thI5 test, the 5334A/8"
6720 DISP "will be prograMMed to output frequency in the high speed data"
6730 DISP "output Mode. For this te5t, connect a BNC cable frOM the"
6740 DISP "TiMe Base Output on the 5334A/S"
6750 DI'3P "back panel to INPUT A."
6760 DI SP A$
6770 PAUSE
6780 CLEAR
6780 OUTPUT A ; "TRI GA.001 HSI"
GB00 OUTPUT A ; "le"
6810 ENTER A; Cl,C2,C3,C4
6820 TRAN8FER A TO XI FH8
fi830 OISP 01;'shoW5 'FAst dAtA'."
8fi40 DISP
6850 FOP .1=0 TD 4
6660 IF INT(NUMIX$[8*.I+1 ,8*.1+1 J 1/16 1>8 THEN XI.J i=9.'38E98 @ liOTO 7070
6870 IF INTI NUI11 XII 8*,)+4,8*.1+41 i/16 i>8 THEN X1.1 1=9. 98E99 @ GOTCI 7070
61380 FOR 1=1 TCI 3
6890 P$ [ 2 * 1-1 ,2 *I - 1 J=CHRI lINT I NUI1 I XI [ 1+8 * .I ,1 +8 *.1 J ill 6 1+48 i
6800 11$ [ 2 * I ,2 *I J=CHR$ I B I NAND I NUMI X$[ 1+8 d ,1+8* J J i , I 5 1+48 i
6810 NEXT !
6820 E=Vf\L( RaJ)
6830 FOR 1=4 TO 6
6,J40 ss [2 *I -7 ,2* ! -7 J=CHR$ I I NT( NUM I X$ [ 1+8 *.1 , ]+8* J 1 ill 6 i+48 I
6950 S$ [ 2 *I -6 ,2* 1-6 ] =CHRI I BI NANDI NUM I X$ [ 1+8* J , 1+8 * J J ) , 15 )+48 I
~
6'360 NEXT I
6970 B=\,JAL (S$ )
6980 C=NUM(X$[8*J+7,8*J+7J J
6980 O-NUMIX$[S*J+8,8*.J+8J)
t 7000 IF C-C3(-4 THEN C-C+256
7010 IF D-C 1 -4 THEN D=0+256
7020 T=8+( C-C3 )/C4-( D-C 1 I/C2
7030 XIJ )=E/T*10000000
7040 I'D T .]
7050 OISP
7060 OISP F$
7070 PAUSE
7080 CLEAR
7090 DISP "Verlfy that the screen displays the tiMe base frequency 5 tiMe5."
7100 OISP
71 10FOP .1-0 TCI 4
7120 DISP USING 7130 ; J+l ,X( cT)
7130 IMAGE 30,2X,"FREQUENCY "O.OOOOOe,' Hz"
7140 NEXT .I
7150 OI'iR
7160 OISP F$
4-61
HP 5334A1B
Performance Tests
7170 PAUSE
7180 CLEAR
71S0 DISP 'Disconnect the ENC cable.'
7200 DISP
7210 OISP 8$
7220 PAUSE
7230 OUTPUT A ,'HS0 IN'
7240 GO TO 7S60
7250
7250 I END OF PROGRAM
7270 CLEAR
7280 OISP H$
7290 DISP
7300 oISP CHECKPOINT RESULTS'
7310 oISP FOR HP-IB AooRESS';A
7320 OISP
7330 oISP H$
7340 IF C-2 THEN oISP @ GoTO 7380
7350 oISP
7350 oISP F$
7370 PAUSE
7380 CLEAR
7390 FOR I-I TO 14
7400 IF RII)-0 THEN R$-"NOT PERFORMED"
7410 IF RIll-I THEN R$-'FI1IL'
7420 IF RII)-2 THEN R$-"PASS'
7430 IF I-I THEN oISP "CHECKPOINT', I;' ',R$ @ GOTO 7460
7440 IF 1/10 THEN oISP , ';1;" ',R$ @ GoTo 7460
7450 0I SP " , ; I , R$
7450 NEXT I
7470 IF C-2 THEN oISP USING '5/' @ GoTo 7650
7480 oISP USIN6 'I,K,/" , F$
7490 PAUSE
7500 CLEAR
7510 oISP "Would you like a pr.nted vers.onol the checkpo.nt results?"
7520 DISP
7530 OISP "Yes - Press K1 to receive a printed version."
7540 DISP
7550 DISP "No - Press K4 to proceed."
7560 ON KEYI 1 ,"YES" GoTo 7510
7570 OFF KEYI 3
7580 ON KEYI 4," NO" GOTo 7670
7590 KEY LABEL
7600 GoTo 7500
7510 CLEAR
7620 CRT IS 2
7630 C=2
7640 GoTO 7270
7550 CRT IS 1
7660 C=1
7570 LOCAL 7
7580 ABORTIo 7
4-62
HP 5334A1B
Performance Tests
C7f=i:-30 f~t~VJIND
7700 CU~:AR
~710 DISP USING "5/"
"":20 DI:~~F- H$
1730 DISP
77 40 D.L~,P END OF HP 5334A/8 HP-I8"
T7S0 Ol3P OPERATION VERIFICATION PROGRAM"
77S0 DL'::·P
7770 DT~-::P H$
'7'780 END
7790
7f'0)0 I
7210 I J8ROUTINE TO PRINT CHECKPOINT HEADINGS
","830 CLEfiR
7830 OI,P H$
"'840 DI 1;P
7850 OIS,P 6$;S
7880 DEP 1$
7870 OISP
(280) OI,'P H$
7890 DEP
7800 RETURN
7910 I
7930 SUBPROGRAM TO TERMINATE CHECKPOINT EXECUTION
I
(830) DI-;P
7840 DEP F$
7850 PAU8E
7860 GO"UB 7880
7870 GO"U8 81(0)
7980 GOiO 8420
7990 I
8000 I SU8ROUTINE TO PROMPT USERFOR CHECKPOINT RESULTS
f'010 CLEAR
8020 DISP "Pres5 the 50ft key correspondingto the results of this"
8030 DISP "checkpoInt ...
8040 DIS'P
8050 DISP "PASS - Pres. K1 to Indicate that the 5334A/8 passed."
8060 DISP
8070 DISP "FAIL - pre.s K4 to indIcate that the 5334A/B faIled,"
8080 ON KEY# 1," PASS" 60TO 8130
b090 OFF KEY# 3
8100 ON KEY# 4," FAIL" 60TO 8150
B110 KEY LABEL
BI20 60TO 8120
BI30 R(S/=2
[J 140 RETURN
BI50 R(S/=I
el50 RETURN
B170 I
81e0 I SU8ROUTINE TO DETERMINE NEXT PR06RAM STEP

elB0 CLEAR
4-63
HP 5334A1B
Performance Tests
Table 4-4. HP-1B Operational Verification Program Listing (Continued)
8200 OISP uPres5 a 50ft key to select the desired check,point ... "
13210 DISP
a220 OISP "NEXT - Press Kl to perforM the next checkpoint."
S230 OISP
8240 DISP "REPEAT - Press K3 to repeat this checkpoint. "
8250 DISP
8260 DISP "60TO. - Pres. K4 to select an arbitrary checkpoint."
8270 ON KEY' 1," NEXT" GOTO 8320
8280 ON KEY' 3," REPEAT" GO TO 8340
8280 ON KEYI 4," GOTOI" GO TO 8360
8300 KEI LABEL
8310 GOTO 8310
3320 0=5+1
8330 RETURN
8340 D=S
8.350 RETURN
8360 CLEAR
8370 DISP "Enter checkpOInt nUMber desired 10 to 14), and pre.s END LINE"
8380 DISP "10 TERMINATES PROGRAM)."
8380 INPUT 0
8400 IF 0(0 OR 0>14 THEN 8360
13410 RETURN
8420 I
8430 I SUBPROGRAM TO BRANCH EXECUTION TO DESIREO CHEC,:POINT

:344121 IF 0=0 THEN 7250
8450 IF 0>7 THEN 8470
8460 ON 0 GO TO 1B60,2270,2640,3050,3450,3800,4230
8470 ON 0-7 GOTO 4430,4830,5170,5600,6140,6280,6630,7250
8480 I
:3490 I SUBROUTINE TO PROMT USER ANO PAUSE
8500 DISP
8510 DISP A$
8520 PAUSE
8530 RETURI"
8540 I
8550 I SUBROUTINE TO BEEP AND WAIT 1.5 SECONDS
8560 BEEP 250,20
8570 WAIT 1500
8580 RETURN
8590 I
86vJ0 I
13610 I SUBROUTINE TO READ A STATUS BYTE
8620 M$="ND DATA READ"
8630 B=SPOLL 1A)
86411 WAlT 1000
81350 CLEAR
13660 DISP "The correct value for the status byte after reset is 16
867v) DISP
H5'80 DISP "The returned value of the status byte is";8;"."
8630 IF B=16 THEN R=Rol
8700 IF B<>16 THEN R=R 0 0
8710 OISP
4-64
HP 5334A1B
Performance Tests
Table 4-4. tiP-IS Operational Verification Program Listing (Continued)
o CEP F$
~:~0 PhLiSE
740 PEiURN
;' ::~;U I
') '~' ECl UBROUTINE TO INFORM USER THAT THE HP 85 HAS VERIFIED THE TEST
ee"7 (\ CL EAR
IF t1~ 1 THEN GO TO 8830
gO R( !~: 1
IIee00 OISP "The HP 85 has verified ttlat the 5334A!8 'Failed this checkpoint."
if 10 "AIT 3000
Eb20 REe TURN
F:;30 R(:3 )=2
8840 DISP "The HP 85 has verified that the 5334A/8 passed this checkpoint."
[;850 GIA IT 3000
'2860 RETURN
i
I
I
~
4-65
HP 5334A/B
Performance Tests
4-66

HP 5334B User Manual 7029591

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

HP 5334B User Manual 7029591

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

HP 5334B User Manual 7029591

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

~

HP 5334A AND HP 5334B

SERIAL NUMBER PREFIX: 2510A (HP 5334A),

This manual applies directly to HP 5334As with Serial

The manual for an HP 5334A/B with a seriai number prefix

@Copyrighl HEWLETT-PACKARD COMPANY 1987

MANUAL PART NUMBER 05334-90028

* * * " MANUAL IDENTIFICATION * * * *

ABOUT THIS SUPPLEMENT

The information in this supplement is provided to correct manual errors and to

Change and correction information in this supplement is itemized by page

HOW TO USE THIS SUPPLEMENT

PAGE 1-2. GENERAL INFORMATION:

11 All Serials Trigger Level; Accuracy (Read Levels:

PAGE 1-5, TABLE 1-1. HP MODEL 5334A/B SPECIFICATIONS (Continued):

11 All Serials OPTIONS, OPTION 010 High Stability Timebase (Oven):

Long Term (Aging Rate):

A <5 x 10- 10 per day after 24 hour warm-up when:

1. oscillator off-time was less than 24 hours.

c. < 1 x 10- 7 per year for continuous operation.

1. oscillator is operated in a 25 C environment with 20 Vdc Oven Supply voltage applied.

2. oscillator off-time was less than 24 hours.

Final value is defined as oscillator frequency 24 hours after turn-on.

PAGE 3-49, OPERATION AND PROGRAMMING:

All Serials Table 3-4. Failure Messages:

/1 >Add NOTE following Table 3-4:

Example: OUTPUT 703; "FN9, XAI, XAjJ"

PAGE 4-39. PERFORMANCE TESTS:

All Serials >Change "+10" to "+100" at the t1VERIFYU step.

PAGE 4-43. PERFO~NUll~CE TESTS:

PAGE 4-57, TABLE 4-4. HP-IB VERIFICATION PROGRAM LISTING (Cont'd):

All Serials >Change line 6390 to read as follows:

BEFORE APPLYING POWER

SAFETY EARTH GROUND

Indicates terminal is connected [: 'I] The CAUTION sign denotes a

Section Tille Page

GENERAL INFORMATION . 1-1

/II OPERATION AND PROGRAMMING 3-1

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

Section Title Page

III OPERATION AND PROGRAMMING (Continued)

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

Section Title Page

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)

Section Title Page

IV PERFORMANCE TESTS 4-1

4-30. Preliminary Procedure 4-13

Table Title Page

1-1. HP Model 5334A1B Specifications 1-2

2-1. AC Power Cables Available 2-5

3-1. HP 5334A Trigger/Sensitivity Level Settings 3-29

4-1. HP 5334A/B Operational Verification Test Record Card 4-12

Figure Tille Page

1-1. Model 5334A/B Universal Frequency Counters and Accessories 1-0

2-1. HP 5334A Voltage Selection with Power Module PC Board . 2-2

3-1. 5implified Block Diagram of the Reciprocal Counter . 3-2

LIST OF FIGURES (Continued)

figure Title Page

3-44. FAIL Message Display 3-48

4-1. Time Base Reference Setup 4-14